JP6682158B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a variation effect on a display device is provided with a plurality of light emitting means that emit light in association with the variation effect performed in the variation effect (for example, Patent Document 1). The plurality of light emitting means are controlled to emit light in various modes, and are adapted to enliven the variation effect and notify various information.

JP, 2008-079163, A (Paragraph [0024] and Drawing 1).

  By the way, information necessary for management of the gaming machine is printed on the board on which the light emitting means is mounted. Such information is necessary for management of the gaming machine, but since it is irrelevant to the game, there is a risk that the world view of the gaming machine will be disturbed by the visual recognition of this information, and the entertainment level will be reduced. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

  The following are effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned object. The operation and the like will be described as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but are not limited in any way.

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A light emitting unit capable of emitting light in association with a game effect executed as the game progresses,
A decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on the front mounting surface;
A light-emitting decorative portion having a light-transmitting property and covering the front side of the decorative substrate,
A white coating film is formed on the front mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and a mounting auxiliary symbol is formed on the white coating film with a yellow paint so as to identify the light emitting means.
Inside the light-emitting decoration portion, an obscuration member that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting auxiliary symbol by changing the refractive index of light is arranged.
It is characterized in.

  With the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing and retracting direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, and (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit by disassembling it. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is a rear cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) taken apart and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back at the hinge side. It is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state in which the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 107. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state in which a front unit is cut in parallel with a surface of a game panel to show a game area in which a game ball flows and an obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and a game panel as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning a prize mouth, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning a prize mouth in an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing a portion of a starting opening unit and a side unit in the game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st special winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member It is the perspective view which looked at from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a second attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing which expanded the right part in the game area in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of the game board in the state where the door frame is made transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in the back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back behind production unit and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back and rear production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back behind production unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration with a back back decoration board. 142A is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiating plate and the back rear decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with a broken line. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) (A) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in the same part as the decoration body of (a). It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front surface of a back back movable decoration body, and shows the relationship between a decoration by a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back and back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a light guide radiation plate and a back rear decoration board in a site | part of 1st LED by a cross section, (b) shows 2nd LED on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiating plate in the site | part which exists from the front, (c) is an LED accommodating part of a light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, and 1st LED of a back rear decorative board It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands a part of back decoration board and shows with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back rear decoration substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back rear decoration substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in a rear-back movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration of 2nd embodiment different from the back back movable decoration of FIG. 142 in a cross section, (b) is a back back movable decoration of 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing composition of in a section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing composition of a back back movable decoration of a fourth embodiment in section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is seen the rear lower left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back middle lift mechanism of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back middle lift mechanism of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering of the lower back inside decoration body unit by the lower back inside raising / lowering mechanism in a lower back inside production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle decoration body unit in a back bottom middle effect production unit from a front, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each and each detection sensor by a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement | positioning of LED of the lower back middle decoration body unit in a lower back middle effect unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back production effect unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back production effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main production unit for each main member and was seen from behind. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down lifting decorative body unit in the back unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back side elevation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from a front, (b) is the back side elevation decoration body in the state which moved the back side elevation decoration body unit to an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back side elevation decoration body unit in the back side production unit to the appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left effect | production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left production unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect | production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decoration body unit of the back rear right effect | production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decoration body unit of the back rear right effect | production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect | production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back front left production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effecting unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back-rear right rendering unit It is a front view of the game board showing the rear right rotating decorative body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state where the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is the front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit respectively from the closed state to the open state. The back and rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear and rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear left rotating decorative body of the rear rear left production unit From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit rising from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. It is a front perspective view (a) of a drawer connector mounted in a relay board provided in a main part frame, and is a rear perspective view (b). FIGS. 7A to 7C are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and are small DIP type connectors electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing a solder bridge of each terminal. 209 (c) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c), and FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal of the last stage and a solder escape pattern by separating by a predetermined distance. It is a schematic diagram (a) of overresist applied to each terminal of a main part frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a schematic diagram (b) of a section of an XX line in (a). It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. FIG. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector in a modification is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. 215 (b) is an enlarged view of part B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a view showing the shape of a beta land at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on a base body is in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, and shows a copper foil on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a surface, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land at the time of flowing a peripheral control board to a solder tank. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 224 according to the second embodiment, as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 224. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment. 224 according to the third embodiment, as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 224. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the method and is the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate. Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic diagram of the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (through hole having lands) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the attachment procedure of the peripheral control board etc. concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the land formed around the through-hole of the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment, (a), and the figure which shows a foil removal area (b). FIG. 7A shows a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 8B shows a land and a screw designation symbol, and FIG. (C) of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 7A is a view showing a part of a rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment, and shows a part of a base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that a state where a conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut along a line CL in FIG. 238 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that a state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed can be seen. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a part thereof. It is a front part enlarged drawing of a cover which constitutes a peripheral control unit which has an opening which can insert and contact a tip part of a contact probe concerning a 5th embodiment. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the specific substrate to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows a method, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board. Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged); schematic diagram of the rear surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole having lands) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the back side of a production display, and is a figure which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of a liquid crystal output substrate ( 2B is a partially enlarged view of the B portion shown in FIG. 7A and the C portion shown in FIG. 5B, showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through the cutout portion. It is a figure (c). It is a figure (a) showing the state where a flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state without. It is a figure (a) showing arrangement of a connector of a relay board, and a figure (b) showing a state where wiring and a connector of a harness were normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a state in which a wiring or a connector of a harness is not normally connected. 245 is a modification example of FIG. 245, showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board and the component part arrangement lines, and shows a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b) and is a figure (c) showing the state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 2A is a partial perspective view of a game board for explaining an area where a wiring groove is to be attached, as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 2B is a view illustrating a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board. 246 is a continuation of FIG. 247, showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when a game board is seen from the back in the state where the wiring groove concerning a 2nd embodiment was attached to the back side of a game board. It is a perspective view showing the state of various kinds of wiring when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the disassembly before. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind after being disassembled. It is a front view which shows the arrangement | positioning relationship between an LED bear chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view showing the diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the state in which the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in FIG. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a state where the plug is normal, and FIG. 2B is an enlarged view of a portion Z shown in FIG. 2A and a diagram showing an abnormal state where insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is insufficient. (C). It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 269 is an enlarged view of a part D in FIG. 263 as viewed from a non-LED mounting surface. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 265 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ in FIG. 265 or a portion D ″ in FIG. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ ″ in FIG. 268 viewed from a non-LED mounting surface. This is a method of arranging a surface display portion capable of specifying a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative substrate and LEDs respectively corresponding to the plurality of LEDs. It is the schematic which shows (the 1) (b), the case of centralized arrangement | positioning (part 2) (c), and the case of distributed arrangement (part 2) (d), respectively. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 279 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 271. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 277. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the pay-out control unit power-on processing following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prior judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol design determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit type, (C) is a small hit It is a small hit symbol design determination table used in the lottery process for types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven, and (B) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven in a modified example. It is a time chart which shows about the control state at the time of driving of a movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect which makes a movable decoration body appear in front of the effect display device. It is a time chart which shows a control state at the time of a player participation type production. It is a side view which shows the light from the light emission decoration body in a waiting position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in the appearance position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a figure which shows the back rear decoration substrate in which the several hole was provided. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area | region in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the rear left. It is a figure showing the opening provided in the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 99 is an enlarged schematic diagram illustrating a part of a cross section cut along a line CC in FIG. 99 (a). It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main frame 4 This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

  Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear the sound of deeper bass.

  The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main frame base 501. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image. 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effect and light emission effect in accordance with the game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , A general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting A mouth 2004, a first winning prize opening 2005, and a second winning prize opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N having a gold color is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As a result, the player can enjoy the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the rear rear effect unit 3100, and the back bottom. Left rendering unit 3200, back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, back front right rendering It is possible to entertain the player by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main frame 4 is for opening and closing.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is made of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that divides the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

  Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c in a flat plate shape extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further front side By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Is attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 makes the horizontal fixing portion 13a abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion of the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The right upper connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b that is behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 brings the horizontal fixing portion 23a into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically in the front-rear direction with a constant width and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 24a to the left. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain member 43, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and the front side of which is open, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the left-right direction length is the same as the outer frame upper member 30 left-right direction length.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction toward the front end. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the opened rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b that connect the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball catching mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally spaced apart from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction and attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 connects the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

  The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b around the front side to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left end extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

  The lock member 52 is capable of blocking the bearing groove 51c in a plan view in a state where the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

  This lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion with respect to a vertical center. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay in the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically in a front view, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The left side frame 400 of the door frame and the upper side of the dish unit are attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted near the right end of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The handle rear relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear rear lower part on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. Hereinafter, a frame constituted by the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved within the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 such that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatably attached to the main frame 4, and the front face of the main frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The rear side of the door frame base 101 is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to a rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear handle cover relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear handle substrate 106 from the rear side, and the case which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at a lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at a lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at a left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides forming an inner circumference, respectively, approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in a lower right corner in a front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b that is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c that penetrates back and forth in the insertion lock 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from a rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

  Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the player side).

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a rectangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower rear corner of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the various boards of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

  The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attaching seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hooking member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction in a width that is wider than the upper-lower width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper bowl ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the sides at the front ends of the pair of front extension portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be vertically movable, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

  The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

  When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Accordingly, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 cooperates with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132 to form a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is open, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box-like shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball discharge member 143 are rear-covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl 241b. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearwardly open portion on the upstream end side of the ball-elimination guideway 241c from the rear side.

  The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around an axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and has its lower end extending in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-sliding slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-sledding button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the entrance 141a and the partition 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation when the ball feeding solenoid 145 drives the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation to move in the left-right direction.

  In the ball feeding member 144, the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b holds the partition portion 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking section 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is vertically swung by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is vertically swung in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a, which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and extends in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that the ball feeding unit 140 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the ball removing member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to perform partitioning, and the ball outlet 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. 143a can be prevented from bouncing back.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a and an upper piece portion 148a which are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center for a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the gaming area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the provided string to move the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening 2002 and the like, the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launching device 540 is hit. The string attached to the illegal game ball B by momentum is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal gaming ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving passage 610b of the main body frame 4 which opens rearward at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. The storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

  The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operation protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotating position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  The crime prevention cover 170 is a state in which the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is provided. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. . As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183, which is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183. And a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a front end side protruding outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 in a front view, and a base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end projecting from the position inside the slit 182e with respect to the center of rotation of the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first projection 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And has a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion of the handle 182 that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface thereof, and is separated from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is more than the first protrusion 182a. It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is formed to be transparent. An inner lens 185a that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is mounted on the back surface of the handle cover 185 and inside the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 arranged behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface). In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner lens 185a (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be performed on the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. (May be formed in a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. Note that the front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and the rear surface together with the front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the rear surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view, and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original to play the game, and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball which is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player, and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light emission, the decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the operation operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

  The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface is on the left side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the upper plate 201 is provided with the ball lending operation unit 220 on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is provided on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view goes under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is a state in which the bottom plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

  In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202 a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game balls B stored in can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, and an upper plate that has an upper plate 201 that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, an attachment base 213 attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and an attachment base 213 attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 to the right of the attachment base 213. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. An upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward at a lower part to the left of the left-right center when viewed from the front and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c in a tubular shape, and the front and rear on the upper right side in front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which is located at the right end of the upper plate body 212 and which extends vertically.

  In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and an upper portion on the left side of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g that penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate-ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball-removing unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in a front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened in the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled in the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removing guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removing unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c of the unit 240 after removing the bowl and the cutout portion 211d.

  The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward more largely than the center of the left and right in front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end is retracted rearward from the most forwardly bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is mounted so that the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and a portion of the upper plate main body 212 which is closed at the upper end near the right end thereof goes under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

  The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting projection 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (illustrated in the drawing). After omission of cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine by subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, and to adjust the sound volume related to the performance to a large or small value.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending operation base 223 on the upper surface of the base portion 221, which is located to the lower right of the upper ball extraction button 222. , A volume down button 227 disposed below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base 221, and a ball disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. A lending button 224, a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a return button 225 disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223. Spherical rental display unit (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (a distance dimension in which the upper ball removing button 222 moves downward when the player performs a pressing operation). The pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (lead type) can be pressed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves to the upper original position, the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (the distance dimension at which the upper ball removing button 222 moves downward when the player performs the pressing operation). The pressing operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be pressed slightly downward to turn on the return button tactile switch 225a, while the player releases the pressing operation. The return button 225 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display unit is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or remaining money is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

  The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape and is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces upward, and the player pushes the button to move it slightly downward (the player presses it). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downwards by operating.) Volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) push operation part is pushed down slightly for volume up button While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the original upper position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (when the player presses the It is smaller than the distance dimension in which the upper tray ball removal button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) is pushed down slightly and is used for the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation section of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

  The ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or front surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, Via a door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and an interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, it is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or front surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , The door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side, and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side without passing through the body frame 4 Drive board unit 1700 (an effect drive board 1720 described below for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). The game console 5 is electrically connected to a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later). The ball lending board 228 and the volume adjusting board 229 are accommodated in the ball lending operation unit 220 while being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220.

  In this way, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in which three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. A door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, a volume adjusting board 229 housed in a ball lending operation unit 220 in which a volume up button tactile switch 226a and a volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted, and an electrical circuit. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the side of the door frame 3 that is connected to is a completely different relay board. In various relay boards on the side of the door frame 3, the tactile switch for ball lending button 224a and the tactile for return button Signal transmission path for switch 225a and three 7-segment LEDs, and volume up button A signal transmission path for Tactile 226a, and a volume down button for Tactile 227a, but has a configuration which is not mixed in the same relay board. This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which a so-called main-side signal is transmitted. In contrast to the configuration via the frame main relay board 104, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, it is configured to pass through the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

  On the upper surface (front or front surface) of the ball rental board 228, a ball rental button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, and pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which three 7-segment LEDs are soldered are removed. In the entire region, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated green resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball rental substrate 228, a solid green color is applied over the entire area excluding a pad, a through hole, a land, and the like on which an area for mounting a connector (lead type) (not shown) is soldered. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the mounted surface of the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs are provided. In the vicinity of the side electronic component, attributes of the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is to be arranged (further, a shape of the front side electronic component, a size of the front side electronic component, and the like). The front side notation indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). It is printed on the green resist by silk printing. Although not shown, the component number of the back side electronic component and the back side electronic component are arranged near the back side electronic component such as a connector (surface mount type) on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the back-side electronic component (the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the model of the back-side electronic component. Is printed on the solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green.

  On the other hand, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are removed from the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229. In the entire region, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, the entire area except for the pad, through hole, land, and the like where the connector (not shown) is mounted is soldered with a white resist that is solid-coated. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, near the mounted electronic components such as the mounted volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a. The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like (the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The front side notation indicating the component mounting direction (mounting direction) and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) The solid white color is a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. Is printed on the resist by silk printing. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the rear electronic component and the position where the rear electronic component is arranged near the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  As described above, the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229 contained in the ball rental operation unit 220 adjacent to the ball rental operation unit 220 is different. To explain this, the signal transmission path for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is the path through which the so-called main-side signal is transmitted, as described above. Therefore, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. Via a door frame main relay board 104 on the side of the door frame 3 and an interface board 635 on the side of the main body frame 4 and electrically with a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. While connected, the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the volume down button As described above, the signal transmission path for the tactile switch 227a is not a path through which a signal on the main side is transmitted. Therefore, the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are operated for ball lending. It is mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the unit 220, and does not pass through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main frame 4 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (the later-described effect drive for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later) The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side via the board 1720) It is electrically connected later to peripheral control board 1510) and can control the progress of the presentation.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later) on the game board 5 which is a control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and the ball rental board 228 electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to the ball rental operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. However, while the volume control substrate 229 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, the ball rental substrate 228 is coated with a green resist solution different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, the worker performing the wiring connection electrically contacts the volume control board 229 using the color of the coating film thus formed (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. A wiring to be, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of the wiring connected sphere rental substrate 228 and electrically, erroneous connection. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

  In addition, the volume control board 229 includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to largely adjust the volume related to the effect, and a volume down button tactile switch that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the effect. 227a are mounted, and the detection results (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) of the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are used as the control device in the pachinko machine 1. This is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later), and the player can request the ball rental board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball rental. Tactile switch 224a for ball lending button and ball lending machine (for example, , CR unit), a return button tactile switch 225a for requesting the return of cash or a prepaid card, and three 7 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The segment LED is mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) detected by the tactile switch for ball lending button 224a and the tactile switch for return button 225a is a ball rental machine which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. (For example, a CR unit). When a drive signal from a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) is transmitted to the ball rental board 228, a ball rental display unit including three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 provides a ball rental display. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, volume control is performed by a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, described later) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 is controlled based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 (a later-described peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. No electronic component constituting the display unit to be displayed is mounted. In this way, the path through which the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later, which can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 which is a control device in the pachinko machine 1. And a path transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, and is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that a white resist solution is applied to the ball rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball rental substrate 228. A wrong connection is prevented by forming a green coating film to be formed.

  Also, while surface mount type electronic components are employed as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. Tactile switch for ball lending button 224a, tactile switch for return button 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs are lead type electronic components, so that the type of electronic component mounted on the substrate (lead type or surface mount) Based on one of the types, the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be determined. This can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection.

  By the way, the reflectance of light is highest in white and lower in dark color, but as described above, the volume control substrate 229 not provided with the display section is coated with the white resist solution to form the white coating film. On the other hand, the ball lending substrate 228 provided with the ball lending display section is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency of reflection of light emitted by the ball rental display unit on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball rental board 228 so as not to hinder the performance of the rendering device excluding the ball rental display unit. Can be. In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

  In the present embodiment, the ball rental board 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. (For example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not pass through the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (an effect described below for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). Via the drive board 1720) and the interface control board 635 on the body frame 4 side, the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (controls the progress of the effect). Bets are electrically connected later to peripheral control board 1510) and can. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 exist on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental substrate 228 is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, and the green resist liquid is applied. The same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the door frame sub-intermediate board 105 on the door frame 3 side so that a green coating film is formed. It is preferable that a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film. In addition, the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution, and is a single-sized copper-clad laminate (base). When arranging and cutting a plurality of substrates from a material, the substrate may be cracked or torn.

  By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one fixed-size copper-clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint and the resist liquid are reduced. Are the same, and a plurality of substrates having the same color are manufactured. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not it is manufactured from the same standard copper clad laminate (base material) by examining a white substrate, and the white substrate has a problem. When the defect is found, when another defect is confirmed, it is sufficient to first trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one, which has an advantage of contributing to early detection of the defect.

  In addition, the volume control operation of adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 to a large level or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to a low level is performed for a certain period (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. After the start, the peripheral display MPU (hereinafter, a peripheral control MPU that has the function of the peripheral control MPU may be referred to as a “peripheral control IC” instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated for a certain period of time. Before and after the special symbol is stopped for a certain period of time, one or both of them, etc.) may be always executed by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC), and the customer waiting state Then, when the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) performs a demonstration by the effect display device 1600, a specific condition such as Or it may be set to be executed by the peripheral control MPU only if you are standing (or peripheral control IC). In addition, the volume control result based on the volume control operation of adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or the volume controlled related to the performance based on the volume down button 227 is immediately changed to the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control MPU). The control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) may be delayed at a timing later than the timing of the volume adjustment operation according to the situation (whether or not the display is fluctuating, the progress of the effect, etc.). It may be reflected.

  Incidentally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-0779163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). However, among the plurality of substrates, they are adjacent to each other. In the case where the wiring is connected to the wiring board, the person who performs the wiring connection work may mistakenly connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removal of upper bowl and after removal of upper bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored in the lower tray 202.

  The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removing the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl.

  The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and has a cylindrical front base 231 extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removing button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 of the upper bowl removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Is equipped with.

  The rear base 241 is a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a rearward direction, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at a position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guide passage 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a that projects forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and projects forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

  In the units 230 before and after removing the upper bowl ball, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is moved. Through the front slider 232, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper dish ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the moving position. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper bowl removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl removing slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation-transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

  In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower portion of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211. The dish unit base 251 covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The left upper decoration unit 270 and the plate right upper decoration unit 275, and the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit which are attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, over the entire surface of the plate unit body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate body 251 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower plate body 251 has its bottom surface located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211 in the state where it is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the lower plate ball vent hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart in the left-right direction. Is provided with a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit are provided on the front surface of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d is of a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom surface cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region below the above. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is exposed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

  The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that penetrates vertically in the right front corner in plan view, and the lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower bowl removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower bowl removal lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin protruding upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In the normal state, the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has the slider 262 located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (the lower dish ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole from the position of the through hole to the rear, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

  It should be noted that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent upper left dish decoration 271, a transparent upper left dish lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, and an upper left dish inner lens 272. A decorative plate 273 mounted on the rear side of the lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

  The dish upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decoration 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The upper left decorative plate 271 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper left decoration 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the back surface may be lens-cut. The plate may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The upper left dish inner lens 272 is inserted into the interior of the upper left decoration 271 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the upper left plate decorative body 271 can be illuminated by emitting light. . The dish upper left inner lens 272 is formed to be transparent. The surface of the plate upper left inner lens 272 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the plate upper left decoration placed behind the plate upper left inner lens 272 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 273 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the rear surface together with the surface of the upper left dish inner lens 272 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the upper left dish inner lens 272, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 includes a transparent dish upper right decorative body 276 extending in a semi-cylindrical shape, a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right inner. And a right upper decorative board 278 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) mounted on the rear side of the lens 277.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be made on the surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be made on the back face together with the front face of the dish upper right decorative body 276. (Or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the upper right decorative body 276 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted type and capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light. . The dish upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the dish upper right decoration placed behind the dish upper right inner lens 277 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 (may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper right decoration body 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. A raised step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his / her step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his / her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, the level difference between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing out forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, and a lower left dish inner. And a lower left decorative plate 283 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) mounted on the rear side of the lens 282.

  The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 has a spherical shape. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decoration 281 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut on the back side. The plate may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the plate lower left decoration 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The lower left dish inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower left dish decoration 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 is transparent. The surface of the dish lower left inner lens 282 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the dish lower left decoration arranged behind the dish lower left inner lens 282. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the surface of the lower left inner lens 282 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end is submerged in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decorative plate unit 285 includes a transparent lower right decorative plate 286 extending in a semi-cylindrical shape, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative plate 286. And a lower right plate decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). , Is provided.

  The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. This lower right decoration 286 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the lower right decorative piece 286 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the upper surface of the lower right decorative piece 286. May be provided (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 (may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The dish lower right inner lens 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decoration body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By making them emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated and decorated. You can The lower right inner lens 287 is transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be scattered and refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 288 are clearly hard to visually recognize from the player side. A lens cut may be made (a polyhedron may be formed), and a lens cut may be made on the back surface together with the surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (a polyhedron may be formed). May be formed), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the dish lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape, and therefore, the right end looks as if it sunk into the door frame 3. The plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate lower right decoration body 286. Therefore, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be light-emitted and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and the outer circumference of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit. And a transparent annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery of the inner periphery 302 and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation between the operation ring transmission unit 350 and the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation portion base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation portion 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation portion base 320, and the operation portion so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with an open upper portion and a rear portion.

  The performance operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a rear side of the plate center upper inner lens 313 are mounted so that light can be emitted forward. A plate center upper decoration substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens Decorative substrate 31 under the plate center mounted on the rear side of 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of radiating light forward It has a, and.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent upper dish center decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along the front end of the lower unit cover 311 in a semi-circular shape, and below the center dish upper decoration 312a. A transparent lower plate decoration 312b extending in a semicircular shape such that the semicircular arc bulging forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semi-arcuate shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state in which the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and the dish central lower decorative body The left and right ends of the plate 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is formed transparent.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center decorative board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decorative body 312a, and is forward (outside) in the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ) Are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish center decoration body 312a can be decorated with light. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the plate center decorative body 312a (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the surface of the plate center decorative body 312a. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the upper plate 312a (or may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The inner lens 313 on the center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 to be arranged is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface may be replaced with the back surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

  The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The plate-under-center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the plate-under-center decorative body 312b, and is forward (outside) in the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ) Are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the dish-under-center decoration 312b (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the surface of the dish-under-center decoration 312b. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the dish 312b under the center of the dish (may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The inner lens 315 below the center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower plate center decoration board 316 to be arranged are difficult to clearly recognize from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish center lower inner lens 315 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the dish center lower inner lens 315, the back surface may be provided. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

  Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semicircular arc shape, When the LEDs of the upper central decoration board 314 and the LEDs of the lower central decoration board 316 are made to emit light, the whole of each can be made to emit light substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower center decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation portion base 320 is formed in a container shape having an open top, and is formed to have a light-transmitting property (for example, a milky white color).

  The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 whose outer shape is formed into a box shape having a substantially cubic shape and which is open at the upper side, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer shape. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (in this case, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting that is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 for penetrating the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opening upward and for rotatably supporting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The main body 321 of the operation section base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is the flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring attachment base 331 and extend around the axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotation base 332 that is attached to the ring attachment base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are each formed to be transparent.

  Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and below the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating section 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating section 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to project downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer upper cover attaching portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral edge of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of the circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which circular arcs forming an outer portion and a lower portion of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a protruding upward from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a toward the center. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotational drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and for detecting a rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

  The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346 and.

  The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate the rotary operation part 302 to vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to cause the drive gear 343 to repeat forward / reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

  Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the contents of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, so that the operation ring is driven in the same rotation direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect, or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotary drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where the operation side transmission gear 350 is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is provided. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. The effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

  The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring attachment base 331 are formed transparent, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring attachment base 331 are formed. Through, or through the decorative board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, the transparent outer ring upper cover 335, the transparent outer ring lower cover 336, and the transparent inner ring that constitute the transparent rotary operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation section 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibration of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation section 303a. ,,.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide shafts 362 that are connected at their upper ends to each other and have an outer periphery formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, the lower end of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the central shaft 66 is inserted rotatably and is mounted rotatably so as to cover the raising / lowering cam member 371 for raising and lowering the raising / lowering base 364, the raising / lowering drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is attached above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A transparent central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 to urge the central button body 373 upward, and a central button body 373. The transparent central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper base 363 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363. A central button decoration substrate 376 mounted on the upper surface and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button operation unit 303a is configured by the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. A transparent outer board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the center button body 373, and covers the outer circumference of the center button body 373 in the outer board cover 378. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 that is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the part and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and covers the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative inner lens 379. The center button cover 375 is attached to the lifting base 364 and has a transparent Has such an outer peripheral button cover 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, respectively, from the center to the front and the rear at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends abut on the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends abut on the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating through the center at a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so that it can be vertically moved up and down by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lift base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move is formed between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downwardly from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shape and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

  The central button main body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the center button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed transparent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

  The central button decoration board 376 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on an upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface mounting types and can emit multicolor light. ing. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on an upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface-mount type and can emit multicolor light. ing. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can illuminate the outer peripheral inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and has an annular substrate portion 378a that is attached to the elevating base 364, and extends from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378a upwards in a cylindrical shape to form a central button body 373. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

  In the outer peripheral inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. . In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the tubular portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

  Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (state of FIG. 62 (a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshing with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lifting cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The one cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

  In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in a lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the elevated position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating base 364 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the button lifting drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the up-down detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 65 (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 9 is a front view of the dish unit when the operation portion is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation section 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating section 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation section arranged between the central pressing operation section 303 a and the rotating operation section 302. And 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the front side of an imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is inclined so as to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward / reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is larger than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged in a row below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

  In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and press detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotational operation portion 302. The height is almost the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the moving end downward regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  It should be noted that the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players can easily perform the rotating operation by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 interferes with the rotation operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. The front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402 and the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) of the cage. The transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401, and the transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. And a body 404.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side inner lens 403 is formed to be transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the door frame left behind the left side inner lens 403 is left. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 402 are difficult to clearly recognize from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the left side inner lens 403 as well as the back surface thereof (may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. Note that the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the back surface thereof may be The lens may be cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron). Good).

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left side of the.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it seems that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window interior decorations 410b capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see in the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing on the right pachinko machine. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a personal space of the player can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface, extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a side window interior decoration member 412, and a plurality of transparent inner inner lenses 414 inserted into the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, respectively.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is disposed forward of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically. A penetrating opening 416a that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the cage door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a is formed. The door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the upper and lower sides to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. Through hole 417 that extends in a plate shape in the front and rear directions and penetrates in the left and right direction to form side window 410a Includes but a door frame right side panel 417 are formed, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). It includes a door frame right side decorative board 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (here, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the up-down direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed transparent. The surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412. The surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b as well as the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the inside of the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 may be formed. A lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the decorative portion 410b (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The decoration part decoration substrate 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)” in some cases) of the decorative portion decoration substrate 413 in the side window is a surface mounting type and is a full-color capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

  The inner inner lens 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The inner inner lens 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left and right. The inner inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the decoration portion inside the side window arranged behind the inner inner lens 414 is arranged. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 413. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner inner lens 414 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner inner lens 414. (May be formed into a polyhedron).

  The right side inner lens 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward from the upper end to the lower end, and then moves rearward. Is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the right side of the door frame disposed behind the right side inner lens 415 can be used. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 418 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the right side inner lens 415 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the right side inner lens 415, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side inner lens 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative board 418 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. Note that the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a back surface. The lens may be cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be cut in a lens (formed in a polyhedron). Good).

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front edge (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that causes the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light is turned off, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible for a player to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult to see, and by making it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player, it is possible to allow another player to play a game without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on the game and to feel uncomfortable due to the induction of mistakes, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 has a light-transmitting (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame. A light-transmitting (for example, milky white) top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the front upper part of the top base 451, and attached to the front end of the top cover 452. Transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and a door frame top bottom plate having translucency (for example, having a milky white color) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. 454. In the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have a light-transmitting property (for example, having a milky white color). A top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides and the front upper part of the base 451. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured to be transparent instead of a light-transmitting one (for example, having a milky white color).

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached behind the frame top decoration body 453, to the right of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have it.

  The door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the door frame top decorative body 453 is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative body). A transparent top central inner lens 458 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455), and disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (ie, A transparent top left inner lens 459 which is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and is disposed in front of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456) and is mounted on the front surface of the top upper cover 452; It is disposed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, it is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top). Includes a right decorative disposed in front of the substrate 457) clear top right inner lens 460 is attached to the front surface of the top on the cover 452, the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 and the light transmitting member attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below (for example, milky white) Lower cover frame 466 and the upper right end of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board 467 mounted near the door frame and a translucent (eg, milky white) door frame top mounted on the top cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451. And a plate 468.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending leftward and rightward with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

  The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction protrudes most to the front, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed transparent. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decoration body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively. Note that the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the rear surface may be lens cut. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame top decoration 453 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower ends of the main bodies 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are apart from each other in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) are surface mounting types and can emit multicolor light. It is an LED. The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)” are surface-mount type and capable of emitting multiple colors. It is an LED. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) are of a surface mounting type and can emit multiple colors. It is an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are formed transparent. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each subjected to lens cutting (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top central decorative board 455 disposed behind the top center inner lens 458, and a door frame top left decorative board disposed behind the top left inner lens 459. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the 456 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 disposed behind the top right inner lens 460 are provided. It is difficult for the player to clearly recognize it. In addition, the front center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 as well as the front surface and the back surface may be provided with lens cuts (or may be formed in a polyhedron), respectively. Instead of the front surface of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surface may be respectively cut by a lens (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

  The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay substrate 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and its front end is locked to the top top cover 452 and its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Lighting with topside speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. In the top side speaker 464, a vibrating portion such as a diaphragm and a center cap is made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), and a magnet and a magnetic circuit portion such as a yoke are front and rear. The vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are held by the housing part. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, whereas the rear is open.

  A top side speaker 464 is attached to an attachment portion (not shown) on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and a rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 has a predetermined distance from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 toward the rear (in this embodiment, about a predetermined distance). The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the attachment portions formed on the four substrate attachment bending plates (not shown) extended by 18 mm). Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so as to cover the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, to the attachment portion formed on the above-mentioned four board attachment bending plates (not shown). This transparent plate protects the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 so that other members do not come into contact with the electric decorative substrate 469 to cause electrical trouble. As described above, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, so that the speaker illumination unit is assembled. In other words, the speaker decoration unit includes the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the sound decoration board 469, and the transparent plate.

  In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  On the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). .), A white resist layer is formed. A plurality of LEDs (in the present embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are configured to flow a constant current controlled by an unillustrated LED constant current drive circuit mounted on the door frame top relay board 467. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives light emission data and a clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510. By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are controlled. Various light emission modes are realized.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, opening of the door frame 3, main body Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of the wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original positions (standby positions) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) have occurred. When there is no light emission data, the light emission data in the light emission mode of the effect mode is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, door frame 3 opening, body frame 4 opening, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or trouble (fault related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc. If)) occurs, the light emission data serving as the notification mode as a mode different from the above-described normal mode is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

  Note that the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time) is a variety of light emission modes combining lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to a variable pattern displayed using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal, and a variable pattern set when the symbol is variable displayed. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state in the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (different mode from the normal mode), a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the maximum brightness is turned on. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame opening command notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receiving the door frame opening command is transmitted. Reference numeral 1310 denotes a door frame opening command for notifying that the door frame 3 is to be opened with respect to the main body frame 4 to which predetermined information (information for adjusting a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) is added. The peripheral control board 1510 that has transmitted the control command to the control board 1510 and received such a command controls the notification to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

  Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469, the component number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are arranged near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as a region indicating the position (including the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469, a component number of the back side electronic component, an area indicating a position where the back side electronic component is arranged, or the like is provided near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back-side electronic component (and may include the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component.) The back side notation shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are As described above, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and the light emission mode changes variously when it is turned on (light emission) or turned off. For this reason, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist.”), A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front side notation that can be specified is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the yellow front side notation is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to the above, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), a solid white register having a high reflectance is used. And the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be kept high. .

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit of the top side speaker 464. Since the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light because they are arranged so as to cover the rear, the light passes through the through-hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and becomes transparent. Light is emitted from the light-transmitting center cap, and light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion. It can be decorated. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having a myriad of through holes. In addition to being visible, the electrical decoration of the topside speaker 464 can be viewed.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

  As described above, the speaker brackets 463 are attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469 so that the acoustic decorative board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, acoustic decoration). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through) through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface)), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. After passing through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the formed through hole 451ba, it projects to the rear of the door frame top base 451. To.

  The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 as described above. The door frame base 101 has, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, a shape larger than or the same as the outer periphery of the through hole 451ba, and a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs radiate rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, to the rear). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (acoustic decoration that is the rear side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 469 (through a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base Formed in the door frame base 101, and a gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in 451 Through hole 101k, emitted rearward of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100.

  In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 and has an outer left upper area of the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The light is reflected on the upper right region. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin, but may be made of a black resin. In addition, hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening / closing axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as "the pivotal support side of the door frame 3" or "the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4". In some cases, the side opposite to the opening / closing axis side is referred to as “open side of door frame 3” or “open side of main body frame 4”.

[The upper left area of the front component]
On the front surface (front surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation (in this embodiment, black except for each transparent area for checking a lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs). Is provided, a reflection sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is stuck except for a region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

  The front (front) area of the upper left area of the front component 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is affixed is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, except for a region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 is configured to be covered with the reflection sheet 1000a through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. In other words, the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game effect, can be hidden, and does not hinder the game.

  Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the left acoustic decoration substrate 469, and pachinko machine. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front side, on the pivotal support side of the door frame 3 (the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4), the front surface of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface) was provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). The light is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted forward, and the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Hole 451ba Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm of the left topside speaker 464 through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left topside speaker 464 and through the gap formed by the periphery. Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), In order to emit light forward, light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is in the game area 5a. No light is emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (when the door frame 3 is closed), the reflection sheet 1000a is the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the above, and the light emitted by the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light (leakage light) leaking backward from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 is reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a, so that the light can be emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469. It can function as a possible reflection member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light leakage of the left acoustic decoration board 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, light traveling toward the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, a QR code (registered trademark) on the reflection sheet 1000a is stored a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the date of manufacture of the game board 5. And are printed at predetermined positions with dark black paint. The pachinko machine 1 is identified by the reflection sheet 1000a, a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as the date of manufacture of the game board 5 is stored. A specific information display unit is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number specifying a model of the game board 5 and a manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored). ing. When the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4, the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin (when the front component 1000 is made of a black resin, the background is black). Since the white reflection sheet 1000a is conspicuous, the line of sight of a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall can be naturally directed to the reflection sheet 1000a by the attractiveness.

  The front (front) area of the upper left area of the front component 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is, as described above, an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is a door frame. 3 is closed by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for a region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, in a state in which the reflection sheet 1000a is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Since it is difficult to visually recognize through the door window 101a of the frame 3, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000a are difficult to visually recognize through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the reflection sheet 1000a, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, if the background is white, dark black is conspicuous and the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are easily visible. In addition, the QR code (registered trademark) is a device separate from the pachinko machine 1, and when the code is read by a code reading device carried by an attendant such as a clerk in a game hall, the reflective sheet 1000a has a white background. Is white, and a QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. In other words, the white color of the reflection sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469. Instead of the QR code (registered trademark), it may be a one-dimensional barcode, a character, a number, a figure, a symbol, or the like, or a combination of letters, numbers, figures, symbols, or the like as appropriate.

  Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. In the reflection sheet 1000a, a through-hole is formed in a portion corresponding to a region where the pseudo nail having gold is arranged. As described above, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted on the front surface (front surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the pseudo nail is also made of a metal having a golden color, it can be used as a reflecting member in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, like the reflecting sheet 1000a.

[Top right area of the front component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front surface (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounted state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 Each of the manufacturing stoppers FT (see FIG. 10) is provided. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal stoppers FT are arranged on the front (front) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the right acoustic decoration substrate 469. The metal stopper FT is designed so that its end is inserted into and engaged with a disc stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4.

  Further, the door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal and, as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101, The door frame base unit 100 is provided with rigidity, and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically separated left reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frames 112, and which are vertically separated from each other. An upper reinforcing frame 113 extending left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having a left end attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to a position near the right reinforcing frame 112, and an intermediate reinforcing frame. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right end of the right reinforcement frame 114 and the right reinforcement frame 112 is vertically separated from a rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112. To it includes a 鉤掛 member 116 where the door frame for hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is mounted a plurality is hooked, the. That is, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stoppers FT are respectively provided on the front (front) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface) is separated by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened from the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized. In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT disposed on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through-hole 101k formed in the 101 does not exit toward the game area 5a, and is behind the game board 5. Also does not exit. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of a black resin instead. Even in this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right acoustic decoration passes through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 469 is transmitted to a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and a metal right reinforcement. Since light can be reflected by the frame 112, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through-hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is generated. It does not exit toward the game area 5a, nor does it exit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  In addition, a white reflective sheet in which the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above is appropriately modified is attached to the peripheral area where the metal stopper FT is arranged in the upper right area of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5. You may comprise. By doing this, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface), a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since the light can be reflected by the white reflection sheet, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be used. The light is not emitted toward the game area 5a and is not emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  By the way, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is provided on, for example, the door frame 3 after inserting the regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotating the same when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. By grasping a decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 by hand, the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, as the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 increases, the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, and the door frame may be damaged. There is.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In order to emit light rearward through the right through-hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 include a door frame. 3 can emit light toward the rear. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 is provided. A metal stopper FT is arranged on the (front) side, and since both are metal members, when a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3, Light reflected by the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and the metal reflecting portion such as the metal stopper FT leaks through a gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, and the gap is formed. May emit light. In this way, a clerk such as a store clerk of the game hall can open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 by, for example, the transparent door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame right side unit 410 provided on the door frame 3. When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the gap emits light, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped. 3 can be opened. Since it is possible to shorten the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand, it is possible to shorten the time for which the load is applied to the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When the door frame is open]
By the way, when the player plays a game, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally hits the obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball fired toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player hits the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further stacked on the packed game balls, and the state is such that the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall to have the grape-shaped game balls removed. A clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, called by a player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects that the door frame 3 has been opened, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decorative board to the game board 5. In addition to performing control to turn off a plurality of LEDs to be mounted, all the movable members provided on the game board 5 are controlled so as to be maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not they are operating. Of the game board at the time. " Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not the movable body is operated, while performing control for lighting the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed.

  When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and performing control of the door frame at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board included in the game board 5 are completely turned off, and / or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 is turned on in a notification mode of notifying that the door is open. State. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, as described above, the LEDs 469a pass through the through-holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the light-transmitting property is obtained. The light is emitted from the center cap and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Further, the light is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and repeated between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. On the other hand, in order to emit light from the rear side of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 to the rear side (in other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light). Then, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (transparent). ) Due to the plurality of LEDs 469a leaking from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the acoustic decoration The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through a gap formed by the outer circumference of the plate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. To the rear of.

  In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3; When the door 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decorative board 469 is moved from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) can be visually recognized. In other words, the fact that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emits light in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469. Thereby, in the game hall, the staff (such as a clerk of the game hall) passing through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 give the front (front) surface of the acoustic decorative board 469. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the device can be transmitted. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3. In addition, in the game hall, an abnormality or malfunction occurs in a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from both the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). An abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the body frame 4, wiring Disconnection, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.)) The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

  By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is broken by an unauthorized tool, the sound will not flow, but it is easy to see that the speaker's diaphragm is broken by an unauthorized tool, while making a hole in the speaker's diaphragm by an unauthorized tool. The sound changes even if it is opened, but the sound changes. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool to remove the wire connected to the speaker's connection terminal or disconnect it, you can prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker. Even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound cannot be heard from the speaker in the first place. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on a door frame or a gaming board is switched to a player waiting light emitting mode). The image for waiting for the player is displayed on the effect display device that can display the effect image while emitting light.). Then, in such a waiting state of the game hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall can open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an incorrect tool, disconnect the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. For example, it is difficult to determine whether sound is output from the speaker.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, and thus the front surface (surface of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted in (1) emit light, light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion is Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of. Since the diaphragm and the center cap of the top side speaker 464 are made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), they pass through the holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. The light emitted from the vibrating plate and the center cap shines as a spotlight with higher brightness than the light emitted from the center cap. As a result, as described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed by the punching metal formed of the metal plate having the innumerable through holes, the top lower cover 465 penetrates the bottom lower cover 465 when performing a silent demonstration. Through the holes, the existence of the holes formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 can be found as the existence that shines with high brightness like a spotlight. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

  Further, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire to perform a silent demonstration, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are turned off (accidentally turned off). Or a state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which a white coating solution coated with a white resist solution is formed is disposed behind the top side speaker 464, and the white coating causes the background to become white, so that the top side speaker 464 holes in the diaphragm, and countless holes in the top bottom cover 465 That through the through-holes, a white coating of white can be visually recognized, incorrectly drilled hole in the diaphragm of the top side speakers 464 becomes easily visible. This makes it possible to discover whether or not a hole is improperly formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

  In addition, a silent demonstration that a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and a player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image. As a result, the plurality of LEDs emit light in the player waiting light emitting mode. Therefore, even if the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is pierced by a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through a hole formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464, so that a part of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 appears to emit light. Thereby, it can be found that a hole is formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

  Note that a speaker net having a light-transmitting property may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, the wire of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be prevented from being illegally intruded with a wire, and it takes a long time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. This can contribute to early detection of such misconduct. Further, since the speaker net has a light-transmitting property, it is difficult for the light emitted through the light-transmitting diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 to be obstructed.

  The top side speaker 464 has a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property, such as milky white polypropylene, but has a gray color as a light-transmitting resin. It may be polypropylene having a color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like, or may be made of a transparent resin instead of a light-transmitting resin.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device performs effects, errors, and the like that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that detachably holds the game board in a middle frame and includes a front frame configured to cover the front surface side of the game board (for example, JP-A-2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019], and FIG. 1)). By the way, in order to open the front frame, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the cylinder lock and performs a turning operation, and then grasps the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand and pulls the front frame. As the number of opening operations increases, the front frame may be damaged due to repeated load on the joint between the decorative member and the front frame.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device emits light in a special mode different from a normal state when an abnormality or a problem occurs in the gaming machine, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or the problem. However, when the light traveling toward the rear of the game board increases, the light traveling toward the front of the gaming machine decreases, so it has been difficult to say that it is sufficient to inform the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

  Further, conventionally, a gaming machine in which specific information on the gaming machine is provided on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it is possible to externally confirm whether or not the game machine is a regular game board, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change of the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the conventional case, the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the decorative property is deteriorated, which may cause a deterioration in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, conventionally, a gaming machine having a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). An effect sound generated during the game flows from a speaker included in the gaming machine, and an error notification sound and the like also flow. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is broken by an unauthorized tool, the sound stops flowing. However, it can be easily visually recognized that the diaphragm of the speaker is broken. Just making a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an incorrect tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. To prevent sound from flowing out of the speaker by making a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an incorrect tool and disconnecting or disconnecting the wiring connected to the speaker's connection terminal, a magnet got or a hit goto Is performed, the warning sound is not output from the speaker even if the gaming machine can detect an act of illegally acquiring the game ball. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (a light emitting device emits light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and the image display device displays The player waiting image is displayed.). However, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall waits for such a player to open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an incorrect tool, disconnect the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. It has been difficult to determine whether or not sound is flowing from the speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

  A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

  In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and a donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 are coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation section 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotating operation section 302 is provided below the rotating operation section 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter center upper decorations 312a and lower plate-center decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

  Further, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286 and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a unit lower cover 311 having a hemispherical shape is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation part 302 that is arranged on the upper side and is operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easy to understand, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are protruded farther forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer circumference of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation manipulation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate selection of the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for playing games.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, A lower main body frame hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side in front view of the base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that a game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. Of the ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, the inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. And a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that can be opened and closed, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and having a box shape extending left and right and opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553. It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward is provided, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, which guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and for detachably holding the game board 5. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b that penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed and the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and which regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f that penetrates the front and rear on the right side in front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c that penetrates the front and rear substrate units. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the normal of the cable mounting recess 501h. And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

  On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b extending out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and penetrating forward and backward at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and left and right. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than a length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) such that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 according to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). And a decorative drive board 1720) for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, which are provided in the rear unit 3000, and an end on the opposite side is a door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. And is connected to the door frame sub relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  Then, a connection cable that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and a production drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side described later to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 is guided so that the side of the interface board 635 or the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, which is connected to a later-described production drive board 1720, extends from the right side to the left side of the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. With the binding band 504 inserted into a pair of through holes 502d in the same horizontal direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed in the upper and lower end sides of the guide main body 502a while being brought into contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. By being tightened together with the guide body 502a, it is attached to the guide body 502a.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  When the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4 in this state, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (desirably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

  Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle that intersects with a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Moreover, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The above-mentioned door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval above. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side opened in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is formed. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the launching solenoid 542 including a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the launching base 541 and extending forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll is provided.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

  Note that, due to the driving strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach the inside of the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction extending from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front-rear direction to the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downwardly, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From the upper part of the back plate 551d that extends downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate part 551c, and extends from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate part 551b to the right side to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and from the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. Extend to the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape.

  As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  The dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is delivered to that portion. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is opened upward. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-back direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-back direction. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially matches the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at an upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B flowing in two stages in the upper and lower sides, and rectifies it so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of the portion of the dispensing base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper full tank ball route unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball route unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the upper hollow ball passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

  The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear side, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the movement of the movable piece member 573 are detected to detect the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

  The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

  The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

  The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. Between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583, which has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a. A rotatably attached payout gear member 588 and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a are provided. The payout blade 589 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the payout device body 581 for detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 are provided.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. It can be held at a position where the ball-draining passage 580b is attached to the ball-draining passage 580b so as to be openable and closable by the lid 582 at a position where the ball-draining passage 580a is closed and the ball-draining movable piece 592 closes the ball-draining passage 580b. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It bends at about 1/3 of the width on the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball-out passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward in a rear view at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form a side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the rear view right side of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends toward the rotation axis from above in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted by the blade piece 589a from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. As a result, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball-removing passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b through the gap between them.

  The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball-removing piece 592 is made rotatable by raising the ball-removing lever 593, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, is the ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

  Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the forcefully, but the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can move to the outside of the inner surface, the contacting force moves the ball-removing movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball removal movement due to the collision of the game ball B is possible. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b faster, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the distance is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 below the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

  Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is open upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in a front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction, and opening downward on the lower surface, and adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opens downward on the lower surface, and is located near the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball path unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

  In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in order from the front view left side on the upper surface of the portion extending upward of the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, front opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively installed in the upper fullfilling passage 610c. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

  Further, in the state where the lower tank full ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing abutting part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise in a front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay in the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball receiving route unit 600a is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

  When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, and thus the payout device is provided. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out further, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-filled ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is reached. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B cannot be discharged to the front from the lower bowl ball supply port 211c, the lower bowls are further dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

  When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 and is located outside the pachinko machine 1 at the rear (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the bottom rear side. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side in the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left-right direction, and is directed obliquely downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the rear-side portion of the main body frame speaker 622 projects the most to the rear. Are formed so as to have a small protrusion. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view of the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection tube portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 by being resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives a game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that is open upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628.

  The upstream end of the ball drop guiding portion 627 is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pull-out guiding portion 627 opposes so that the opening at the upstream end is aligned with the downstream end opening of the lower ball pull-out passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 in front view, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass sound richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a rear side of the power supply board 630. A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover a surface on the rear side of the board 630 may be referred to as a “surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630” on which electronic components are mounted. And a cover 631. When the front surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply substrate 630 may be described as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid green resist”). .), A green resist layer is formed, and a power switch 630 a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, attributes of the front surface side electronic component such as a part number of the front surface side electronic component and a region indicating a position where the front surface side electronic component is arranged (further, the surface side). The front side notation part indicating the shape of the side electronic part, the size of the front side electronic part, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic part, and the model of the front side electronic part may be included. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Further, the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and is therefore located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the power switch.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control housed in the payout control board box 632. And a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side thereof is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  In the locking unit 650 assembled to the body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and keeps the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the cylinder lock 130 of the front end of the door frame 3 rotates. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, when a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of locking units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hook member 25 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind on the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from the outer frame 2 and hinged by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of an upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tag spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. , Are provided.

  The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side thereof is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. A front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion side of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

  The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward after extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis line that extends leftward from the right end in the plan view. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged so that a plurality of the game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of gaming balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b on the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to be dispersed, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball clogging) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows inside. By dispersing the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game is high. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, as described above. It is possible to exert the effect of.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m that extends and rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. The ball tank 552 is inclined so that the side (left side) farther away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower, and the surface overflows from the ball tank 552. A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the both outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. The outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. And a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. Overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper part is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o on both outer sides in the left-right direction of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a lower rear end. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction such that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 has a narrow width. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide area.

  In addition, the portion that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this part, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side can be secured on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the overall length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely to the left and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )are doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after it extends to a nearby position).

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by the operation of the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m, and at the same time, to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem in which the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is set higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and biting because the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B are scattered, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B occurs. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that the game rails B line up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the plurality of game balls B are arranged to be aligned with each other in the width direction, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in the width direction toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b because the game balls B match. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Also, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a problem such as short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the or the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs due to the game ball B spilling outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game surface balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 seen from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 seen from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in which the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the table unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

  In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration board, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration board. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in the direction parallel to the surface of the decoration board (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a player a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of the game balls B) by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. In 2006 or the like, the game is to entertain or pass through so that the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rear end of the game area 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstruction nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) having a gold color and abutting on the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is hit by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and also holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface, is provided.

  In the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has the transparent panel board 1110, the game panel 1100 is arranged behind the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5). The user can easily visually recognize the presence of various members (hereinafter, may be referred to as “transparent game panel 1100”).

  The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the above-described door frame sub-relay board 105 (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , A door window right side unit 410 inside the side window decoration portion decoration board 413 and the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board 467, etc.), as well as the main control board 1310 and peripheral control. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510, and a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like included in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. A performance drive board 1720, a panel relay board 1710, and a performance drive board 1720 are housed. It includes a driving substrate box 1730, the. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the left side thereof can be hinge-rotatably attached, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, To the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, which allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, the first winning hole 2005 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port in which the game ball B can be accepted 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an outlet 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a, and a game ball B provided in the up-down direction in the game area 5a. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from the game area 5a.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, the front surface in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided slightly above the center and a second special winning opening 2006 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 above the first attacker unit 2400. A second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and an upper side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and a flat back left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower portion of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left production unit 3200 and the lower right production unit 3250, and the lower back middle production unit 3300 provided behind the lower left production unit 3200 and the lower right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind rear front right decoration 3040 in rear case 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in rear box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit 3600 provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a front perspective view of a front component member and a game panel of the game board, and FIG. 116 (b) is a rear perspective view of the front component member and the game panel.

  The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passes an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and extends to an obliquely upper right portion. An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to decrease toward the rear (out port 2010).

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and the outer rail of the right rail 1005. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

  Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail and the front view timepiece. A backflow preventing member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 2010 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The out port 2010 is penetrated with a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner of the front view. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is formed almost entirely transparent, and the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. , It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a predetermined gauge arrangement and having a gold color are implanted (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, and a plurality of positioning holes formed in the front and rear circular holes and short elongated holes. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion, and a plurality of projecting pins that protrude forward from the holding step portion and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward by engaging the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above and tilts the upper part and the lower left part. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engagement claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the game area 5a appear large (wide) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the rear unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below. You can

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the gate sensor 2801, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening. The sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, displays a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B in the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result which is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (the number of rounds). It has a round indicator consisting of five LEDs for displaying.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered by a protective cover body 1601 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings are formed along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state of being aligned vertically and horizontally.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has a width substantially the same as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b projecting upward from the upper end face, and one lower fixing piece 1601c projecting downward from the lower end face. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects further forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2005 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B position It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is provided and is selected by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The two big prize holes 2006 are provided.

  Of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the other one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the bottom end at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a and at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the right general winning opening 2001.

  The first sub-out opening 2011 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is arranged on the right side of the right general winning opening 2001.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, the front surface in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. And a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and which has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out mouth 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 that is installed.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, (c) ) Is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out opening 2010 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending in parallel with the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. And a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward from the middle in the front-rear direction in the left-right direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape such that the front view shape is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from a peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101 and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

  By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is reached. Located just below the center of the. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is mounted on the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 toward the rear of the gaming panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to stand out from the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002. A lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player, such as a "big hit" game, is advantageous, is performed by allowing the game ball B to be received in the first starting opening 2002 Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B to the rear is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle near horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B toward the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority) for the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 can be recognized as a general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

  Further, in the state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the under-rear production unit 3300 of the under-rear unit 3000 is located on the rear side, and is provided in the under-reliment production unit 3300. Light is emitted and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the starting opening unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that extends over the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning opening 2001. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 comes into contact with the rib and is guided rearward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It is possible to make it later than the timing of abutting the inclined portion and guiding it to the rear side, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side open upward.

  The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and a second base unit extending in a gutter-like shape from the base plate in the front-rear direction and inclined so that the front end thereof moves backward as it goes downward and is separated from the left and right sides. One guide girder, a first front wall part that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutters, and a gutter-like extension from the base plate to the front and back on the left side of the two first guide gutters. And a second front wall that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

  The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically with the upper part extending vertically from the bottom at a position of about 3/4 height, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower part moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally up to. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide trough 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position at a height of about 3/4 from below.

  The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide trough 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the first projection trough 2202 and the second guidance trough 2204, a portion projecting forward of the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Further, in the side unit 2200, in a state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 that project rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, it projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided to the rear.

  The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back delivery unit 3050 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B transferred to any of the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the fourth transfer opening 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then the game ball B is located below. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less visible than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , Doesn't look bad.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear side, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower left portion of the back unit 3000 due to the portion. Light radiated forward from the lower left left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can improve the appearance.

  In this side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. The bottom surfaces of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily long drawn to the general winning opening 2001 while surely letting the player recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, other first winning opening 2002, other first winning openings 2005, second winning openings 2006, and other winning openings. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority) for the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 can be recognized as a general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is seen from the side of the first guide trough 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. There is a risk that the player will feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side because the gaming ball B is not paid out, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide trough 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B for a short time, it can be recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the player has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a portion of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, so that a game ball is formed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When most of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view when B passes, some players place the game balls B in the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. An illusion of being accepted can be provided, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall from feeling distrustful, even if no benefits (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) are given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained and continue to enjoy the game, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. And has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, some players can make an illusion that it is received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is a starting opening, the special lottery result is not drawn, and the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by “right hitting”) away from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction to the left, and Since a decorative sticker for indicating the starting opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the opening is not the starting opening, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering.

  Further, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 as compared with the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, but the variable winning openings such as the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening are closed so that they can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the gaming ball B is guided to the winning opening side and is rotated around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to move forward. It has an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B to be paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable winning a prize is larger than the number of the general winning a prizes 2001, most of the game balls B to the variable winning a prize will be given. Will come to wish for a prize. Alternatively, even if the player has a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the specified winning number is set, he or she desires to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is made gentler than the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall 2203), so that the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning port, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning port 2001. With respect to the general winning a prize 2001, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning a prize, and at the same time, can feel the joy (superior feeling) that the gaming ball B has been accepted into the variable award winning prize. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed. Therefore, more than the specified number of game balls B are awarded to the player. Can make you feel like doing.

  In addition, in the two right general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, a portion that extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall 2203 that is vertically downward from the upper end of the portion. Is formed longer. As a result, since the prize hole is the general prize hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general prize hole 2001 is not performed. Can be hidden from the player's view early.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 shows the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is tilted out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are shown. You may make it the front surface of the winning opening 2001 incline. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is allowed to enter the game ball B which is launched to the launch position (so-called "left hit") in the normal gaming state. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front face is not tilted is set in the advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable variation" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right hit”) may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or both may be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) is opened and then opened. The angle is narrow. When the number of payouts of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is set to be larger than the general winning opening 2001, the player wins more than the specified number even if the specified winning number is set. I wish. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big prize hole rolls to the back side is slower than the speed when the game ball B that has won the general prize hole 2001 with the front face tilted to the back side. There is. In other words, when the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when the winning opening is won, is considered to be faster than the speed when the gaming ball B winning the winning opening rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more the payout holes are paid out, the later it takes to disappear from the player's view. As a result, the more the payout openings are, the longer the joy of winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

  The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down on the left side of the center role object 2500 to the right side below the center role object 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the rear. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view, and from the front side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first special winning port 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and is more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out opening 2011 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and at a position lower than the first special winning opening 2005.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 2401 and the first ball detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. It has a special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. The first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided in pairs of two, respectively.

  The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. A rear cover 2413, a second starting opening door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening door 2414 movable to open and close the second starting opening 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for operating the starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first big winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big winning opening 2005, To open and close the first prize hole 2005 by moving the first prize hole door 2417 It includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for illuminating and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a first special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2404, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and a first special winning opening decoration board 2420 and a panel relay board. A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near an upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c that extends longitudinally left and right in an upper part on the left side of the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that extend side by side under the second opening 2411c so as to line up left and right. The first sub-out port 2011 is formed below the one guide hole 2411b and penetrates back and forth.

  The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the width on the left and right is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends left and right with a length that is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower.

  Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e projecting forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e are the contact portions of the front cover 2412, with the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state where the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and is transparent. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left in a front view, and a game ball to the left from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a and between the first shelf portion 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b from the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left side. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the section 2412b and a third shelf 2412c are provided with a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left. Lower to lower left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2412a and the like. ing.

  The front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. From the right end of the fourth vertical wall 2412h extending vertically to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth vertical wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. From the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the sixth standing wall portion 2412j.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right. At the top, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2412e, the second vertical wall portion 2412f, and the third vertical wall portion 2412g, and a first vertical wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining so that the game ball B can be distributed between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and the game ball B at a lower distance to the left side. And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher toward the outside. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the position of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

  In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portion of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j toward the direction of approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partitioning portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is opened. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412p has its right end located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and its left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

  Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and at a portion which is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. These abutting portions are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, and the abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward, and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting opening door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first special winning opening door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich them.

  The second starting port door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b and the arm portion 2414b extending downward from the flat door portion 2414a, the door portion 2414a, and the unit base 2411. A rotary shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided in a portion below the rotary shaft 2414c in the lower part of the arm portion 2414b and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415. .

  The door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

  The second starting opening door 2414 can close the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotation shaft 2414c as the starting opening solenoid 2415 moves back and forth in the front-rear direction, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The starting opening solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the starting opening solenoid 2415, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The first special winning opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b that extend downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotary shaft 2417c that extends from the lower end in the left-right direction coaxially with each other, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d that projects rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first special winning opening door 2417 can close the first special winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first special winning opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c as the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 moves back and forth, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front and rear direction. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a non-energized state, and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The transmission member 2419 passes through the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the left and right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

  A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first winning opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can cause the first special winning opening 2005 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs emit light.

  In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and the state in which the game ball B cannot be received in the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a is set. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and the door portion 2417a cannot receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005. It is in a state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is provided. After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417, depending on its momentum, and left due to their inclination. Roll towards. In addition, when the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left comes in contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p and bounces back to the right, a gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first special winning opening 2005, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately and roll to the left while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is discharged to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from its left end after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

  In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is then returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (door side 2414a side) of the rotating shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Becomes That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first lateral wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B emitted rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is placed on the substrate holder 1200 below from the back guide unit 3050. Is discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed rearward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will be moved. The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, whereby the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 The game ball B is ready to be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the first winning hole 2005 while the first winning hole 2005 is in the open state, the gaming ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then the fifth standing wall portion. After being detected by one of the two first special winning opening sensors 2402 through the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth standing wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o, It falls on the three lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third lateral wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, so that the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. Since the first prize hole 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a around the rotary shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first prize hole 2005 (first The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402 to be the unit base 2411. Since it is designed to be released to the rear, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stagnant between the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and also a lot of game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly in the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be entered.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with a rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

  The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

  More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 projects to the leftmost side above a warp inlet 2511 described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is the middle of the vertically extending portion. Has a shape that bulges to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges leftward, and at the portion that bulges leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is linearly formed so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). When the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled to the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support portion 2503 is the back front left decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. 3030 substantially along a part of the right side. Therefore, since the front end side of the support part 2503 matches the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support part 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

  Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp inlet 2511 has a rectangular wall extending rightward while the peripheral wall part 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, and thus the shape of the shutter 3732 may be a part. , And the support part 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

  The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a portion of the front wall of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is openable in the frame behind the front face of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

  The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position of the center in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightwise central portion of the stage 2513 (the central discharge portion 2513a) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game ball B can flow. The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven to the right above the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The vertical length of the guide passage group 2520 is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. The guide passage group 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending in a vertical direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Further, the first guide passage 2521 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stopper 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an inlet opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an outlet opening diagonally downward left with a width of one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530, which is assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle side right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

  According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the rear unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

  In addition, since the transparent support part 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located at positions as close to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 as possible. Since the transparent center accessory 2500 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the rear front left decoration 3030 and the rear left production unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred. Therefore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

  Further, since the support part 2503 and the like are transparent and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 which can be light-emitted, light emission from the support part 2503 can be used to make light-emission decoration, and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross hatching portion in FIG. 135). , The light radiated forward from the LED on the back-front left decoration substrate 3714 in the back-front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, or the like is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to give a gorgeous luminous decoration. It can be shown to the player. Note that steps or cutouts may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the rear can be diffused due to the steps or the like, so that it can appear more glittering.

  Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided because the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near part, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

  Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear when viewed from the front.

  The edge of the support part 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 of the back front left effect unit 3700 (the shape of the ornament) provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from being conspicuously deteriorating the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support part 2503 being different from the rear decoration, and at the same time, the support part 2503 also has a decorative property. Can be increased.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration thereof is performed by the lens effect. Although the thing which suppresses that it looks blurry is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 which is distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided behind may be made to appear blurred.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shown inserted into the opening 1112. However, the rear wall portion 2501 may not have a rear portion to be inserted into the opening portion 1112, and in this case, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may be attached to the game panel 1100 having no opening portion 1112. . When the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role object 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side center unit, and the gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is the second attacker unit, the side right center unit, and the front unit in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in a cross section.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second special winning opening 2006 that opens and closes leftward (see FIG. 129).

  The second attacker unit 2600 is a second special winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602 and. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 by opening and closing the second special winning opening 2006 so that the second special winning opening 2006 can be opened and closed. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance / retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second special winning opening door 2611, and the second big winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 for guiding the accepted game ball B and discharging it backward.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened leftward from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second big winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second big winning opening door 2611 bulges downward from the semicircular bottom side, the right side that contacts the right end of the lower side and extends linearly upward, and bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotation shaft in a cylindrical shape. And a pin (not shown). The second big winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably attached so that the upper end moves leftward.

  Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction with the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and allows the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 to slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is located on the game board 5 so that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the second winning hole 2006 and the peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 has a rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

  In this second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled up. By being slid in the slit, the second big winning opening door 2611 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

  Thereby, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 is moved to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down abuts on the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The game ball B discharged backward from the guide passage 2613 is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

  The side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and the first guide passage 2701 guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 to the rear. And two induction passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, which extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, is bent rightward, and is further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

  This side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. There is.

  Further, the side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and a lower end in contact with an upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upwards over almost the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side with respect to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind it. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is a rear unit provided in the rear side. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 for performing a lottery of the ordinary lottery result of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 by the passage of the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801 and. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that projects obliquely downward and to the left from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is assembled in the game board 5, and its extension line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located in the approximate center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the state where the gate member 2800 is assembled on the game board 5. The sphere B forms a gap through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center accessory 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B contacts.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted so that the windmill W enters the region on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. Thus, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by hitting the left side of the center character 2500 so as to flow down.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 of the center accessory 2500 are more than the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is struck so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role object 2500. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability than that, a part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W. Be guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002. Then, the game ball B not received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. May be guided to the side and received in the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing through between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the side discharge parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge part 2513a, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the first passing port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. The sheet is detected by 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, the first special lottery result is selected and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being caught.

  In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Accordingly, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the driving operation (“left hitting”) of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with a strength such that the game ball B enters above a portion of the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which becomes lower rightward from the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B that is in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of just above the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is a left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion by the plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided in order of decreasing probability and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and passed to the ninth transfer port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened / closed is performed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit, or rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. To the left of.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. The detection of the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 gives a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B.

  The game ball B that has not been accepted into the second prize hole 2006 and has flowed down to the left of the second prize hole 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely leftward) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly in the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and their inclinations. Thus, after being rolled to the left and rolling from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the abutment with the obstacle nails N causes the upper shelf portion 2412p to flow to the upper shelf portion 2412p without flowing down. May flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p to the left, and then to the obstacle nail N that is planted to the left. After coming into contact with each other, turning downward, and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first special winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to make the first. It is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, the first big prize It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

  Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the right end of the obstacle nail N or the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll rightward against the inclination thereof and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is not returned into the game area 5a, but is not returned into the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, if the "normal win" is selected as the normal selection result, the second start Since the mouth door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received in the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  In addition, when the game ball B is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn. As a result, when the “big hit” is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening door 2417 moves and the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the second winning portion 2412b is discharged to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left, it comes into contact with a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and flows down obliquely to the lower right, and the second shelf portion 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf portion 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h, and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received by the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  From this, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and "small hit" is performed. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". The first starting port 2002 is always open, whereas the second starting port 2004 is required to allow the gate portion 2003 to pass the game ball B to draw (or assign) the "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to receive the game ball B in the second starting port 2004 is lower than that in the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. An operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of.

  Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting slot 2002 and a “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the opening and closing, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right hit" so that the game ball B can be received in the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2006, and the first prize hole. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B into the 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated allow passage of the gate portion 2003 easily. , The second sub-out port 2012 is easily received, so that the striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball. It is possible to entertain the typing operation of B.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state can be drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing the "right hit", Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" and "big hit" may be drawn, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and a flat back left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower portion of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left production unit 3200 and the lower right production unit 3250, and the lower back middle production unit 3300 provided behind the lower left production unit 3200 and the lower right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind rear front right decoration 3040 in rear case 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in rear box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit 3600 provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparent and made of synthetic resin.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d in the rear surface when viewed from the rear side so as to be slidable left and right.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface abutting on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting a decorative body, a rendering unit, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, the back box 3010 has a band-plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side of the opening 3010a and both left and right sides. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 while being separated from each other in the left and right directions.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3031 and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). This back front left decoration 3030 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front right decoration 3040 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3041 and a decoration seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). This back front right decoration 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIG. 111, FIG. 135, etc.). Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are flat plate-shaped so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. Has been extended to.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. Has been extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

  As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (hatched portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made invisible. Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 that covers the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the rear front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the left front decoration 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, it is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left / right lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decoration 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decoration 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the back left front decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view, the function display unit 1400 is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back-front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 (functional part) and the like provided in the rear.

  On the other hand, in the front front right decoration 3040, when viewed from the front, it extends to the upper right corner of the rear box 3010 so as to cover the entire rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, and a transparent front. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear rear right up / down drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 invisible to the player, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the same function and effect as the front left decorative body 3030.

  As described above, according to the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as described above, since the front of the functional component provided on the rear side can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, by the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, give the player a sense of openness, and at the same time the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the portions outside the game area 5a in the decoration seal 3032 of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the decoration seal 3042 of the back front right decoration body 3040, which are provided with a predetermined decoration, are the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen from the front through them, it is possible to decorate the outside of the game area 5a with them, and it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

  Further, as described above, the front front left decorative body 3030 and the rear front right decorative body 3040 can make the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 transparent, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the rear unit. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the side of the player) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  The functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 which are extended to the outside of the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, if it is attempted to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be done may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be set large relative to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

  In addition, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a can extend the design in the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit seen from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower portion of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is substantially transparent.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and Out port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. And a magnetic sensor 3055 which is provided at a rear part of the position and detects an illegal magnetism.

  In addition, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first transfer opening 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 is transferred and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and the general left side of the side unit 2200 The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. Game ball B received in the 5th delivery opening 3065 and the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered. The 6th delivery opening 3066, the 7th delivery opening 3067 to which the game ball B received in the 2nd big winning opening 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 Eighth delivery port 3068 through which the game ball B thus received is delivered, and a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received at the second sub-out port 2012 of the right middle unit 2700 is delivered.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B transferred to the first transfer port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward, and a second transfer path. The game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3062 and the game ball B transferred to the third transfer port 3063 are merged and discharged to the second discharge path, and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is below the sixth transfer port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after guiding to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge passage.

  The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. To be done. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inner side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, and is detected by the general winning opening 2001 and then discharged downward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth receiving opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharging path. .

  It is accepted in the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received in the game ball B and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 and the game ball B transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 by being transferred to the second special winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 are It is discharged through the discharge passage.

  The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth transfer opening 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge passage. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer-out opening 3069 merges with the fourth discharge passage after being detected by the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, It is discharged through the four discharge channels.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B that has been received in the out opening 2010 that is open at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (the game ball B that has not been given a privilege, also referred to as “out ball”) belongs to.

  The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the gaming ball B is circulated in a cylindrical direction in the front-rear direction. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in the shape of a flat plate in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 A rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The tubular portion 3081 is approximately the same size as the outlet 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned (a width in which the three game balls B are not aligned), and the inner surface on the lower side is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with two out-port sensors 3053 arranged side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing through the left side of the partition 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. The game ball B that has circulated is detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out mouth sensor 3053, so that the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, and the game ball B Can be promptly discharged to prevent it from being stagnated on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 has the tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out-recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the upper front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects further forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The gaming ball B is passed through the tubular portion 3081 and detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide to the left outlet sensor 3053 side, and it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the driving operation most suitable for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

  Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the projection of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over. Therefore, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can be escaped to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B of the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the outlet 2010 without being stagnant.

  Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected below the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward in the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is out-out sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent it from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010.

  In this embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recessed portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recessed portion 1123. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning a prize. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning opening, It is possible to inform that fraudulent acts are being performed.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the “ball-out rate” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a display unit for displaying the “ball payout rate”.

  Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) that have been driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, only the “out ball” is detected by the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out-out sensor 3054. It is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 by comparing the respective numbers of “” and “all balls”.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear / rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear / rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear-rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-rear effect unit.

  The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (the front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape whose front view is open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The rear-rear production unit 3100 includes a rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 that extends in the left-right direction and a rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 that moves the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a transparent flat decorative body 3111 provided with a relief-shaped decoration on the front side, and a plurality of first decorative bodies 311 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 on the front side. There is provided a back decoration board 3114 on which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back decoration board 3114 are full-color LEDs each of which is a surface-mounted type and capable of emitting multiple colors. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 can make the decoration 3111 (back rear movable decoration 3110) emit light.

  The back-back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 vertically extending on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. The unit base 3121 and the left side of the unit base 3121 extend vertically in a columnar shape. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back-back movable ornament 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and extends vertically above and below the slide shaft 3122 in parallel with the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral on the outer periphery. Spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  In addition, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 serving as a rotation shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 attached, the motor base 3127 that attaches the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

  In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and a slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below and a left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and that can abut the locking projection 3116b of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 Is equipped with.

  Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, a back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back-rear detection sensor 3136. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front side. Connection between the front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are attached to the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the production drive board 1720. Between the rear rear left relay board 3139 and the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the shock. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back lower back detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The slide guide 3130 is capable of abutting the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 on the upper end surface. Further, the slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface.

  The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved in the vertical direction only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. In the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

  The upper end of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121 and the lower end of the spring 3132 is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which the vertices are chamfered in a front view. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a slot-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex above the rotation axis. And a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also extends in the left-right direction. An abutting surface 3134b which extends and is capable of abutting the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear rear movable decoration body 3110, and is inclined so as to move leftward from the right end of the abutting surface 3134b, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 slidably in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the rear-end effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back-rear effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear rear movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the 3110 abuts.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of 3132 causes the link member 3133 to act in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis, and the lock member 3134 to urge in the rightward sliding direction. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (defective), the remaining movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from falling (falling). it can.

  Further, in the normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  The rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the rear-rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the back shaft drive motor 3126 rotates the spiral shaft 3123 in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view), the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back rear movable decoration 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward, away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable ornament 3110.

  Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123, and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 causes the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 to move. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the protruding pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b is used. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the lower back rear detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

  Then, the rear back movable ornament 3110 that has fallen is brought into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, whereby the fall is stopped and the state becomes the appearance position (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this state of the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear back movable ornament 3110, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 does not contact.

  In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

  When the back rear movable decoration 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, in a clockwise direction in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

  Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  Then, when the movable rear decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the lock-back member 3134 prevents the back-rear movable decoration 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 is detected by the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

  According to the rear-rear production unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position invisible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 in the retracted position is released to the left, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving it, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when releasing the lock.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body behind back]
Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear back movable decoration together with the rear rear decoration substrate. 143 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-removable decoration body disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 147 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decoration body in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decoration substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a), (C) is a front view which shows a part of light guide radiation plate and a back decoration board in the same site | part as the decorative body of (a).

  Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decoration by the ornament and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear-rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear-rear movable ornament. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back-and-back decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED, and FIG. 153 (b) is the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the site | part which is doing, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, and the back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the rear back decoration substrate in an enlarged manner and showing it together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back rear decoration substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back rear decoration substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back and rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an expanded sectional view, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and is provided with a decoration portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided near the left and right ends and a left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in a line. Each first decoration part 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, each of the second decorative portions 3152 imitates predetermined characters, and is arranged side by side on the left and right, so that the concept of the present pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 5) is used. A predetermined logo is formed along the machine 1 (game board 5 world view). In this way, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is decorated with the logo between the two cherry blossoms.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146 and the like, the back movable decoration body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 by embossed (relief-shaped) irregularities. And a translucent portion (region) provided with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decoration 3111 and having a decoration (picture) constituting the rest of the decoration 3150. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decoration sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 A back decoration board 3114 on which a plurality of first and second LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”), and a back side of the back decoration board 3114. Overturn And a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. 3117.

  In addition, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components such as the plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side decorative substrate 3114, and the front surface such as an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged The attributes of the side electronic component (which may further include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component). The front-side notation is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back decoration board 3114 with a predetermined paint color by silk-screen printing, and a transparent part (111) is provided behind the transparent flat decorative body 3111 ( Area) and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, and a back decoration board 3114 are arranged in this order. Sites with properties Area), the color of a predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is transmitted through the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112, and the decoration 3111. In a state where the color of the predetermined paint is visible in a region corresponding to a light-transmitting portion (region) in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, Is enough to be able to confirm the presence of the color of the predetermined paint, and while the color of the predetermined paint indicates a character or a symbol or a shape, it cannot be determined, When the color of the predetermined paint is visible in the area corresponding to the transparent part (area), the character, symbol, and shape (that is, the attribute of the front electronic component indicated by the front notation portion) is determined by the predetermined paint color. ) Door can be.

[5-9d-2. Backside movable ornaments]
The ornamental body 3111 has flat front and rear general surfaces. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding forward and shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. And a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided in a portion that is an outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer circumference of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two-row) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

  The first decorative protrusion 3111 a and the third decorative protrusion 3111 c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156 (a))) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that projects forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portions in FIGS. 147 to 149). The decorative body 3111 is colorless and transparent in its entirety except for the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a) and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided on the curved front surface portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Is not provided on the side surface of the. Thereby, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided also on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, a high-grade feeling can be imparted by the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d. At the same time, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curved metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148, etc., the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is not easily visible from the front.

  In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to reflect the light to the rear side and illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side, so that the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

  The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. Specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like project upward facing upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface has elasticity and which is heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position at a predetermined distance below the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). .

  In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion of the hot sheet that contacts the decorative body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the curved surface, and the metal foil is in a good condition even in a three-dimensionally shaped portion such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil pressed). As a result, as compared with the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decoration part 3111d by a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, so that the first decoration protrusion 3111d is lowered. It is possible to form a decorative body 3111 by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, in a state where the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on a hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the first decorative protrusion 3111b are moved to the first end. Transfer the metal foil. Then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from that of the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is transferred to the position (first foil pressing area FS1) and transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). Thereby, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors is formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b without performing the masking process on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111, the metal film at the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled (laser peeled) by laser light. Alternatively, the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the first decorative protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface portion.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the recess 3111e makes it possible to equalize the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deformation of the resin due to sink marks during injection molding.

  The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the later-described first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visible.

  Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the later-described first light diffusing portion 3112c and second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the front recessed portion 3111e in the rear recessed portion 3111e. The diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the portion of the rear recess 3111e. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decoration base 3115 on the rear side of the decoration 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (player side) by the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a position in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Back decorative sheet of movable decoration]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on its rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a which is present, and a second contour portion 3112b which is provided between the second decoration portion 3152 and the first decoration protrusion 3111a which is double formed in the decoration body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and provided inside a first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); Second provided on the inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, which corresponds to the second decorative portion 3152 and is provided on the double of the decorative body 3111 (on the rear side of the third decorative protrusion 3111c) It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e that is provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion of a pattern simulating a cherry blossom smaller than that of the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is The hologram is used to display the interference fringes of light. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion of the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as that of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. The portion of the first contour portion 3112a that resembles a cherry blossom is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored according to the view.)). It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the design or the like may be one that has glitter that glitters in the form of particles.

  The first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (the metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and the metal is Since the decorative portion 3111d has a portion of the same color (gold in the present embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult for the back rear movable decoration body 3110 to feel the thinness.

  The first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. As a result, the coloring of the pattern or hologram on the front side is improved. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light radiated forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made larger, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made to emit brighter light. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

  Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the ornamental body 3111, the first contoured portion 3112a is flat on the rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 except for the rear concave portion 3111e. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent ornamental body 3111 comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a so as to come into close contact therewith, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly viewed from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111 without being diffusely reflected.

  The 2nd outline part 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 is formed in the black linear shape of predetermined width, as shown in figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion between the doubled first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 in the second decorative portion 3152. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the gold-colored metal decoration portions 3111d that are doubled, the double metal decoration portion 3111d is highlighted by the black color of the second contour portion 3112b. It is possible to enhance the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing section 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of linear projections extending in a short line in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, in the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the first decoration portion 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery, as shown in FIG. A predetermined color (the present embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shading becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. (Pink) are printed by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing section 3112c is caused to emit light, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusing section 3112c causes a slight Since different shades appear, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the light emission decoration of the first decoration portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom.

  The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing section 3112d is provided on the entire inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative sections 3152, as shown by shaded shades in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been. The second light diffusing unit 3112d has a light-transmitting property, and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a semitransparent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing section 3112d is caused to emit light, the second light diffusing section 3112d has a predetermined dot pattern. It is possible to make the second decoration portion 3152 consisting of the characters “E” emit light with a uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e which is recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light emitted from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusing portion 3112c, and a second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on a rear surface side of a base transparent sheet. I have. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing unit 3112c and the second light diffusing unit 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

  The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light so that the light-transmitting radiation plate 3113 emits light. Part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and applied to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface remains transparent. The light radiated to leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. From this, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration such that the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is backlit. Moreover, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e and emitted to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back can be made large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is made substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the rear back movable decoration body 3110 is in a state in which the decoration is not framed. Therefore, the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear, it is possible to show the player a feeling of unity, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the player a visual impact and pay attention to the player, enjoy a large decoration, and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  Although the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment has the transparent body 3112e (first decorative protrusion 3111a) provided with the transparent transparent portion 3112e behind the decorative body 3111, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. Accordingly, when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from diagonally front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 from being deteriorated. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion 3112a in the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used as the first decorative protrusion 3111d. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate with movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 146, etc., the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a that extends left and right, a flange portion 3113b that extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. The plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back-and-back decorative board 3114 are inserted, and the body portion 3113a in the front-and-rear direction, A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of the 3113c and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f are opposite to each other. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110.

  The first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 where the shade of pink by the dots is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center side than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals of the cherry blossoms. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is located on the center line of the petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c). It is formed in the open state. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion of the main body portion 3113a that is thinner than its thickness from being formed, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, Part of the light is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated | emitted inside 3113c. Then, when the light internally emitted from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body portion 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is emitted to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light passing through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is reflected because part of the light is reflected at the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side. The amount of light of will be greatly reduced compared to before passing.

  Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided inside the body portion 3113a in the direction along the surface of the body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, in the portion where the first LED 3114a is stored, light does not pass to the side opposite to the first LED storage portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at the optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent light emission decoration by being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and it is possible to surely make only the desired second decoration portion 3152 of the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 emit light. .

  The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, and “☆” are provided. In order to perform light emission decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. As described above, the first LED 3114a is provided. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED housing portion 3113c housing the first LED 3114a for illuminating part of the "i" is provided with the extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of "☆". ing. By this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for light emitting decoration of "☆" being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is illuminated, "I" is not illuminated. In addition, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for decorating the “i” to be emitted and decorated to be guided to the “☆” side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery, as shown in FIG. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions that imitate the stamens provided around the center of the first ornament portion 3151 that imitates the cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion that imitates a stamen located on the center line of the petal. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

  The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, Part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d so as to be fan-shaped diffused toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, so that FIG. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a side by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the reflection thereof. The light can make the petals lighter and brighter.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed into a quadrangular pyramid, and the reflecting portions 3113e are arranged so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e excludes a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the plate thickness of the main body part 3113a, the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface to the front and emit the light from the front surface of the main part 3113a to the front. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the rear side is difficult to be visually recognized when viewed from the front side due to the presence of the plurality of reflection sections 3113e.

  In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the like. Can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the first LED housing portion 3113c side provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. You can Also, the leg portion 3113f has a rear surface contacting the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the body portion 3113a and the front rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along the side of the rear end of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f to the front.

  The right slider front portion 3113h cooperates with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the ornament base 3115 to form a right slider 3117.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is provided by the flange portion 3113b. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming poor. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, the light guiding and radiating plate 3113 extends from the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back and rear decoration substrate. The creepage distance EL to the 3114 (the copper foil 3114d and the electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent that.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes that penetrate the main body portion 3113a, so that the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the heat effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

  Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are compared with a case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a or second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is close to and connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large, For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated and abrupt temperature rise can be further alleviated.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a approaches the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114. This allows heat to escape from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 through the gap, and suppresses the temperature rise in the back-rear decoration board 3114 to affect the heat. Can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is set to “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting unit of the first LED 3114a” to “the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the first. Distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a. " If the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. Also, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, and thus the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a is provided with a reflection portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted to the front even in the portion of the main body 3113a where the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the front metal decoration portion 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-rear decoration board of back-removable ornament]
A plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and a side view, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a top mount type and a surface mount type, and 155g (FIG. 155 (a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is disposed on the right side of the front (front) surface of the back decoration board 3114.). The packages of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is white (natural color). It is also said to be made of white (natural color) resin. An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor is mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Further, the back-side decorative substrate 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 4) on which a predetermined circuit pattern is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the flat substrate body 3114c. 154 etc.).

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), the second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and the connector 3114g (surface mounting) are the front surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c. White coating liquid (hereinafter simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the type is soldered. In some cases, a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-side decorative substrate 3114, there are provided pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a region on the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate main body 3114c where the electronic component 3114e (surface mounting type) is to be soldered is soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for the above. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decoration board 3114, although not shown, near the front side electronic components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and connector 3114g, the front side electronic component is provided. Attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is to be arranged (Furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, Direction) and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. It is printed by. Although not shown, the back surface (back surface) of the back decoration board 3114 shows the component number of the back surface electronic component and the position where the back surface electronic component is arranged near the back surface electronic component such as the electronic component 3114e. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as a region (further include the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  Moreover, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by lighting the light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are as described above. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors emits light (light emission) or is turned off so that the light emission mode changes in various ways. For this reason, as described above, the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c and the pad to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, A white resist is formed over the entire area except for the through-holes, lands, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on the solid-coated white resist, the front side notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor is printed by yellow printing with a silk paint to obtain multicolor emission. When the full-color LED is turned off, it is possible to make the notation part on the yellow surface side inconspicuous against the white resist. In addition, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), printing is performed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint that is very close to the white reflectance. The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side notation portion and the back side notation portion.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap between the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b, The size is formed so as to be substantially constant. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 to be described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a constant size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size to be housed inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

  In the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom. The light is provided toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration 3111d). Thus, the first LED 3114a in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 can light-emit each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom.

  In addition, at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions that are doubled in the decorative body 3111 are provided in each of the second decorative portions 3152 that are lined up on the left and right. The light is provided near the rear of 3111a toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the right and left to emit light one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central portion simulating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal of the first decoration portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom. Thus, the second LED 3114b can cause the five parts of the first decoration portion 3151, which are similar to the stamens, in the central portion to emit light.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is imitated as a stamen-shaped part rather than other parts. Can also emit light with high brightness, which can attract the player's attention. Therefore, in the light-emission decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion where the first LED 3114a emits light in a plane shape and a portion where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be provided. A variety of light emitting effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

  The board body 3114c is a rigid board having a thickness slightly smaller than that of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided such that the outer peripheral edge thereof is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in the present embodiment) inward. ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creeping distance EL and the space distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are increased, and the discharge of static electricity or the like occurs. The insulation property against short circuit can be enhanced, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  In addition, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided up to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the copper foil 3114d can radiate heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. , And the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced in cooling effect to prevent damage due to heat.

  Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined area on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. The light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is included (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f becomes lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, and makes it easier to reflect the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side forward. You can

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (the amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide emission plate 3113 can be increased to allow the rear rear movable ornament 3110 (the ornament 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to be brighter and lighter.

  In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 comes into contact with the inside of the light reflection assisting region 3114f (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). Accordingly, even if the white coating (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg 3113f is worn or turned up, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. I will not do it. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulating property, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled into a back-and-back movable decorative body 3110, so that the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and the flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will be described. Since 3113b and the outer circumference are doubly surrounded, it is difficult to see the outer circumference from the outside and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from the rear into a gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In the present embodiment, this creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can accommodate a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more, or 10 kV.

  Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 by the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided in the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 can be illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of light emission, and it is possible to reliably cause the desired movable light emitting element 3110 to perform a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

  In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are housed from the rear with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as close as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front side, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white for making the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, It is possible to reduce the cost of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body behind the back]
The decoration base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates through the coating plate portion 3115a, a flat plate-shaped coating plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that projects forward from the outer peripheral edge of the coating plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in front view.

  The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed into a size. In other words, the covering plate portion 3115a (decoration body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back decoration board 3114 from the rear and protect the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rear-side decorative substrate 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and the front end is located in front of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Is projected so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, the flange portion 3115b is in a state of being inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110. The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3114.

  The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long in the left and right, and a portion that is open larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be affected. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d cooperates with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to configure the right slider 3117.

  Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . This makes it easier to release heat from the electronic component 3114e through the gap between the rear surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of the back-end movable decoration]
Subsequently, main operation effects of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. In the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body It is assembled by attaching the attachment boss 3111f of the ornamental body 3111 to the ornamental body base 3115 with the back rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

  The back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a transparent plate-shaped decoration body 3111, a first decoration protrusion 3111a, a second decoration protrusion 3111b, and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding forward, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with the hologram on which the picture pattern and the interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 is different from the decorative portion 3150. The three-dimensional effect can be imparted by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. With the hologram, a sense of depth can be added. As a result, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has a small thickness in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thinness, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be shown to entertain the player.

  In addition, as described above, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back-and-back movable decoration 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the rear back movable decoration 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the rear rear movable decoration 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. It is possible to provide the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back and facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. In addition, since the back-end movable decorative body 3110 can be thinned, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging another decorative body. We can provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, and can provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows you to enjoy a variety of performances. It provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be differentiated. can do.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of a metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous by the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decoration portion 3111d a three-dimensional effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back-back movable decoration body 3110 moves from the retracted position, which is invisible to the player, to the visible position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Since it is possible to give the player, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in the back-back movable decorative body 3110, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat and the decorative sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. Also, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the movable rear decorative body 3110 can be made large. In addition, since the rear back movable decoration body 3110 has the decoration sheet 3112 having substantially the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is not framed, and thus the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is not trimmed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration object 3110, thereby creating an effect with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the game to a player and give the player a visual impact so that he or she can pay attention to it. Also, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decoration effect.

  Furthermore, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer circumference of each of the first decoration 3151 and the plurality of second decorations 3152, the first decoration 3151 is provided. Alternatively, the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually light-emitted. Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially light-emit a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right, or to light-emit only the specific first decorative portion 3151 or the second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately decorating the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a after irradiating light in the direction along the surface thereof within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are illuminated and decorated, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. You can increase the distance to. Accordingly, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Also, the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly light-emitting decorated, and the player can be entertained with the light-emitting decoration that looks good. In addition, the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a allow the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is configured to use the first LED 3114a as a side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is a top-view type, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the decoration portion 3150). In the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of (1), a portion that emits light in a dot shape with high brightness by the second LED 3114b can be added to the portion that is light-emitted and decorated by the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to entertain the player more and to play the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c receives light. The part 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is made incident on the inside of the main body part 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion that is desired to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be illuminated and decorated brighter, and a more dramatic effect can be obtained. It is possible to entertain high-luminous decorations to the player.

  Furthermore, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing 3113c in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side. Since the housing portion 3113d is included, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is replaced by the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can be made as close as possible to, and the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction.

  Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are separated from each other. Since the gap is formed in the back side, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 is set to be "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting unit of the first LED 3114a" to "substrate". Distance from the front surface of main body 3114c to the front surface of first LED 3114a ". If the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. Also, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, and thus the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portions 3113f, and a plurality of openings are formed in the base body 3115 of the decorative body. Since it has the portion 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Also, the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released to suppress the temperature rise of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114.

  In addition, a temperature sensor is provided in the back rear movable decoration 3110, and when the back rear movable decoration 3110 (back rear decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back rear movable decoration 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) at which is executed may be increased. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3115b of the ornament base 3115 from the rear side, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided and radiated by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

  Further, since the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c by the predetermined distance SL inside. The creepage distance EL and the spatial distance can also be increased by this predetermined distance SL, and the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity or short circuit can be improved, and damage to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the back-back movable decoration body 3110, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved. Moreover, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is smaller than that when the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back-back decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the driving of the back rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction is generated in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the body is moved up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surface of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 is reduced. Static electricity accumulated in the whole is difficult to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creeping distance EL to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be moved up and down and the back-rear movable decoration body It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitted and decorated is entertained.

  When the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative portion 3111d to the GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back rear decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another Embodiment of Back-Movable Decorative Body]
Next, mainly with reference to FIG. 157, a back-rear movable decoration 3160, a back-rear movable decoration 3170, a back-rear movable decoration 3180, and the like according to an embodiment different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration 3110 are described. The details will be described. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a rear-rear movable ornament of a second embodiment different from the rear-rear movable ornament of FIG. 142 in section, and (b) is a rear-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decorative body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

  As shown schematically in FIG. 157 (a), the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161 with a predetermined decoration on the front surface. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 having a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 for radiating light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiating plate. A rear rear decoration substrate 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating the interior of 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface is mounted on the front surface.

  The decorative body 3161 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration part 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (design) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a low transparency portion of the decoration is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back and rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surface provided. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only in a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect light from the LED housing portion 3163a, which has been determined, to the front side, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It is good, or it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The back rear decorative substrate 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 at a position inside the predetermined distance SL. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3164.

  In the assembled state, the back-back movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 abutting on the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. And the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 is thin in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, which makes them difficult to see from the outside. And it looks good.

  Since the rear back movable ornament 3160 has a flange 3161b extending rearward from the main body 3161a of the ornament 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, a metal ornament on the front of the main body 3161a. The creepage distance EL from the 3161c to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3164, and It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, in the rear back movable decoration body 3160, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3164 may be provided.

  Subsequently, the back rear movable decoration body 3170 of the third embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (b), has an outer decoration body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decoration body 3171 (frame A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes (inside), and a light guide radiating plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface inside thereof to the front. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3174 having a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface mounted on the front surface.

  The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body part 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 3171a, and a main body part 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown, the inner decoration body 3172 is provided with a relief-like decoration having unevenness. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decorative body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back and rear decoration substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the LED housing portions 3173a, which are individually determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect the light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It is good, or it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear rear decorative substrate 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a position inside the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 by a predetermined distance SL. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3174.

  In the assembled state of the back-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decoration body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decoration body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In addition, in the back-back movable decoration body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-back decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 of the back surface of the support portion 3171b is inserted. Around the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 is thin in the front-rear direction. In the back-back movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the supporting portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174. In this back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-and-back decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and their outer peripheral surfaces are externally exposed. To make it hard to see and to make it look good.

  The back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171. The creeping distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back rear decoration substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3174, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174. Can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170, a decoration body base may be provided to cover the back side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3174.

  Subsequently, the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of the fourth embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (c), has an outer decoration body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decoration body 3181 (frame A rear decoration substrate 3183 having a translucent inner decoration body 3182 for closing the inside) and a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the inner decoration body 3182 and capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface. And are equipped with.

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the back rear movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c which covers. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the. Although not shown, the main body portion 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

  The back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed so that its outer shape is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap having a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner ornament body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the back outer decorative substrate 3183 by a predetermined distance SL. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3183.

  In the assembled state of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decoration body 3182 and the back rear decoration substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3181. In the back rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the outer decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portions 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevent the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

  In this rear-back movable ornament 3180, the flange 3182b of the inner ornament 3182 is provided inside the flange 3181b of the outer ornament 3181 provided with the metal ornament 3181c, and the inner ornament 3182 is Since the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182, the metal rear decorative substrate 3183c (copper of The creepage distance EL to the foil can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3183. can do.

  As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as those of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180, a decoration body base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back lower left production unit and lower back right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit behind It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower right production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is the rear lower left production unit and the lower right production unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the lower back left effect unit and the lower lower right effect unit from the front.

  The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010. The lower back left production unit 3200 and the lower back right production unit 3250 are located on both left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. It is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the back lower left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding backward, and a transparent lower back left decorative body provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202 and a lower back left decorative board which is provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). 3203 and a lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably mounted, and a lower back left decorative body 3202 is mounted. And a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the.

  The lower back left production unit 3200 is attached to the front lower surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and to the lower left drive motor 3205 rotation shaft. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 that is meshed with the drive gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3208. It is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear and the lower back left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The lower back counterclockwise decoration 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left decorative member 3201 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower left decorative member 3202, the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The lower back left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower left rotation decoration 3201 on top of each other and rotating so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are provided by printing, but the back bottom left rotation Through the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back lower decorative board 3203 disposed behind the lower back lower decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that projects forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. In the state in which the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the driving gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left production unit 3200 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to emit light, thereby causing the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 and the lower lower left decoration 3202 to operate. Can be decorated with luminous.

  It should be noted that the front side electronic components such as the component numbers of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203, and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic components are arranged (In some cases, the front-side notation indicates the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component.) The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is a transparent lower back left decorative body. Since the lower decorative substrate 3202 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in this order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing is lower back left decorative body 3202. And back lower left decoration When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side) are determined by the predetermined paint color. The attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the notation section can be determined.

  Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin, and the connector is The housing is made of white (also called natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural)) resin.

  Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effecting unit 3250 includes a transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower right decorative body provided behind the lower right rotating decorative body 3251. 3252 and a lower back right decorative board provided behind the lower back right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). 3253 and a back lower right decoration board 3253, a lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 is rotatably mounted, and a lower back right decoration body 3252 is mounted. And a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the unit.

  The lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward, and the rotating shaft of the lower back right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. A second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a second transmission gear 3258 meshing with the rear lower right rotation decorative body 3251 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a. It is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the third transmission gear 3259 in the shape of a spur gear and below the lower right decorative body 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower lower right decorative body 3252, the lower lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The lower back right decoration 3252 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 stacked one on top of the other and rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

  The lower back right decorative body 3251 and the lower right back decorative body 3252 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower right back decorative body 3251 and the lower right back decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom right rotation is performed. Through the decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right back decorative board 3253 arranged behind the lower right back decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The lower back right decorative board 3253 is provided with a lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can cause the lower lower right rotation decorative body 3251 and the lower lower right decoration 3252 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower lower right decoration substrate 3253 emit light.

  The surface-side electronic components such as a part number of a surface-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253, and a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (In some cases, the front-side notation indicates the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The part is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 is a transparent lower right decorative body. Since the lower decorative substrate 3253 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are arranged in this order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing is the lower right decorative member 3252. And the bottom right rotating decorative body When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side) are determined by the predetermined paint color. The attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the notation section can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 3253 have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). The housing is made of a white (natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)) resin.

  A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a connector (surface mount type), a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a lower back surface are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white"). Sometimes referred to as "resist".), A white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, pads and throughs to which the lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the front (lower) surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253 is located near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs and connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component, such as the component number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic component (The mounting direction) and the type of the front-side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. It is printed by silk printing. Although illustration is omitted on the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, near the back side electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the component number of the back-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, The back side notation that indicates the mounting orientation (mounting direction) may include the type of back side electronic component.) A white resist that is solid painted with a yellow paint that is a light color that is hard to stand out against white The top is printed by silk printing.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire area excluding the plurality of LEDs, the pads to which the connectors are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like, is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the painted white resist, the front side notation that allows identification of full-color LEDs that can emit multiple colors is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multiple colors are turned off, white In addition to being able to make the yellow surface-side notation inconspicuous against the resist, it is also possible to use a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors. At the time of light emission), the bottom decorative board is a combination of a solid white resist with high reflectivity and a front side notation printed by silk printing with yellow paint very close to white reflectivity. The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the 3203 and lower right decorative substrate 3253 can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Inside production unit]
Next, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle raising / lowering mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is a rear lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle lifting mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle rotating decorative body unit in the lower back middle rotating effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

  The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a back-rear middle decoration unit 3320 having a transparent back-rear middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear middle decoration unit 3320 that moves up and down. And an elevating mechanism 3350.

  The shape of the inside-under-the-back decoration 3310 of the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 is a regular hexagon when viewed from the front. This back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at an angle of 60 degrees in a clockwise direction from the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, a lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, which will be described later. Is provided.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed to be transparent, the outer periphery of each of the six numeral decorations protrudes forward, and further has a rib portion connecting the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state. It is formed to protrude forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, a metal decoration portion 3310a having a metallic luster is arranged near the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion where the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed and the rib portion are molded integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. May be formed separately from the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, and the formed outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, the metal decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on each of the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a sense of quality, and the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 has the metal decoration 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion protruding to the front surface and the rib portion, and the back middle rotating decoration 3310 has no metal decoration 3310a formed on the side surface thereof. Absent. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decoration portion 3310a of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the under-back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is further increased by at least the length of the side surface of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3310a from flowing to the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and damaging the lower middle lower decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

  In addition, as described above, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed with the rib portion that connects the six numbered decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state protruding forward. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion). A plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed while being transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface of the rotating decorative body 3310. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is configured such that a rib portion protrudes from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, A plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction over the rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 are formed in a pear-skin pattern, and the rib portion is formed in the lower back middle decoration. The shading becomes darker from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding to the front surface of the body 3310 toward the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the side rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency becomes low. Is applied by printing That.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166 and the like, the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) Is provided at the rear of 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a attached to the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape; and a shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. A rotating base 3324 having a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and attached to the rear side of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310. There.

  The surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is subjected to lens cutting (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and is disposed behind the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322 are clearly difficult to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. The back surface may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

  In addition, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detection piece 3325 which projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference which is coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is provided behind the rotating base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent lower middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as a center point, and a rear lower middle decoration 3328. And a lower back middle decorative board 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type), which are attached to the front surface of the 3329 and can detect the area detecting piece 3325, , And a position detection piece 3326 can detect a localization sensor 3331 Leaded, the.

  In addition, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is mounted and the lower back middle decorative body 3328 is mounted. A movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft projects forward, and a rotation shaft of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And a slide slider 3336 which is guided by the slide rail 3360 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in an assembled state. , Is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, it is possible to light-emit a portion of the numeral decoration (relief) of the lower middle back rotating decorative body 3310. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is a surface mounted type full color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 displays the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” between the numbers “2” and “3” on the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310. Through the numeral decoration, a circular arc is formed within a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

  Each of the plurality (here, six) of the position detection pieces 3326 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on the circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. Each of the position detection pieces 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and the adjacent An interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis as a center (see FIG. 168 (a)). .

  A plurality (here, three) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of clockwise, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged so that the decorations of “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 are positioned right above the center of rotation, and the areas of “3”, “4”, and “5” are detected. It is provided at a position corresponding to the number decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a protruding rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

  This under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the under-rear middle rotation decorative motor 3333 through the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear middle rotation drive motor 3333. You can In addition, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, respectively. Also, the underbody decoration 3328 can be illuminated.

  It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attribute of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component. The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and at the rear of the transparent lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) 3321 and the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower back first decorative substrate 3322 is the inner lens. (Diffusing lens) 321, and through the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a character is displayed in a predetermined paint color. , Symbol, and shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower lower part have their packages made of white (a color recognized as the same color as white) resin.

  A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322, a white resist is applied by solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. A resist layer is formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a part number and a surface of the front surface electronic component are provided near the front surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side) The electronic part type may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. . Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a part number of the back side electronic component and a position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the backside electronic component such as the indicated area (in addition, the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, and the model of the backside electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, the region number sensor 3330, the component number of the surface-side electronic component such as the position specification sensor 3331, and the front-side electronic component are arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the front-side electronic component (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component. Is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 in a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent lower back middle decoration 3328 is included. The second lower decorative board 3329 is arranged behind the lower part, so that the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative board 3329 by silk printing is lower than the lower back. Through the decoration body 3328, When a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a character, a symbol, and a shape (that is, the surface indicated by the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Attribute of the side electronic component) can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are each made of a resin made of white (color recognized as the same color as white) resin. It has become.

  A pad on which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, A white resist is formed in a whole area except a through hole, a land, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A layer is formed. A pad on which the area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), the position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered on the rear surface (rear surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area excluding the through holes and lands. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, although not shown, in the vicinity of the front surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part number of the front surface electronic component, the surface The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side) The electronic part type may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. . Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the second lower decorative board 3329, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be arranged are located near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid-coated white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the pads (through holes, lands, etc.) to which a plurality of LEDs or the like are soldered are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid-painted white resist") on the entire area except the above. , The front side notation part that enables the specification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the solid-colored white resist is printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint to turn off the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation part inconspicuous with the white resist at the time, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on. At the time of light emission), the combination of a solid white resist with high reflectivity and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to white reflectivity, The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower decorative substrate 3329 can be kept high.

  If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the under-bottom middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends in the left-right direction and both ends are attached to the under-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the under-bottom right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to the front surface of the unit so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and the flat bottom part of the unit base 3351 is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a second transmission gear. It has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a that meshes with the gear portion 355, and a drive pin 3356b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. And a lift cam gear 3356 rotatably mounted in the upper center part.

  Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The first slit 3357a extending to the first slit 3357a, and the second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. And a lower back intermediate relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

  Further, the back-and-lower center elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevator slit 3359a through which an elevator pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the ornamental body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front surface of the lower cover middle ornamental body unit 3320. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front direction). In the clockwise direction with respect to the sight) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to a lower portion on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached to the right end of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the base end side and at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has a tip end side extending to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

  The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle decoration board 3322, a lower back middle decoration board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lift drive motor. 3352 relays the connection between the lower back middle up-and-down detection sensor 3358a and the production drive board 1720.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and an elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the horizontal center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-and-lower-in-and-under-elevation drive motor 3352, the back-and-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the up-and-down cam gear 3356, and the up-and-down cam gear 3356a. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the elevating pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 that are slidably inserted in the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movements of the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-rear middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-rear inside effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 is in the state of the lowered position where the in-under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowermost position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the lower-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 is positioned such that the tip side is below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip is under-under-the-back relay substrate 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is located near the proximal end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. . More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the force line of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

  Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the urging force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be viewed well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numeral decoration located at the lowermost side is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle first. By making the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emitting decorated (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the drive motor 3352 for driving in the lower back, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are passed. Thus, the lifting cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the distal end side, and the elevating arm moves. The tip end side of 3357 will rotate clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side moves upward.

  By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. Then, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved upward through the elevating pin 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, in the up-and-down arm 3357, since the spring 3362 exerts a biasing force in the clockwise direction, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the inside-under-the-back decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle up-and-down drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is performed. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves to the uppermost position.

  When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction acts due to the own weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

  In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is driven by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) from rebounding from the outside to the inside (the player). From the side), all the number decorations can be seen well (see FIG. 201).

  To return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to the lowered position from the raised position, rotate the drive gear 3353 in the reverse direction by the lower back middle driving motor 3352 to move the lifting arm 3357. Rotates counterclockwise, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 in a normal lowered position (further, a center for preventing the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501)). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps when viewed from the front.

  In the back under-center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the drive gear 3334 is rotated by the under-under-medium rotary drive motor 3333 in the under-under-medium decorative body unit 3320, so that the under-medium rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated via the rotary gear 3327. Can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 at any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the lower back middle rotating decoration unit 3320.

  In the normal state, in the under-rear middle production unit 3300, one of a plurality (here, 6) of numerical decorations in the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located immediately above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the state where the numeral decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is positioned above, the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 is set to the first area specifying portion. The position detection sensor 3331 detects a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 while detecting by the three region specification sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second region specification sensor 3330b, and the third region specification sensor 3330c. Is not detecting.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c cause the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 to move. Is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of "2" indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is the range of the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b do not detect, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects, the numeral decoration of "5" indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a does not detect, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "6" indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  As described above, by combination of the detection / non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330, that is, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not the vehicle is located within the stop area that includes it.

  Since the back-under-center rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the back-under-center rotation drive is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop a desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin for stopping at the stop position while identifying the area of the stop position by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 is used to recognize the origin. Thus, the load on the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reduced by suppressing the complicated control of the rotation.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 at a stop position of a desired numeral decoration, the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 stop as desired. In the case of the combination satisfying the positions, the position specifying sensor 3331 is displaced from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees, and therefore the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated by α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position identification sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is the origin. Then, from there (from the origin), when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, and a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

  Note that, in the above, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is generated when the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is further rotated by 13 steps in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position. The position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detecting away from the position specifying sensor 3331. When the position specifying sensor 3331 makes an angle of non-detection as an origin and rotates 20 steps, the rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired numeral decoration. Can be stopped exactly in position.

  Next, the light-emission decoration in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for causing the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 to emit light and decorate the under-rear middle decoration unit 3310. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3322 and a second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each numeral decoration can be independently illuminated.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are located behind a portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 that is outside the plurality of numeral decorations. The periphery can be illuminated.

  As described above, the inside-under-back production unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating a plurality of LEDs on the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 as appropriate, the LEDs are rotated in a state in which only a specific number decoration is illuminated or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Further, in the state in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the relevant portion of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is caused to emit light (or one emission mode is selected from a plurality of emission modes to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, by this, the area detection of the length over the three stop positions is performed on the rotating inside-the-bottom-under-the-back decoration 3310 having the six stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided, and three area specifying sensors 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325 and one position specifying detecting the position detecting piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are once undetected until the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  Then, since the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 includes the six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the inside-under-the-background rotation is detected by the area detecting pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by the one position specifying sensor 3331, and the stop position is displaced. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing it as much as possible.

  Moreover, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is performed by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further improved as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, a roulette wheel that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be achieved. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

  In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The invention is not limited to this, and the region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decorative body unit in the back-up production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decorative body unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is a figure.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back-and-forth lifting decoration body unit in the back-and-forth production unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decorative body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornamental body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative substrate from the front side in a state where the back-and-up elevator decoration unit in the back-side effect unit is moved to the appearance position.

  The back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back production unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back production unit 3400 includes a transparent front front rotating decoration 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a front front rotating decoration. A transparent back front decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right direction in which the shaft shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter, referred to as "surface (mounting Surface).)), And a back front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back front decorative body 3421 provided behind the back front decorative board 3422 and on the front. And a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the front upper rotating decorative body 3410.

  In addition, the back production unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the rear surface of the unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Back front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426. A rotary gear 3427, which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back front decorative substrate 3422. A back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the rotation gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427. Eteiru.

  Further, the back production unit 3400 includes a back elevation drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 such that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back elevation drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424. And an elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424, which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , Detects the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 that is attached to the rear surface of the rear upper front decorative substrate 3422. A rear cover 3424 is provided on the base end side so that the front side where the effective back up / down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) and the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 are provided is moved up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the up / down cam gear 3431. A back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 rotatably attached to the rear surface about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 are urged to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. A spring 3433 and a rod-shaped restricting member 3434, which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and restricts the upward movement of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 includes a transparent rear top / back rotating decorative body 3440 in which a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface penetrates in the center. A rear back decorative body 3451 and a back provided behind the rear rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). An upper rear decorative substrate 3452 and a rear upper decorative member 3451 are attached to the front surface from the rear of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423. And a lifting unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

  Further, the back up / down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up / down unit base 3453 such that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear-side rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a rotary gear 3458 having a spur gear shape attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back-and-up elevator decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevator unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458 from the rear. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up production unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back front decorative body 3421, the back front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover. The back front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotating ornament 3410 in the center of the left and right direction, and the rear petals are placed between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was rotated so that it is located at.

  The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. By illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) is such that, in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is struck by the ornamental body 3421, the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery ( That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5 world view) are applied by printing, and the back front front of the back front decoration 3421 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) should have a certain shade in the region excluding the region corresponding to the rotary ornament 3410 (so that the shade is lighter and darker than the shade in the peripheral portion of the petal). )of A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back Through the upper front decorative body 3421 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the rear upper front decorative substrate 3422 arranged behind the rear front decorative body 3421 can be visually recognized. .

  The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front-side notation part indicating the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included.) A back side front decorative body 3421 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back side front decorative substrate 3422 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent back side front decorative body 3421 is provided behind the transparent back side front rotating decorative body 3410. Since the front back decorative board 3422 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative board 3422 is transferred via the back front decorative body 3421. Or front and back decoration 3421 When the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin. ing.

  A plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up / down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. White on all areas except pads, through-holes, lands, etc., with a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid-coated white resist"). Resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mounting type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up / down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the backside (rear side) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, an area showing the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. And the like (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

  The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back upper lift detection sensor 3432 mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has an arc shape in which the cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotating decorative body 3410. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the upper and lower lifting decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by the back-side rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semi-circular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the rear upper / lower elevating decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up lifting detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

  The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 passes through the back rear decorative body 3451, the back rear decorative substrate 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and then the lifting unit base 3453. Extends to the rear side. The rear back decorative body 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the rear rear rotating decoration 3440 stacked one on top of the other and rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was made.

  The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 can cause the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light to make the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451 emit light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3451 are formed transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending in a random direction in a random manner. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are applied by printing, Through the decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decorative board 3452 disposed behind the back upper decorative body 3451 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The surface-side electronic components such as a part number of a surface-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-upper decorative board 3452 and a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is to be arranged. (In some cases, include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-upper decorative board 3452 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the transparent back-upper decorative body 3440 is provided behind the transparent back-upper rotary decoration 3440. 3451 and the rear upper back decoration board 3452 are arranged in this order, so that the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear upper back decoration board 3452 by silk printing causes the rear upper back decoration body 3451 to appear. Through or after decoration on the back 3451, and via the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the character is displayed in a predetermined paint color. , Symbol, and shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452 have respective packages made of white (a color recognized as being the same color as white) resin. The housing is made of a white (natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)) resin.

  On the surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3452 on the back side, a white resist solution is applied and formed on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components of the mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the device is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the (It may include a model.) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, a part number of the back side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the back side electronic component is arranged, etc., in the vicinity of the back side electronic component of the connector. Of the back-side electronic component (also includes the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the model of the back-side electronic component.) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And a slit 3453b in the shape of an elongated hole extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. On the front surface of the motor cover 3460, decoration imitating a cherry blossom is formed.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the electric decoration of the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). By printing the surface-side notation part that enables the specification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the white resist that has been printed by silk-printing with yellow paint, it becomes white when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous to the resist, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light) In the above, in combination with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance, the back side front decorative substrate 3422 and the back side The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the upper rear decorative substrate 3452 can be maintained high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  Next, the movement of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back production unit 3400 detects the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decorative body 3410 by the back rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotary ornament 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the front back rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, in a normal state, the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is provided on the tip side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the tip side is It is located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). In addition, the part of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes leftward from the back front decorative body 3421 is located in the rear of the back front left effect unit 3700 when assembled on the game board 5, It is invisible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the up-and-down cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear up-and-down up / down detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is positioned below the center of its revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453 of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450. positioned.

  More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is exerted to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the front end side moves downward due to the weight of the back-side elevating / decorating decorative body unit 3450, that force is exerted. Since the force line passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back up / down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up / down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

  Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to its own weight of the back-and-forth lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lift unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot be revolved, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back up / down drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting / lowering unit base 3453 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the front end side of the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 is moved downward by its own weight.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above a straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up / down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. The revolution of the is stopped.

  As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 via the lift unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 including the back / up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is fixed. , And the appearance position is moved downward from the back-up front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176 (b)). In this appearance position, since the front end side of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 near the center is located below the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It is possible.

  In the state in which the back up / down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back-side elevating / decorating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. In addition, the rear upper / lower elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the rear upper / lower elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431.

  It should be noted that in the state in which the back-and-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 further attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-forth lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lift unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In a state where the back up / down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up / down lifting decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized from the front, by rotating the drive gear 3455 by the back-up rear rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be made visible. .

  When the back up / down elevating decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the up / down cam gear 3431 is moved up and down by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction by the back up / down drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back up / down drive motor 3429 is stopped to move the back up / down decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and lifts the back up / down. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 177, in the back production unit 3400 of the present embodiment, the back front decorative substrate 3422 is provided behind the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration board 3452 emit light appropriately. By doing so, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be light-emitted.

  At this time, the LEDs on the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 are caused to emit light in a state in which the rear upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side. The body 3440 and the back decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear left decorative body unit in the back-rear left effect unit.

  The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back left rendering unit 3500 includes a transparent back left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back rear left decorative body rotatably supporting the back left rotating decorative body 3510 at the lower end side. It comprises a body unit 3520 and a rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in a rear box 3010 by rotating the upper end of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back left rendering unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 includes a transparent back left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent back left rotary decorative body 3510 penetrates at the center. A rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”); A front cover 3523, which is attached to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 from behind the left decorative substrate 3522 and rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510 a of the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510; And a movable base 3524 whose upper end is rotatably attached to the rear left drive unit 3550.

  Further, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 such that the rotation shaft thereof projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotary shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotation decorative body 3510 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

  The back back left decorative body 3521 of the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is composed of two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back left rotating decorative body 3510, which are stacked one on the other, with the rear petals facing each other. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be located between them. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

  The back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back-rear left decoration 3521 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3510 and the back-back left decorative body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but are rotated left behind and behind. Through the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 disposed behind the back left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The attributes of the front-side electronic component, such as the component number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) On the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, a predetermined paint color is printed by silk printing, and behind the transparent back left rotating decorative body 3510, a transparent back left decorative body 3521, Since the back rear left decorative board 3522 is arranged in order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522 by silk printing is the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back. Rear left rotating decorative body 3510 When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are each made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

  On the surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist solution is applied and formed on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be disposed near the back side electronic component such as a connector on the back side (rear side) of the back back left decorative board 3522. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522, excluding the pads to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that the surface side of a yellow surface against a white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, furthermore, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it has a high reflectance. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back and back left decorative substrate 3522 by a combination of the white resist that has been removed and the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a front view shape has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decoration body 3521 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle upward from the upper left of the rear portion. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion that extends upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an actuating pin 3524b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510 back and forth through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear rear left decoration unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotation on the upper front surface of the unit cover 3553. A rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 mounted such that the shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotary shaft of the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555 and.

  Further, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a, and an elevating cam gear The drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending leftward and rightward, and the first slit 3558a extends leftward and rightward below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b into which is slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for urging the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The rear left rear relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the 3553 and the rear left vertical detection sensor 3562 (lead) mounted on the rear surface of the rear left rear relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lifting cam gear 3557. Type), and.

  A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear rear left relay board 3561 over the entire area except for various connectors, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the rear rear elevation sensor 3562 is soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left relay board 3561, the component number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are located near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear left relay board 3561, the component number of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component May be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. The back rear left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board, and is a board provided in the game board 5 although LEDs are not mounted. When the light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5 by functioning as a board. You can contribute to the production.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520.

  The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

  The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 by the drive pin 3557b penetrating the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left up / down detection sensor 3562 which penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear back left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the rear rear left decoration board 3522, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left up / down drive motor 3554, the rear rear left up / down detection sensor 3562, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Next, the operation of the back rear left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a back-rear left ornamental body 3510 provided with a back-rear left rotating ornament 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in the state of the retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). It should be noted that the part of the rear left and right drive motor 3554 that faces the front is covered by a part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player It is invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in the normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3524b located on the right side of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged by the spring 3559 in a direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the lifting cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear rear left up / down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the up / down cam gear 3557, and the like.

  Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557 to prevent the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3558a is pressed upward while sliding in the first slit 3558a to the right, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, moves upward due to the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operation pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the upward movement of the link member 3558, and reduces the load on the rear rear left up / down drive motor 3554.

  In this way, the rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, whereby the rear-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left up / down drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c). See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force to rotate the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force causes the movable base to move. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the lifting cam gear 3557 does not rotate, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 through the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

  In the state where the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b abuts on the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a by its own weight and the link member 3558 moves downward via the operating pin 3524b, The force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

  In this rear rear left ornamental unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the rear rear left rotational drive motor 3525, the rear rear left rotatable ornament 3510 is moved through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used to reverse the motor gear 3555. When the link member 3558 is rotated by rotating the drive pin 3557b of the ascending / descending cam gear 3557, the link member 3558 can be moved downward. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. The position can be restored.

  Since the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521, as shown in FIG. 183. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear left decoration 3521 which are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 189 is a rear rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-rear right decorative body unit in the rear-rear right effect unit.

  The rear rear right effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the rear box 3010 and in front of the right side of the rear rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear right effect unit 3600 includes a transparent back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear right decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear rotation decoration body 3610 at the lower end side. A body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

  The rear-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 188).

  As shown in FIG. 188 and FIG. 189, the back right decoration unit 3620 includes a transparent back right decoration 3621 through which a shaft 3610a of a transparent back right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center. A back right decoration board 3622 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) provided behind the rear right decoration body 3621; A front cover 3623, which is attached to the back of the right back decorative body 3621 from the back of the right decorative board 3622 and rotatably supports the shaft 3610 a of the back right back decorative body 3610; And a movable base 3624 whose upper end is rotatably attached to the rear right drive unit 3650.

  In addition, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 such that the rotation axis thereof projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

  The back back right decorative body 3621 of the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is composed of two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back right rotating decorative body 3610, and the petals on the back side and the petals on the front side are stacked. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be located between them. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending linearly in random directions. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3610 and the right back decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but are rotated right behind the back. Through the decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 disposed behind the back right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as a component number of a front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decoration board 3622, a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) On the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decoration board 3622, a predetermined paint color is printed by silk printing, and behind the transparent back right rotation decoration 3610, a transparent back right decoration 3621, Since the back right decoration board 3622 is arranged in order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back back right decoration board 3622 by silk printing is the back right decoration body 3621 and the back. Rear right rotation decorative body 3610 When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin.

  On the surface (front surface) of the rear right back decorative board 3622, a white resist solution is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622, a white resist layer made of a solid white resist is applied over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, a region showing the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back electronic component such as a connector, although not shown. And the like (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, excluding the pads to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that the surface side of a yellow surface against a white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, furthermore, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it has a high reflectance. The reflectance of the front (front) surface of the back and right decoration substrate 3622 is determined by the combination of the white resist that has been removed, and the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration body 3621 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle upward from the upper right of the rear portion. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side thereof extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3624b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved back and forth through the rotary gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a for rotatably supporting the rear rear right decoration unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper portion is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652; The rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  The rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right in which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b that extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. Link part that is vertically slidable between and It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for urging the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. Rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear and rear right relay board 3661 attached to the rear surface of the rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657, and a rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 (lead) And a lower base 3663 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

  A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear right rear relay board 3661 over the entire area except for various connectors, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the rear right vertical movement detection sensor 3662 is soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, the component number of the back side electronic component, the back surface, Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side (The type of electronic component may be included in some cases.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. . The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board, and is a board provided in the game board 5 although LEDs are not mounted. Therefore, the front and rear faces of the rear back right relay board 3661 are formed by reflecting plates (reflection). When the light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5 by functioning as a board. You can contribute to the production.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620.

  The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

  The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 by the drive pin 3657b penetrating the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a back rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semi-arcuate shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decoration board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right up / down drive motor 3654, and the back rear right up / down detection sensor 3662, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right decorative body 3610 provided with a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right performance unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the entire front (player side). Since it is invisible.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end of the first slit 3658a in the link member 3658. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3624b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is It is located near the right end of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in a direction in which the link member 3658 moves upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right up / down drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the up / down cam gear 3657 and the like.

  Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right drive motor 3654, the elevator cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevator cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3658a is pressed upward while sliding leftward in the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below the support shaft 3651a and leftward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operation pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 retracts. It rotates in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658 and reduces the load on the rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654.

  In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, whereby the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As it moves upward, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated at a position where the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state (the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide rightward in the first slit 3658a. When the drive pin 3657b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right up / down drive motor 3654 stops and the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops at the same time. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located immediately above the revolution center. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the lifting cam gear 3657 also does not rotate, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

  In addition, even when the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated in the clockwise direction to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a by its own weight and the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, The force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

  In this rear rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), if the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

  When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the back rear right up and down drive motor 3654 is used to set the motor gear 3655 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, the link member 3658 can be moved downward, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620. The position can be restored.

  Since the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be light-emitted. At this time, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear right rotation decoration 3610 and the back rear right decoration 3621 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one rear front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

  The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 such that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 includes, in order from the top, three back front left decorations of a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

  In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back-front left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. -Shaped shutter support member 3712 and the shutter support member 3712 are vertically arranged in a row on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and are supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

  Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided behind the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front left decoration 3713 in the shape of a transparent plate. The front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front left decorative board 3714 from behind. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front of the back rear left effect unit 3500.

  Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front. A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a transmission member 3718 attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open / close the shutter unit 3730 are provided.

  The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape such that the “convex” shape is turned to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion where a metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metal decoration portion 3711a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3711. However, it is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and the molded portion and the front cover are formed. 3711 may be assembled.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a sense of quality, and the front cover 3711 can be made more conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be further emphasized. The metal decorative portion 3711a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and damage the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

  The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface thereof so as to rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 of the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and the support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

  The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left-hand side after protruding in the axis-perpendicular direction from the tip of the left-side shaft portion 3733. And a crank shaft 3734 that extends in a column shape toward one side.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

  Since the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 includes characters, items, logos, and the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The picture is given. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is subjected to lens cutting so as to be able to irregularly refract light (formed in a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 to be arranged are difficult to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the front surface of the back front left decorative body 3713. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed in a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as described later. In this open state, since the back front left decoration body 3713 is transparently formed, the front surface of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 (mounted on the rear side of the back front left decoration body 3713 through the back front left decoration body 3713 The surface) is visible.

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) A back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged behind a transparent back front left decorative body 3713 while being printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by silk printing passes through the back front left decorative body 3713. Is visible. When a certain paint color can be visually recognized with a certain number of LEDs turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic components indicated by the front-side notation part) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 have their packages made of white (a color recognized as the same color as white) resin.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a white resist is applied by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A layer is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the backside electronic component such as the indicated area (in addition, the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, and the model of the backside electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), the solid color with high reflectance is obtained. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is determined by the combination of the white resist that has been removed and the surface-side notation that is printed by silk printing with yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716, which is bent to the right on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion is protruded rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the support pin 3716a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side and a second slider connected to the open / close slider 3720 with a portion into which the support pin 3716a is inserted. The connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the front left production unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, the back front left effect unit 3700 is in a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The shutter 3732 closes the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear left front decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

  In a normal state, the front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the urging force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

  When the front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON) in this normal state, the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

  When the open / close slider 3720 moves downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter shaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is provided. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

  After that, by turning off the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (OFF), the plunger moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring, and by the movement opposite to the above, The open shutter unit 3730 can be returned to the normal closed state.

  As described above, according to the back front left production unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are made to emit light. In this way, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 which is decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, by making a plurality of LEDs of the left front back decoration substrate 3714 emit light, the left front front decorated with light emission is illuminated. The ornamental body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, three back front left decoration unit units, that is, a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. Since the shutter unit 3730 can be independently opened and closed and the light emission decoration can be performed on each of the 3710s, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is one rear front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right performance unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right performance unit in an open state.

  The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right effect unit 3800 has three back front right decorations of a first back front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration body unit 3810C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

  In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. -Shaped shutter support member 3812, and the shutter support member 3812 is vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the left-right direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

  The back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from behind, and is provided behind a transparent flat back right front decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813. The front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and the rear front right decorative board 3814 are covered from behind. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front of the rear right and rear effect unit 3600.

  Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and the transmission plate 3816 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3819 and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open / close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

  The front cover 3811 of the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape formed such that the “convex” shape is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is patterned). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metal decoration portion 3811a having a metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3811, but is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover are formed. 3811 may be assembled.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a sense of quality and the front cover 3811 can be made more conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be further emphasized. The metal decorative portion 3811a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the front right decorative substrate 3814 and damaging the front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

  The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface thereof so as to rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 of the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

  The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3832 that extends in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3833 that extends in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-hand side after protruding from the tip of the right-side shaft portion 3833 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a column shape toward one side.

  The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3833.

  The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate about the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening / closing slider 3820.

  Although not illustrated, the back front right decorative body 3813 includes characters, items, logos, and the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The picture is given. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front right decorative board 3814. The surface of the right front decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear right decoration board 3814 to be arranged are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the back front right decorative body 3813 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the front surface of the back front right decorative body 3813. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed in a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  In an open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the rear right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front as described later. In this open state, the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, so that the surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 disposed behind the back front right decorative body 3813 through the back front right decorative body 3813 (mounting). Surface) can be visually recognized.

  Note that attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a component number of a front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, an area indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) A back-front right decorative board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back-front right decorative body 3813 while being printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-front right decorative board 3814 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by silk printing passes through the back front right decorative body 3813. Is visible. When a certain paint color can be visually recognized with a certain number of LEDs turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic components indicated by the front-side notation part) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 have their packages made of white resin (color recognized as the same color as white).

  On the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, a white resist liquid is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a white resist is applied by solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A layer is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are located near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow resist side white notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), the solid color having a high reflectance is obtained. Of the front (front) surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by a combination of the white resist thus obtained and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectivity. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 that is bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion passes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the support pin 3816a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3820 with a portion into which the support pin 3816a is inserted in between. The connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is a transmission groove into which the crankshaft 3834 is slidable in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state with its plate surface facing forward, The shutter 3832 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front side (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

  In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the urging force of the spring causes the plunger to protrude downward. Further, in the normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the back right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

  When the open / close slider 3820 moves downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted into the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is provided. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

  After that, the back right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger, which has been moving upward, is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and by the movement opposite to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the back front right decoration 3813 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

  Further, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are made to emit light. In this way, the player can see the shutter unit 3830 that is illuminated and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, by illuminating a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back front right that is illuminated is decorated. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, in the back front right production unit 3800, three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened / closed and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back-front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the under-rear-center rotating decorative body of the under-rear-center production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows that the back-rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear right. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the rear right rotation decoration body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows that the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 205 shows the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the rear rear left effect unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the right side middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed. Decorative body 3201, lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and lower back middle rendering unit Back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 of back 3300, front and rear rotating decorative body 3410 and back and upper front decorative body 3421 of back and top rendering unit 3400, front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 and back of front and rear left rendering unit 3700 The front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the right effect unit 3800 can be satisfactorily viewed, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily viewed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the stop 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible to the player.

  Also, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, behind the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper portion thereof projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees this back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 from a diagonally upper position, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen well.

  Further, the back front decorative body 3421 of the back production unit 3400 extends to the left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left side from the center in the left-right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. It can be seen through 2500, and the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen. The back-up / down rotating decorative body unit 3450 having the back-up / back rotating decorative body 3440 of the back-up production unit 3400 is in a state of a retracted position which is behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

  In addition, the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player. Further, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player.

  In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view and are transparent games. The player can visually recognize through the panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the inner side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. In the front view, most of the lower third back front left decoration unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the right part is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

  In the back front left effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second rear front right decorative body unit 3810B on the inner side and the third rear front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The game board 5 is a rear-rear effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700. , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by a back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 is moved. The lock by is released, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. Thereby, the large back-back movable decorative body 3110 that straddles the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player an effect (movable effect) that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

  In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the rear-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the rear-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the normal / reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed to move the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 via the slide guide 3130 to the upper and lower sides of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear rear The movable decorative body 3110 can be paid attention to, and the movement of the rear movable movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

  As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and at the same time, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

  Since the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player by rotating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Soroku", and the number of the number decoration of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "box". It can be thrilling and entertaining for the player. Further, the player can make the player feel as if the expected value is increasing by increasing the "pieces", and can increase the expectation of the game.

  As an effect using the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, the upper effect unit 3400, the rear left effect unit 3500, and the rear right effect unit 3600 in the reverse unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotating decoration 3201, and in the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower right driving motor 3255 rotates the lower back right rotating decoration. Rotate 3251. In the back production unit 3400, the back front rotating drive motor 3425 rotates the back front rotating decorative body 3410, and the back raising / lowering drive motor 3429 moves the back raising / lowering decorative body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500, the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 moves the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the slightly upper right first appearance position, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 drives the rear rear. The counterclockwise rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right up and down drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the slightly upper left first appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotation decorative body 3610 is rotated.

  As a result, the back upper back rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the back right rotating decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the back lower left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, respectively. By rotating the six ornaments, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the game by thinking that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back up / down elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left up / down drive motor 3554, and the back rear right up / down drive motor 3654 are appropriately repeated in the forward / reverse direction to set the back up / down elevating decorative body unit 3450, the back rear left adornment. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

  Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, since the seven ornaments rotate around, it is possible to strongly suggest to the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

  As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510. Also, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right lifting / lowering drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation driving motor 3625 drives the back rear right. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at a position substantially at the height, so that there is something good that surprises the player. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the rear-rear left-handed rotation decoration body 3510 and the rear-rear-right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are the concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). You may make it display the effect image which becomes the position of the eyes of the face of a predetermined character along the (world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the eyes of the character are spinning, and to entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717 in the back front left effect unit 3700. The shutter state 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 changes the shutter unit 3830 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the back front left decoration 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decoration 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 are visible from the player side, and therefore the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back-front left decoration body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back-front right decoration body unit 3810 may be opened and closed individually, respectively. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

Back unit production unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back production unit 3400, back left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back-front left effect unit 3700 and the back-front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all the ornaments may be movable. This allows
By moving all the ornaments, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) will occur, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the advantageous game state. In this case, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 and the rear rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is avoided.

  In the above description, the movement of each ornament is described, but when each ornament is moved, the LED of the decoration substrate provided at the rear is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the player can perform the light emission effect of the ornament. It can be shown and can further attract the player's interest.

  In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the movable effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to achieve various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main operation effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above configuration will be described. In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a on the front side has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area in which a game ball B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is formed into a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 by partitioning it into an impossible non-circulation area, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow area and the inner side becomes the non-flow area, by definition. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503, which is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is extended from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inside). Along with this, since the flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided. Since nothing is extended to the distribution area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided in the above, it is possible to implant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-circulation area (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged to thereby prevent the distribution. It is possible to make the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit more visible, and play and non-distribute area in the distribution area by the game ball B. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the above effects.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inner side) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion is provided by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (abuts on) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by mounting the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B contacts. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501 and giving a player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be made invisible and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided in the rear through the accessory 2500 and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area It is possible to increase the range in which the effect images, movable bodies, decorations, etc., that are provided in the rear of the display area can be made larger, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the effect of the effect by the effect device, and to be provided in the rear of the non-distribution area. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body and the decorative body are large, the pachinko machine 1 is It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion provides light for illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, and transmit light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600), so that the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are flickered. It is possible to make it look lively, improve appearance, and enhance appeal to the player. At this time, a step or a notch may be provided in the transparent support part 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in the movable body (for example, the front left front rendering unit 3700 and the back rear left rendering unit 3500) provided behind the support portion 2503. By the light emission from the light emitting means (LED), the above-described effect is obtained, and the transparent support portion 2503 allows the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

  In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is used as the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is extended with the same thickness as the 1100, and the support unit 2503 is behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further lowered, and a part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the rendering image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Visibility can be improved, and the front left decoration 3030, the effect image, etc. can be made more visible.

  Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is formed in the part of the tip side of the support part 2503 different from the peripheral wall part 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown depending on the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is seen, and it seems that details are taken into consideration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

  Further, since at least a part of the tip end side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and different at that portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

  Further, since the support part 2503 extends from the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion like that, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support portion 2503.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (middle) in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the rear portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficiently increased. It is possible to keep it, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact therewith.

  Furthermore, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped so as to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made invisible by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not attached when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good-looking pachinko inside the game area 5a. The machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the center role object 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-circulation area and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of production by the above.

  Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected more forward than the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and also to easily recognize the circulation area and the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  Further, in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and at a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support part 2503 disturbs the visibility of the rendering device (rendering display device 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen, and it is possible to more easily exert the effect of effect by the effect device, and at the same time, the effect device to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is removed from the mold.

  Further, since the support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is different from the other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in the shrinkage amount from increasing, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a flat-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. , And rear and rear right / left raising / lowering drive motors 3554 and back / right / right producing unit 3600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 as the functional components of the rear / left / left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, the back rear left. The game is played from within the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts within the game area 5a of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back right lift drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending to the outside of the area 5a are provided, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 allow the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back It becomes possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right raising / lowering drive motor 3654, and through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a, from the player's side to the rear rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 and the rear rear. The right lifting drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be suppressed from deteriorating, and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 can be replaced by the front side. By seeing the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040, it is possible to improve the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1. Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game region 5a defined by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, so the outer periphery of the game region 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by looking like, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 and to play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

  In addition, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are arranged to cover at least a portion in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same effects as the above, the functional parts can be made invisible even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

  Furthermore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface, and in front view, the back front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a feeling of openness and playing the game. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. It is possible to enhance the appeal of the player by making it stand out.

  Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being visible, and it looks good by allowing the player to see the back-rear left effect unit 3500 and the back-rear right effect unit 3600 etc. through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in a front view, at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a (in the case of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554). Since it is completely (entirely arranged outside the game area 5a), the front rear member 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are arranged in order to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. Even if the space between them is not increased, the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged, and the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By keeping the balance, it is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in a front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. Therefore, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described operational effects can be provided. Further, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. In that case, The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 and the effect display device 1600, etc. It becomes possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from, and it is possible to make it look as if the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 You can improve the appearance of. Further, although the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided with the opaque decoration seals 3032 and 3042, the bases 3031 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, respectively. Also, since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to reach the front right decoration 3040 and give an impression that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

  Further, since the back left front decoration 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It will be spicy and can look like a piece of decoration. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above without making the back front left decoration 3030 sized so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554. It is possible to make the game area 5a look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. It should be noted that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back-rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back-rear right lift drive motor 3654, but the part is a pachinko machine. It is desirable to set the portion closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, a predetermined location where the drive source is not located outside the game area 5a (such as a lower left portion in FIG. 131, that is, a lower left corner portion of the game board 5) extends from the inside of the gaming area 5a to the outside of the gaming area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be made large.

  Further, the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are configured to extend to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back-front left decoration is inside the door window 101a. It is possible to make the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back right effect unit 3600, etc. behind the 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 invisible, and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the back-front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inside of the door window 101a in the back-rear left-lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back-front left decorative body 3030 is used to lift the back-rear left up and down. Even if the drive motor 3554 is not entirely covered, the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that the back front left decoration body 3030 can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long. It is possible to reduce the cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting opening 2002 in the starting opening unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is made parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, so that the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting opening 2002 is decreased (or the first starting is started). It is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and suppress a decrease in interest, and to surely recognize the position of the first starting opening 2002 that the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting opening 2002, Depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be excited and excited, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the first special lottery result is not drawn. As a result, the player will not be discouraged, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, and entertaining the player with the pachinko machine 1 to lower the excitement. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, the player can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decrease in interest. Moreover, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are emitted. Since the light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Thus, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B accepted in 2001, the game ball B accepted in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning a prize port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special drawing result is performed, the pleasure (superiority) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer period of time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and to keep the game crisp and prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Since it is possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to give the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player. As a result, the game can be kept entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning is achieved. It is possible to omit decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the general winning opening 2001, and by turning that amount to a production device or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back under middle decoration unit 3320 of the back under middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a back under middle rotation that has a plurality of (here, 6) stop positions of even numbers. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop position, and a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of (here, four) sensors including a plurality (here, three) of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 are arranged in the rotating direction. It sequentially increases from the one side and then decreases, and the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 which has six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the area detection pieces 3325 are half the three arranged stop positions. And the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325 at the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detection, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number of "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 make the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it will rotate to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection / non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

  As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 makes it possible to perform the underside middle rotation decoration. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection until the middle-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. It is possible to roughly grasp the current position of the middle-turn ornament 3310.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detecting pieces 3325 of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 are detected. The detection of the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position is roughly detected, and then the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing the shift of the stop position as much as possible.

  Further, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310) that does not give the player any discomfort.

  Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further improved as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front side of the player, and it is freely rotated after rotating. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to the arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (the area specifying sensor 3330 and the position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle effect unit 3300 has the six stop positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310) is shown as a rotating body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As the "circulating", "linearly moving", "arc-shaped moving", "curved moving", etc. may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is accommodated in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, and for explanation, faces the rear face of the board holder 1200 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface opposite to the front side of main control board 1310 (that is, the surface on the rear side) may be referred to as “the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310” on which electronic components are mounted. Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, referred to as a main coating substrate). A green resist layer may be formed simply by “solid green resist”.) A ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built in. The main control MPU which is a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are inputted, and various solenoids are driven. RAM having a main control solenoid drive circuit for performing the operation, and a pressing operation section for completely erasing information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. Includes a A switch, the. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, the attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (further, The front side notation indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). On the other hand, it is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is conspicuous. The RAM clear switch is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second The second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first big winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2402 which detects the game ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2601 which detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B which is received in the out opening 2010 Out-out sensor 3053, first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out 2011, the second sub-out opening The detection signals from the second sub-outlet sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in 012, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively the main control I / O. Input through the port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2415. 2612, or the like, or output a drive signal to the main control I / O port from the function display unit 1400 status indicator, ordinary symbol indicator, ordinary hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special reserved number display The drive signal is output to the container, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number display device, the round display device, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  Further, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The game ball B is frequently detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3051.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out-port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out-port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  In addition, the main control MPU sends various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511, which will be described later in detail.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like is housed in a payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the surface on the side opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 (that is, the surface on the rear side) is the surface of the payout control board 633 on which electronic components are mounted. Mounting surface) ". The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid coating”). A green resist layer is formed, and a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 are performed. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display. At the time of maintenance, the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 is snapped. And discharged to the outside of the handset 1 (upper tray 201), and a, and the ball disconnect switch for starting the sphere unshift operation. On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch, the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the component number of the front side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like (further, The front side notation indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). On the other hand, it is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is conspicuous. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the error release switch.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I / O port as an I / O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM, but also a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch from the input device being input through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cutting detection. Detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port. When detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the payout control MPU transmits a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310, When the release of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on the detection signal from the switch, a main frame release command notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Upon receiving such a command, the main control board 1310 receives predetermined information (a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in a door frame open command for informing that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4). (Information for adjusting) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, or predetermined information (command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to the main body frame opening command that notifies the outer frame 2 of the opening of the main body frame 4). Is added to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command controls, for example, the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode. In addition, based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, either one of the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 or When both are detected, a frame release command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the frame release command and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received the frame opening command controls, for example, the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the player is informed that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, "Count It is an "itch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154) and the number "7" is displayed. Sometimes, it informs that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "CR" is not displayed. Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and is sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the emission control unit 633b includes an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and an oscillation circuit to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
On the peripheral control substrate 1510, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated green resist”). As shown in FIG. 206, a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511 A display control unit 1512.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The light emitting data on the game board side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting to a drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and an operation button lift drive motor 367. Door-side drive light emission configured by side-drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is effected from the display controller serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting it to the display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 operates. Watching for activity.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side speaker provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. Signal, 2.1 ch surround signal, or 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are output by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. We are in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" is such that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

  The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line operation from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when the drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role object 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes “win” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is guided. The plurality of passages 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, the nail N passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522 that opens. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of abutting against the hitting portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 and the strength of not hitting the hitting portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength weaker than a certain degree), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the strength of the drive.

  In this embodiment, the gaming ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the ordinary lottery is "normal win", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting opening 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also commonly called a variable time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the right side middle unit 2700 or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2012, there is no chance of being received in the second special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. .

  Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second large winning opening 2006, the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted into the starting opening 2004 or the first special winning opening 2005, and the material is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, and thus the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received in the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out opening 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. That is, rather than "right hitting" in which the game ball B abuts on the hitting portion 1006, a driving operation that requires a fine adjustment in the rotating operation of the handle 182 can be prompted, and a driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 which is mainly.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing through the left side of the, the central accessory 2500 is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 through the left side of the second special winning opening 2006 is the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the left above. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first special winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and into the game area 5a. Is released.

  Then, while the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “ordinary winning”, and the second starting door is When 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

  Further, while the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 (the first When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit"), the first special winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Then, the game ball B is ready to be received. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B while the first special winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player Can entertain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " Probability Change Short Time Hit "," Probability Change Time Short Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the first big winning. If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is set to 1 for opening / closing once) (Called a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous game state advantageous for the player is generated.

  In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the advantageous game state is ST (special・ Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a state of probable change or shortened time during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back / rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. Lower left rendering unit 3200, lower back right rendering unit 3250, lower back middle rendering unit 3300, back upper rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and the interest of the player in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be operated, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the set board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand by and prevents it from falling. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting member 7 is made of at least one of hard foam resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding the front end. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

  It should be noted that the mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-described ones, but “by inserting the projection into the hole” and “of the nail”. It is also possible to use "by locking", "by magnetizing by magnet", "by hook-and-loop fastener", "by suction cup", "by peelable adhesive material", and the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, and may be "inside", "at least one side surface", "front surface", or the like. .

  This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility and stored at the game hall side. When the pachinko machine 1 is detached from the island facility, the dish is again used. It is attached to the unit 200 for use. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that largely protrude forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the pachinko machine 1 to stand up and prevent it from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the space between the dish unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island facility is set. Since the self-supporting member 7 located at the position can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping. The pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and does not need to be installed.

  Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to tipping over, and it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall or the manufacturer. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

  Further, since the mounting unit for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting unit of the plate unit 200, the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent the device from falling forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decoration member, etc. provided in the door frame 3 larger or to project further forward, so that the conventional pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are largely projected forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has high appeal.

  In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. The frame 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding it in the left-right direction.

  Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) detachably provided on the door frame 3. , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Accordingly, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is operated. Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is removed. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 bulging forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as the functional member that also serves as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then provided on the body frame 4 in a detachable manner (for example, "a substrate cover covering a substrate", "wiring"). "Wiring holding member", "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device and the movable decorative body," "storage tank for storing the game medium", "guidance member for circulating the game medium", etc.) You may make it double. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. I will be able to become independent in the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 to form a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 does not give the player any discomfort.

  When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for the above, and to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Thus, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility to make it stand by itself, by housing the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 makes the pachinko machine 1 look good. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming worse and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand by itself. Thus, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed and separately stored, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the labor for managing the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounted portion is not included. Is also good.

  Further, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be projected downward and brought into contact with the set plate 8 when installed in the island facility. Accordingly, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and labor required for management on the game hall side.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear-side rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative member of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. Is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, , The first and second LEDs 3114a and 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear-facing movable decorative body 3110 of the rear-facing effect unit 3100, on the front side of the rear-facing decorative board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 that constitute the decorative member are arranged and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back decorative board 3114 and the metal decorative board 3114 are provided. Since the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 are located between the decorative body 3111 and the metal decorative part 3111d between the decorative part 3111d and the decorative part 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3111d is reduced to the metal decorative part. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. Further, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration part 3111d is going to discharge to the back decoration board 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the like. Of the flange 3113b projecting rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, bypassing the rear end of the flange 3113b, and flowing into the inside of the flange 3113b (toward the back decoration board 3114). Instead, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114 can be sufficiently obtained by the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

  At this time, since the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined size with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 and the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b It is necessary for the static electricity diverted inward to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 by an amount corresponding to the small size of the back decoration board 3114, and further increase the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. And discharge to the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark). And the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is reliably light-emitting-decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back decoration board 3114 is provided a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c, static electricity is generated from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the copper. Even if it is attempted to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and is discharged to the back decoration board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). Can be suppressed. Accordingly, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114, and the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark) can be prevented. The second LED 3114b can be prevented from being damaged, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decoration body 3111. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of the back-and-back rendering unit 3100 are provided with a decorative body 3111, a decorative sheet 3112, a light guide radiation plate 3113, and a decoration. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114. Further, in the back decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit on both sides of the board body 3114c is used. , The front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with the decoration 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate). 3113a), the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 is covered with a cover plate 3115a of the decoration base 3115, and furthermore, the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is moved from the back decoration board 3114 to the back. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the base member 3115a extends rearward from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115. Since the flange portions 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of 3114 are respectively extended to the front side, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the surface of the decorative body 3111 opposite to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 extends from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. The route of the creepage distance EL to which the static electricity is discharged up to the copper foil 3114d goes to the rear side outside the flange portion 3113b, and is folded back to the inside of the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b. 3113b and the flange portion 3115b to the front side, and at the tip (front end) of the flange portion 3115b, it becomes a meandering route that folds back toward the inside of the flange portion 3115b, and the copper foil of the rear decorative board 3114 from the metal decorative portion 3111d. The creepage distance EL up to 3114d can be made sufficiently long, and That would be discharged to the substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, the plurality of the third mounting parts mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge (spark) can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be replaced with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second The two LEDs 3114b can reliably emit light, and the player can enjoy the light decoration (light emission effect) of the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects.

  In addition, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the projection 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d along the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact. And the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the part of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact, the vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the movement of the back movable decoration 3110 are prevented. Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back decoration board 3114 due to the vibration due to the movement, the copper foil 3114d does not wear or peel off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like is disconnected or the circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d. Thus, the electronic component 3114e and the like can be made to function reliably and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the back decoration board 3114 with the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115, electrostatic discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back decoration board 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be reduced, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 of the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back production unit 3100 emit light, the first LED 3114a turns back from the first LED 3114a. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in which the first LED 3114a is housed. The light enters the main body 3113a from the part where it is present, is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body 3113a, and is radiated from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the And thus to be decorated. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are formed in a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be reduced. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Also, since the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with a portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c where light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated. Since the light receiving portion 3113i of the light guide radiating plate 3113 that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a and emitted forward. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made to emit light more brightly by increasing the amount of light. Then, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e, so that the first LED 3114a is moved forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front surface portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where the light is radiated forward is longer than that in the case of irradiating light toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be diffused widely and emitted forward. Therefore, the whole of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and brightly illuminated, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration in the decorative body 3111 or the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 or the like can be sufficiently exhibited. be able to. As described above, since the dimension (thickness) of the back movable ornament 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to arrange the rear movable ornamental body 3110 at a location where the pachinko machine is not arranged, and the rear movable ornamental body 3110 is arranged at an unexpected location, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113, the first LED 3114a receives The heat can be diffused into the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Also, since a leg 3113f projecting rearward from the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration board 3114, the gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emission of the first LED 3114a becomes unstable or damaged due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, and the first LED 3114a Light emission can be reliably performed as intended, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reliably light-emitting decorated by the first LED 3114a, and light emission by the back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. The decoration (light emission effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g which can reflect the light from the first LED 3114a forward on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection. By the part 3113g, light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing part 3113c in the leg part 3113f is radiated out of the leg part 3113f (main body part 3113a) from the opposite surface, and light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce the amount of light passing through the leg 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved.

  Further, a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for emitting a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) is provided on substantially the entire front and back surfaces of the back decoration board 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is excellent in thermal conductivity, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is not easily accumulated. As a result, the above-described functions and effects can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is depressed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a by not providing the copper foil 3114d is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f that constitutes a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation The amount of protrusion of the leg 3113f to the rear can be increased without widening the gap between the main body 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be obtained. 3113a can be made to enter, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be made brighter. It is possible to light decoration.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is provided, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is adjusted. Since the angle can approach the front surface vertically, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can be made brighter. The same effects as described above can be obtained by performing light emission decoration.

  Further, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed rearward in the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is used. The shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the portion of the shadow becomes darker compared to the case where the reflection projection protrudes forward on the light emitting surface side. Instead, the entire rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  Further, since the light reflection assisting region 3114f of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed more easily than when the substrate main body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting or pressing. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

  Further, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is made to abut within the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg 3113f is made of copper on the back decoration board 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection assisting region 3114f due to vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not drip or peel. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a problem that a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a or the like to emit light is broken or a circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a or the like is caused to emit light without fail. The desired light emission effect can be shown to the player.

  Further, since the white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decoration substrate 3114, the light applied to the front side of the rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the white of the coating film. This makes it possible to brighten the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 to make the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration body 3110) emit light more brightly.

  Further, the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, and the like provided on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 by the white covering film are forwarded through the decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the rear movable movable body 3110, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a flat plate-like shape provided between the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided. Since the light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided with the penetrating first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the bottom of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to increase the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED are inserted. It is possible to diffuse the heat from the 114b. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be hardly accumulated, light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b becomes unstable due to the accumulated heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b Breakage can be reduced, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b allow the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body). 3110) can be reliably light-emitting decorated, and the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) by the back movable movable body 3110 can be enjoyed by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the light guide radiating plate 3113 is arranged such that the first LED 3114a that irradiates light in the direction along the front surface is continuous with the inner surface where the light from the first LED 3114a is illuminated in the first LED housing portion 3113c. The leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114, so that the main body section 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114. Is formed between them, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and to reduce light emission becoming unstable or being damaged. As described above, it is possible to reliably emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be reliably light-emitting decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) by the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. Can be enjoyed by the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the back decoration board 3114, the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the decoration 3111 are provided on the back decoration 3110, moving the back decoration 3110 causes wind to be generated. Since the front and rear sides of the back and back decorative board 3114 can be ventilated to release heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like is less likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the accumulated light causes unstable light emission of the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b or damage the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for emitting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being damaged by the heat from the electronic component 3114e, thereby achieving the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be avoided, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be hardly damaged.

  Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c correspond to the respective light guide radiation plates 3113. By inserting it into the first LED housing portion 3113c or the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be made as close as possible. In addition, the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the decorative body 3111 from the front surface to the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

  In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, the electronic component 3114e can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be prevented from being degraded, and the appearance of the back movable movable body 3110 can be improved and the decorative effect can be sufficiently exhibited. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metals) that surround the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100, respectively. On the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), the first LED 3114a is mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 interposed therebetween, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is visually recognized from the front to the rear. Since it is formed to be difficult to perform, the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion can be accommodated from the front (player side). By seeing the portion 3113c, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (back movable movable decorative body 3110) is impaired and the appearance becomes poor. It is possible to avoid Ukoto, decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be reliably exhibited, the reduction of interest to delight decoration decorative body 3111 the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the ornamental body 3111, even if the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be seen through the ornamental body 3111, Since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is along the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 from being impaired in decorativeness, and to prevent the decorative body 3111 from having a bad appearance. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit the same effects as described above.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d), the metal decorative portion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first LED 3114a is provided with the light guide radiating plate 3113. In order to irradiate light into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and to radiate light in the direction along the front surface, which is illuminated inside by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a, forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused as widely as possible in a region behind the third decorative projection 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward. A wide range of the decorative projection 3111c can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the metal decorative portion 31 in the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated. The third decorative projection 3111c surrounded by 1d can be made more prominent, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be further exhibited, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110). In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide / radiation plate 3113. Can be reduced. For this reason, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be light-emission-decorated evenly, so that the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111, and the game is interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is illuminated and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed. Since the leg 3113f projecting rearward is provided at a position where the light from the LED 3114a is irradiated, the area of the portion (light receiving portion 3113i) to which the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated by the leg 3113f is widened. Therefore, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, since the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted more forward by the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be brightly illuminated. This makes it possible to show a light-emitting decoration having a higher effect to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d and penetrating in the front-rear direction. In addition, the brightness of the light emitting decoration can be made different between the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portion 3111d). More specifically, when light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, A part of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, a part of the light is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Is reflected, and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when light in the main body 3113a is going to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED housing section 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side emits light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing section 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes darker, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and darker than the first LED housing part 3113c. Both sides become brighter. Since the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, the first LED 3114a appropriately emits light, so that the first LED 3114a is separated from the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to make only one side brighter, only the other side brighter, or both sides brighter, so that a variety of luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and lowering interest. Can be suppressed.

  Since each of the plurality of third decoration protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decoration portion 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a), the first decoration protrusion 3111a is provided between the third decoration protrusions 3111c. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide / radiation plate 3113, which is located behind the relevant portion, receives light from the first LED 3114a for causing the other third decorative protrusion 3111c to emit light. Since it can be made difficult, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be illuminated and decorated in a good state. Accordingly, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c can be illuminated and decorated in a predetermined order, or the special third decorative protrusion 3111c can be illuminated and decorated to suggest a predetermined message to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of light emission effects to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the game.

  In addition, when the second LED 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is made to emit light, the light directly passes through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3113 and directly to the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112). Since the light is emitted, the portion of the ornamental body 3111 to which the light from the second LED 3114b is emitted can be illuminated with dots in a brighter manner than the portion illuminated with the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since the part that is decoratively illuminated by the first LED 3114a and the part that is decoratively illuminated by the second LED 3114b can be shown to the player, the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the effect of the luminous decoration can be enhanced, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c can be hardly seen from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be obtained. Even if the size (thickness) of is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Therefore, the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear rear movable board 3114 in the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the rear rear movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the 3110 can be increased.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the rear effect unit 3100, the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decorative projection. Three decorative projections each having a curved front surface, including a second decorative projection 3111b projecting smaller than the projection 3111a, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting smaller than the second decorative projection 3111b. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by foil pressing in the portion, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since the single decorative body 3111 has the metal decorative portion 3111d and the transparent portion (translucent decorative portion), the structure is such that the metal decorative portion and the transparent decorative portion can be assembled as in the conventional case. There is no need, and since there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, it is possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in a portion that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the decorative body 3111 is arranged in an unexpected part, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing, and appeal to the player can be made. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

  In addition, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion is formed following the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light in the pachinko machine 1 and the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d is made to glitter. In addition to being able to shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration portion 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration portion 3111d having a three-dimensional effect imparts a sense of quality (premium feeling) to the player. Interest can be strongly attracted.

  When the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, a portion having different metallic luster in the front-rear direction can be seen in the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can more easily attract the interest of the player.

  In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different forward protrusion amounts, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration of the decorative body 3111 by three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts. Thereby, a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player, so that even if the thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the decoration 3111 is reduced, the decoration effect is not reduced, and the decoration 3111 is not reduced. Can be reduced in the front-rear direction, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decorative body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of performing the above-described operations can be provided.

  In addition, the metal decoration 3111d is provided on the first decoration projection 3111a, which protrudes most forward in the decoration projection of the decorative body 3111. Since the metal decoration 3111d has the most forward projection, the metal decoration 3111d is provided. The portion 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent drop between the metal decoration portion 3111d and a portion other than the metal decoration portion 3111d can be made to appear large, so that the decoration of the decoration 3111 can be given a more three-dimensional effect. Can be. Therefore, even if the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, a three-dimensional decoration can be shown. Therefore, the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. The pachinko machine 1 which can be played can be easily realized.

  Further, as described above, since the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced (thickness can be reduced) and the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased, the effect member can be provided on the front side or the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player by providing a large number of effect members, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b and the third decoration protrusion 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d, project forward. Due to the lens effect, the sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear side, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decorative effect. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a sheet, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. From this, it is possible to provide an effect member (the back movable decorative body 3110) including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a small thickness in the front-rear direction, and the pachinko machine having the same operation and effect as described above. It can be 1.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the decorative sheet 3112. It can be reduced that the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be seen through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be hardly seen by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has a poor appearance. Can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first decorative portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b allow the first decorative protrusion 3112b. The player can be illusioned as if the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in the front view, the metal decoration portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. 3111d can be seen widely. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to show a decoration with a higher decorative effect to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's attention. Can be provided.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is deposited. In addition, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the hot stamping device for foil-pressing the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided with a flat hot plate having elasticity, the hot plate contacts the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a of the decoration 3111. Upon contact, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to have a shape following the front surface of the curved first decorative projection 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is moved to the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Can be transferred (foil-pressed) in a favorable state so as to be in close contact with the substrate. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil pressing using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, whereby the transfer sheet is pulled. Wrinkles are less likely to occur, and the metal foil can be transferred cleanly without wrinkles, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d can have a good appearance.

  Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative projection 3111a is different, the transfer sheet can be transferred without replacing the hot plate. Can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 has elasticity, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative projection. The amount (depth) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to be immersed in the hot plate can be varied according to the strength of pressing against the hot plate 3111a. Can be widened or narrowed. That is, the range in which the decorative body 3111 (the decorative protrusion protruding forward) is foil-pressed can be freely changed. Thus, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or a design change, the range of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

  Further, as described above, the elastically pressed surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the hot stamping is performed on the decorative body 3111 (the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like). When the metal decoration 3111d is also provided on the decoration 3111b, the color of the metal decoration 3111d can be made different between the first decoration 3111a and the second decoration 3111b. More specifically, in the conventional technique, when it is attempted to form a metal decorative portion of a different color on one member (decorative body), for example, after a metal layer of the first color is formed on the entire surface, a masking treatment is performed. By forming a metal layer of the second color on the entire surface and removing the masking, the color can be made different between the masked portion and the unmasked portion. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a metal layer of the second color is formed thereon, and a part of the metal layer of the second color is separated by laser peeling or the like, The color can be made different between the part that has been separated and the part that has not been separated. However, the use of any of the above-described techniques requires time and effort to manufacture the decorative body, and causes a problem of increased cost. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is foil-pressed. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to sink into the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is transferred to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then use a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the second color to immerse only the first decorative protrusion 3111a without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. As described above, the hot plate is moved to transfer the metal foil of the second color onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Thereby, the metal decoration part 3111d of a different color can be easily formed by the 1st decoration protrusion 3111a and the 2nd decoration protrusion 3111b, an increase in cost can be suppressed and the decorativeness is more excellent. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player, since the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the decorative body 3111.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil pressing, the metal foil is left unremoved in a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is left using laser peeling. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusions 3111a on the front surface, the focal length of the laser depends on the position of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a position separated (or approached) from the focal length by a predetermined distance or more, and there is a possibility that the peeling remains and the appearance deteriorates. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at a necessary portion by foil pressing, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after the foil pressing to form a transparent portion, and the appearance is good. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

  In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be placed at the standby position (evacuation position) invisible from the player side. Position) and the back movable ornamental body 3110 movable between the appearance position visible from the player side, and by moving the back movable ornament body 3110 to the appearance position, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided. The appearance of the movable backside decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111), which has high decorativeness, makes it possible for the player to think that there is something good, and makes the player expect the game. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 of the back-and-back performance unit 3100, the flat-plate-shaped light guide radiation plate is added to the flat-plate-shaped decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface. 3113 and the rear back decoration substrate 3114 are provided, and the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer circumference of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 The route of the creepage distance EL goes rearward on the outside of the flange portion 3113b, and a flange is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b. It turns back to the inside of 3113b, goes forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and becomes a meandering route that turns back to the inside of the flange portion 3115b at the front end of the flange portion 3115b. The creepage distance EL to the decorative substrate 3114 can be sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or a distance capable of blocking discharge voltage of at least 10 kV). At this time, a decoration body 3111 having a metal decoration part 3111d on the front surface, a back decoration board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and a second LED 3114b for light-emitting decoration of the decoration body 3111 are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the back decorative board 3114 is provided on the back movable decorative body 3110 where static electricity is likely to be generated by moving in the vertical direction, the back movable decorative body 3110 The static electricity is easily accumulated, and when the static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at a stretch because of high conductivity, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are increased by increasing the discharge voltage. However, as described above, the back decoration board 311 may be moved from the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since it is possible to make the creepage distance EL to be sufficiently long, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114, and By preventing damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the decorative substrate 3114, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be surely light-emitted and decorated. The person can enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-back movable decorative body 3110), and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, in the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable movable body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward so as to form a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114 is reduced by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be made longer and can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, since the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. At the same time, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decoration base 3115 from being discharged to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like of the rear decorative board 3114 due to discharge of static electricity.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern in the back decoration board 3114 is prevented from abutting on the light guide radiation plate 3113 (the leg 3113f thereof) by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the metal decoration section is used. The creeping distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 can be lengthened as much as possible, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, friction does not occur between the leg 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear and break the circuit. It is possible to prevent a problem that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be illuminated and decorated to reliably exhibit a desired effect.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 includes a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, a high-grade feeling can be given by the brightness of the metal of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the second decoration projection can be provided by the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. To provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110) can be made to stand out by illuminating and decorating the portion 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly. Can be.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward in a predetermined decorative shape, a three-dimensional effect is given to the metal decorative portion 3111d. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, further enhance the sense of quality by the metal decorative portion 3111d, and can strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral portion of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is doubly surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, the outer peripheral portion of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is flanged. It can be hidden by 3113b and the flange portion 3115b so as not to be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 for diffusing light is provided in the rear movable movable body 3110, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused, and Can be applied to the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, so that the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the luminous decoration, and to further enhance the effect of the luminous effect of the back movable ornamental body 3110, to thereby delight the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 which diffuses light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates the light forward, A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be illuminated and decorated. It can be made more difficult for the player to see, and the luminous decoration of the flange portion 3113b can also enhance the appearance of the luminous decoration of the rear movable ornamental body 3110, thereby making the player entertain and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

  The same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable decorative body 3170, and the back movable decorative body 3180.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the rear-rear production unit 3100, transparent light guide radiation is provided behind the decoration member including the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be housed therein. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a flows from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 within the plate thickness. Irradiating in the direction along, and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflectors 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light properties (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are to be luminously decorated.

  At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body is formed. Since 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are configured to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is irradiated with light toward the front. It is possible to increase the distance until the light is emitted forward, and to diffuse the light from the first LED 3114a widely and emit it forward from the light guide emission plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the light is emitted in a dot shape. The seat 3112 can be uniformly illuminated to make it look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, since the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat plate-shaped decoration members (the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-back direction is thin. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, and to arrange other effect members (a back and front rotating decoration body 3410, a back and rear rotating decoration body 3440, etc.). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining by providing various effect members.

  Further, the decorative member (movable rear decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are included, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decorative portion 3150, and the embossed portion is embossed. A depth effect can be added to the design of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decoration portion 3150) can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the ornamental body 3111 and the pattern of the ornamental sheet 3112, so that the thickness of the back and rear movable ornamental body 3110 ( The decorative effect does not deteriorate even if the size (in the front-rear direction) is reduced, and it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 thinner. It is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

  Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having the relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since 3112 is provided, it is possible to make the decorative body 3111 appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost for the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration portion 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  In addition, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed due to the interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided. Of the first contour portion 3112a, such as light from the first pachinko machine 1, light from other LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of light by hitting the portion of, the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration portion 3150, attracting the player's attention, and hologram. By this, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, and to make the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 thin. And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by the hologram, the hologram includes the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, it is possible to give a feeling of depth to a pattern such as a hologram due to the lens effect of the embossed portion, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. The possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the hologram portion is provided on the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, in the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is made flat so that the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110. In addition to being able to do it, the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112 or the like) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exerted, and the back-and-back movable decoration body can be exhibited. By the decoration of 3110, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be provided.

  Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (abutted against) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that the light between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 becomes light. Does not diffusely reflect, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exerted. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible, so It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 and embodying the above-described effects.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111) by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by setting the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the game, and it is possible to give the player a visual impact and draw attention, and it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed from the rear side, the first LED housing of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made as close as possible, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 can be front and rear. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, the first LED 3114a of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide / radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is radiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the site and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the site can be made to emit light brightly, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be uniformly decorated with light emission.

  Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of the side-view type, the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide / radiation plate 3113 only needs to house the first LED 3114a to emit light. Light can be emitted from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

  In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide / radiation plate 3113, light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily deal with the change in the decoration of the ornamental body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

  In addition, also in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 and the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170, the same effect as the above can be produced.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and to a gaming machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown. Not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be a single decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

  Note that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a receiving area (a general winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening (a variable starting opening, a large starting opening, a large winning opening) capable of receiving a game medium in a game area into which the game medium is driven by a player's operation. Winning prize opening, role winning prize opening), V winning prize opening, etc.), and when a game medium is received in the reception, a privilege (payout of the game medium, opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player. And so on, so that the player can enjoy the operation of driving the game medium so that the player can receive the game medium into a desired reception slot. ing. As a gaming machine of this type, a decorative member in which a metal plate is provided on the surface and a notch that penetrates forward and backward is closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and extends forward through the lens portion And a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the radiance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decoration member (lens portion) can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion formed by metal plating on the surface as in the technology of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decorative portion has high conductivity at the site of the metal decorative portion. As a result, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at a stretch, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the metal-plated decorative member, the metal plate and the decorative substrate are as close as possible. Static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate, and a spark may be generated. Therefore, a spark (discharge) is generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, so that the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decoration member. As a result, the player cannot be entertained, and there is a fear that the interest of the player may be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main frame and game board 5]
Next, an electrical connection method between the main frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector capable of automatically electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 only by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. The game board side relay board is provided with the game board side drawer connector (convex type), and the main body frame side drawer board (concave type) is provided at the predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game on the game board 5. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 are electrically connected.

  For example, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 will be described. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin and has a rectangular opening on the front side. In addition, a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction is provided, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped main body DCNa, and has a shape that is formed in the letter T as a whole. I have.

  Around the opening portion DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 of the game board 5 is provided over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening portion DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are respectively formed. The game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 is provided in the central portion (1 location) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa and the left and right portions (1 location on the left portion and 1 location on the right portion) of the inner upper surface. The (convex type) is prevented from being turned over in the vertical direction different from the regular orientation and inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is Left and right positions of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when inserted in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN A groove DCNaab is provided in the box-shaped main body DCNa so as to prevent the displacement and enhance the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5. It is formed toward the front near the Naa to the bottom surface of the box-like body DCNA.

  On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, the pin-type terminals PN are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). .) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

  Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) in the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba, first, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. The rivets (not shown) are respectively inserted from the front side of the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the ends are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface). Thus, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

  In addition, when the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) on the back surface of the base body DCNb, the body frame side drawer is mounted on the body frame side relay board. A columnar protrusion DCNbb is formed so as to be mounted in the correct orientation of the connector (concave type) DCN.

  The main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. An inline package type small-sized connector is mounted and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type). (Type) and each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are electrically connected to each other through a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) (not shown). 5, a control signal line for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in the main frame 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 is formed.

  The main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main body frame 4 and supplies various powers from the power board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) for supplying to various boards provided in the game board 5, and another one is shown separately from the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side. A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ which is not provided is provided on a body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown) separate from the body frame side relay board KB. The body frame side relay board KB 'is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '. A small type connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative board, various sensors, and the like provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, another game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '(not shown) of the body frame 4, and each terminal of another game board side drawer connector (convex type) and a body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Concave type) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of DCN ', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) not shown, and a door Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 are formed. The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown is the same as the structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN', and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown. The method of fixing the drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (not shown) is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (not shown) using a rivet. I have.

  Also, a method of fixing the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 to a game board side relay board (not shown). Another game board-side relay board (not shown) of another game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ' (This is different from a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted.) The fixing method to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (the fixing method using rivets).

  Body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) by using rivets. Although the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by attaching the main body frame 4 to the frame 4, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the drawer side of the game board 5 of the game board 5 is attached. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force causes a pin type in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The purpose is to prevent the terminals PN of (3) from peeling off the soldered surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). The case where the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is fixed to the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) using bolts and nuts, and the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side are illustrated. When the game board 5 is fixed to the game board side relay board not to be mounted, there is a disadvantage that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main body frame 4.

  In the present embodiment, the pin type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, but if the bellows type using terminals and contacts is used, the following problems occur. For example, when each terminal of the drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 of the game board 5 is a terminal and each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 of the body frame 4 is a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, a contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows at various power supply line contacts) is welded. Becomes When the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state to be mounted, the contact of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is bent and broken, and the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 The problem that the contact is peeled off from the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN when it is removed from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

  In addition, if the terminal and the contact are welded, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. The problem of having to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using a pin-type terminal as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. That is, even if the worker accidentally mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 with the pachinko machine 1 powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing the welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, prevention of solder short-circuit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the small connector. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “beta land”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawing. Also, in FIG. 209, the arrow shown by the solid line shows the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line shows the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder bath.

  As described above, in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4. (Recessed type) A small DIP type connector electrically connected to DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small-sized connector are pin types arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same horizontal line in the body frame side relay board KB. And the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), the small connector of the DIP type is in the vertical direction on the main frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type The terminals arranged in two rows of the small connectors are arranged so as to be rotated by 90 degrees with the terminals PN arranged in two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for small connectors). .

  When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted through a through-hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH1”), and the cylindrical projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with a positioning hole. The mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN are inserted through the KBb and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. End is fixed is caulked on the rear surface (the solder surface) KBy of inserted in the body frame side relay board KB Re respectively. When the DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a through hole KTH2 having a land. (Hereinafter, simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

  When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the drawer connector becomes a two-stage vertically and a first stage from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when the DIP type small connector is placed in the predetermined position for the small connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, there are 6 stages in the vertical direction, and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in one row, two terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row at the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row at the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. Becomes

  In the main frame side relay board KB, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx, and the small DIP type connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, the terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame and the terminals of the small connector of the DIP type protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath to relay each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to each land KTH1. It is possible to solder to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, and to solder each terminal of the DIP type small connector and each land KTH2 to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. You can

  The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from the bottom of the second row of six terminals PN, which is the second stage from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The direction is toward the first row of six terminals PN in the first row, and the first row is from the bottom of the sixth row of two terminals in the sixth row from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward two terminals in the first row. In other words, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the last row, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the final stage terminals.

  When the back surface (solder surface) of the board flows into the solder bath, the solder bath is arranged in a state where pin-type ones are aligned, such as terminals of a drawer connector (concave type) DCN or a small DIP type connector on the body frame side. When flowing to the terminal, there is a possibility that a solder bridge may be generated along the flowing direction, and in particular, a solder bridge is generated between the terminal at the final stage and the terminal at the stage before the terminal. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal at the last stage.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the last row. Each land KTH1 is connected to a solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape having a rectangular shape which is long in the vertical direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row). The lands KTH1 and the respective solder relief patterns KNP1 are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB (so that each of the lands KTH1 is electrically connected to each other).

  In the DIP type small connector, as described above, since the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the last row, each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row, The solder escape patterns KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH2 are connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern of the two terminals in the first row). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other) on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB.

  As described above, by forming the solder escape pattern on the terminal of the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the solder bridge at the terminal of the final stage and to contribute to the prevention of solder short-circuit. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines at the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (measures 1 by silk printing), A method in which horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the boundaries of the lands of the terminals adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction and the solder escape pattern (measures 2 by silk printing). A method of surrounding the land and the solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by printing and painting out the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be cited.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of printing horizontal lines on the resist by silk printing at the boundaries of the respective steps (measure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN and the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the horizontal line KSH1 is seen from the resist surface and the vertical wall like a mountain range. Will be in a continuous state. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over the horizontal line KSH1 over a vertical wall like a mountain range. From the second row to the second row of six terminals PN and lands KTH1 and the first row from the bottom to the first row of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 at the boundary of a horizontal line KSH1 When the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, a force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth column serving as the eye, and the fourth column from the bottom is formed. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of the third frame and the two terminals of the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, Two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and two terminals, which are the second row from the bottom A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two rows of the two terminals and the two rows of the second row of the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the first terminal and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. That is, since the horizontal line KSH2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Are connected. Thus, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a vertical wall such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH2. , A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, the fifth row which is the fifth row from the bottom. A solder separating force is exerted by the solder remaining on the resist due to the wall, so that solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals vertically adjacent to each other. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the fifth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and the fourth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, and a fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the second terminal and the land KTH2 in the third row from the third row and the third terminal from the third row in the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the first row of two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the first row from the bottom, also has the sixth row of two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and 5 steps Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, the solder separating force due to the solder trying to stay on the resist by the vertical wall such as a mountain line of the horizontal line KSH2 increases the solder separation force. By working, solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals and the land KTH2 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist, and vertical lines are formed on the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction. A method of printing on each boundary (measure 2 by silk printing) will be described. The countermeasure 2 by the silk printing is different from the countermeasure 1 by the silk printing described above in that a vertical line is further printed by the silk printing on the land of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent in the left-right direction. Therefore, description of the measure 1 by silk printing is omitted.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), as shown in FIG. Of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row that are the second row from the bottom, each terminal PN and land KTH1 that are adjacent in the left-right direction, The vertical line KSV1 is printed on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. That is, since the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing, the vertical lines KSV1 look like mountains when viewed from the resist surface. Vertical walls are connected. Thus, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder can flow on the resist and flow along the vertical wall KSV1 such as a vertical wall such as a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV1 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV1. As a result, a solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction.

  In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by the silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), as shown in FIG. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction from the two terminals in one row and the land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom to the two terminals in the sixth row and the land KTH2. A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing on the boundary between the escape pattern KNP2 and the escape pattern KNP2. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and flow along the vertical line KSV2 along the vertical wall like a mountain range. The solder that flows on the vertical wall such as the mountain range called the vertical line KSV2 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the mountain range such as the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary. As a result, a force that separates the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals and the lands KTH2 that are adjacent in the left-right direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 that is adjacent in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of surrounding the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure on the resist by silk printing and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, and, among the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 Is printed so as to fill the area excluding. In other words, of the area KSA1 in which each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are surrounded by a silk print on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, each land KTH1 and each land KTH1 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled out, when viewing each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP1 is a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and solder is applied to each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called silk printed area KSA1. When flowing, the force that separates the solder acts by trying not to get over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 that is a depressed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1 and trying to stay. As a result, the terminals PN and the lands KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other and the solder escapes that are horizontally adjacent to each other A turn KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (f), each terminal of the small DIP connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the small DIP connector is inserted and each solder escape pattern KNP2, and a main frame side relay board KB. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular shape by silk printing, and an area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 among the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape is painted out. Print. In other words, in the area KSA2 in which each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a silk print on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KBy, each land KTH2 and each land KTH2 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be painted out, when viewing each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, it is necessary for the solder to flow over the resist and to flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2 can be suppressed, and the solder is formed on each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When flowing, the solder is separated from the land KTH2, which is a depressed area, and the solder printed pattern KNP2, and the solder is separated from the small plateau, which is a silk-printed area KSA2. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, the solder escape patterns KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, It is possible to suppress the Oite solder bridge respectively.

  The connector on which measures 1 to 3 are applied by silk printing as described above has a silk printed portion that is extremely conspicuous compared to a connector on which measures 1 to 3 are not applied by silk printing. When performing an operation of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can quickly turn his / her gaze because it is a mark as to where to look on the substrate.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, when the substrate is caused to flow into the solder bath, measures 1 to 3 described above by silk printing are performed to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and to prevent solder short-circuiting. Measures 1 to 3 can also be used as markers indicating which connectors are directly soldered to the board by the operator.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, the above-described measure 3 by silk printing is applied, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (c). In the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, the area KSA2 enclosed in the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (f) prevents the occurrence of solder bridges to prevent solder short circuit. Instead of the rectangular shape, the area surrounded by other shapes may prevent the occurrence of solder bridges to prevent solder short circuit. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (c) and a diagram (b) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (f). Note that the same reference numerals in FIG. 210 denote the same components as in FIG. 209. In FIG. 210, the arrow indicated by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate flows into the solder bath, and the arrow indicated by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a shape that is about three times larger than the respective shapes of the lands KTH1 and the respective solders in the region KSA1 'surrounded by this shape. Printing is performed so as to fill the area excluding the escape pattern KNP1. Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 'is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 '. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which are depressed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows through the lands KTH1 and the solder relief patterns KNP1, which are depressed areas, the solder is separated without trying to stay over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 '. By the action of the force, each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and adjacent in the horizontal direction A field relief pattern KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  In addition, in each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the land KTH2 into which each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the respective solder escape patterns KNP2 The shape is approximately three times larger and is surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2 ′ surrounded by this shape. Area to be printed. Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 'is a small plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau, which is a silk-printed area KSA2 '. The amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2', When the solder flows, the solder is separated from the land KTH2 and the solder relief pattern KNP2, which are depressed areas, by the solder trying to stay on a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2 '. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KN adjacent in the horizontal direction 2, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, but are separated by a predetermined distance. Alternatively, it may be formed. FIG. 211 is a view showing a modification in which the terminal at the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed with a predetermined distance therebetween.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH1 into which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted is long in the vertical direction. The solder escape pattern KNP1 ′ having a rectangular shape whose width is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (which may have a square shape whose one side is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance ( For example, it is formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. Good. This solder escape pattern KNP1 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, but is insulated.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. A solder escape pattern KNP2 ′ having a rectangular shape (a side may have a square shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, 分 の of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB at a distance of one half from the length). This solder escape pattern KNP2 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, but is insulated.

  Further, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211B, a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical direction. And a solder relief pattern KNP1 ″ having a semi-circular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1 and a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1. And may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1 '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the width in the left-right direction are the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ having a rectangular shape and a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 May have a shape) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) apart from the back surface of the main body frame-side relay board KB. (Solder surface) Each may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. The solder escape pattern KNP2 '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (c), the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1 '' 'having a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1 (a square shape having one side equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1). And may have a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Alternatively, they may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The solder escape pattern KNP1 '' '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. Solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ ′ having a rectangular shape and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the outer diameter of land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2) May be separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 "" is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the other side that is not provided may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211C).

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed line arrow in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (c)) is determined in advance. If the substrate can be flowed in the opposite direction to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, when the substrate can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), measures 1 to 3 described above by silk printing are performed. Alternatively, the occurrence of solder bridges may be prevented to prevent solder short circuit. In this case, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the last stage is inserted depending on the direction of the flow. Note that the shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal in the final stage is a semicircular shape (see a semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (a triangular shape in FIG. 211C). See also). Further, the terminal at the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the board flows into the solder bath. Further, when it is not known from which direction the board should flow when designing the board, the solder escape patterns described above are formed in both directions so that the flow may be carried out from either direction.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is disposed on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the terminals of the components are soldered by flowing various substrates into a solder bath, but a short circuit due to solder occurs due to the formation of a solder bridge at adjacent terminals. was there.

[Prevention of peeling due to over-resist]
Next, prevention of peeling by over-resist will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described first, and the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of the over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the body frame side, and is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In some of FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "beta land") are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the body frame side]
The over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described. As shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and (b), a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter simply referred to as a “land”) is used. KTH1 ”may be described.) Means that a through hole is formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are determined. The outer diameter is KTHD1, which is the same size.

  Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr, the surface (mounting surface) side A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, the back surface (solder surface) is formed. In a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front side (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KBrD1 of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByrD have the same size. The board ground (GND) (that is, the tag land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, beta land) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) by a through hole (not shown).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having the shape of the land KTH1 is formed, the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. This allows the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 to be covered with the resist on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the load from multiple directions on the land KTH1. Can be uniform.

  In the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KBra is formed, an over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1 is applied. Have been. As a result, since it is possible to cover the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 with the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, a high peeling strength is applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. Can be uniform.

  Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. And soldering are stronger.

  By the way, when the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. This is because although the drawer connector is used, the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4. When the frame-shaped drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is attached to the frame 4, a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is for preventing a pin-type terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from being peeled off by a large force on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB.

  However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, so that the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the body. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back side (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is peeled off from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. Or you may.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB, the land KTH1 is further over-resisted and copper By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector is used, so that the drawer connector (concave type) DCN for the body frame side by attaching and detaching the game board 5 is provided. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB is used as the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from peeling off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There.

  The outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied includes a region where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land where the over resist is not applied. This is because when the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Is to be equal to or larger than the bonding area when soldered to a land where no over resist is applied. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 to which the over resist is applied can be made equal to or higher than the bonding strength to the land to which the over resist is not applied.

  Also, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, even if the over-resist is not applied, a land having a normal size outer diameter, and if the over-resist is applied, It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage, and if the designer mistakenly arranges a land to be over-resisted on a land to be over-resisted, a terminal There is a problem that the bonding between the metal and the land is insufficient and solder failure may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over-resist, for a substrate (for example, the main body frame side relay substrate KB) on which at least one land to which the over-resist is applied exists, all lands are applied. The same land as the land on which the over-resist is applied is arranged as the land on which the over-resist is not applied. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land is sufficient and the occurrence of solder failure can be reliably prevented.

  A land board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is also mounted. Is applied with the above-described over-resist. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown is provided separately from the main body frame side relay board KB'. The main frame side relay board KB '(not shown) is also provided with the above-mentioned over-resist on the land. Further, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (other game board drawer connectors (convex type) Another game board side relay board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is mounted. Also, the over-resist is applied to the land.

  In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are determined. The outer diameter KTHD1 is the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1, but is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KBrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByr are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByrD1 may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front side) resist opening KBxrD1.

[Modification]
Note that, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resist, with respect to the substrate (for example, the main frame side relay substrate KB) in which at least one land is over-resisted, Then, the same land as the land to be over-resisted is arranged as a land not to be over-resisted, but when not over-resisted, a land having an outer diameter of a normal size (that is, over-resisted The land having a normal size outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the existing land KTH1 may be arranged. In other words, lands to which over-resist is applied and lands having a normal outer diameter when no over-resist is applied may be mixed. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, when the over-resist is not applied, the land having the outer diameter of the normal size and the over-resist are applied. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than a normal size outer diameter at the board design stage.

[Over-resist on the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector]
213 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 214 (c) and (d) show the over resist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC. As described above, each of the terminals (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered to the pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape, various wiring patterns respectively connected to each pad KSP, Both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC, and are vertically long rectangles. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby forming each pad KSP and each pad KSP. Various wiring pattern connected with the de KSP, each casing fastener pad KSPF are formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed of a non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left and right) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

  Each of the pads KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each of the pads KSP are formed on a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a tag land) by removing a copper foil from a copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) Is insulated without being electrically connected. On the other hand, the four corners of each casing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each casing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each casing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a beta land) via a cross-shaped pattern is provided. By this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are fixed to respective housing fixing pads of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When soldering to the KSPF, heat for melting the solder can be prevented from being taken from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. It should be noted that both sides of the housing of the housing of the connector KCN of the surface mount type (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are fixed to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering, the surface mount type connector KCN can be more securely fixed to the board KC as compared with a case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. The two sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) of the substrate KC, and are surface mounted. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect on signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

  Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed by applying a resist liquid on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr Of these, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed in a region corresponding to each pad KSP, and a region corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. On the other hand, a front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for a housing fixing pad having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. On the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

  The substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KCxra for the case fixing pad having a shape is formed, the case fixing pad goes from the rectangular outer periphery of the case fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the case fixing pad KSPF. An over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. Thereby, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each casing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each casing fixing pad KSPF. Can be uniform for loads from

  Although the front and back surfaces of the substrate KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are compared with the bonding between the substrate KCo and the copper foil surface. The bonding between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, for example, boards such as a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 can be cited. Various wirings and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the board such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used for removing dust and cigarette dust accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, performing various inspections, and the like. After being removed by a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall, the connection is made again after the operation. However, clerks such as clerks in a game hall performing such operations are often unfamiliar with the handling of boards, when removing various wires and harnesses from connectors, and when connecting various wires and harnesses to connectors. In some cases, with brute force (ie, with excessive force).

  Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. When the board is mounted on the board KC and a staff member of a game hall or the like performs the above-described operation, a force generated when the harness is inserted into or removed from the surface-mounted connector KCN is applied to the surface-mounted connector KCN. Because of this large force, the both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) by this large force are the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the base material KCo, and accordingly, the surface (mounting surface) KC of the substrate KC is removed. Peeled off the pad KSP from substrate KCo formed of a copper foil surface KCxp, there are cases where various wiring patterns formed on copper foil surface KCxp is peeled off from the substrate KCo with each pad KSP.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel off from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if a force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC does not peel off from the substrate fixing member KSPF. Various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp can be reliably prevented from peeling off from the base material KCo together with the respective pads KSP. Going on.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the above-described over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector to which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the board such as the control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, the various decorative boards, the various relays The above-described over-resist may be applied to the case fixing pads of the substrate such as the substrate and various driving substrates, or the substrate may be provided on a movable body that operates by driving an electric driving source. When a load is applied to the movable body substrate by wiring or a harness that is electrically connected to the movable body substrate due to the movement of the body, The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate of the movable body on which the mounting type connector is mounted, or various switches having a pressing operation part and the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) In the case of the surface mount type that is mounted on the board, the above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing various switches, or some external force may be applied to the board. In this case, the above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the pads of the substrate to which various terminals of lead type or surface mount type electronic parts such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, ICs are soldered. .

  In the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr has the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the housing fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the casing fixing pad KSPF is covered with the resist is applied. However, the over-resist is not applied to the casing fixing pad KSPF, and a through hole having a land around the casing fixing pad KSPF. May be formed, and an over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface-mount type connector according to the modification is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. is there. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of a portion B in FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). Note that, in FIGS. 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “Betland”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  A description will be given of a modified example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF without applying the over-resist to the housing fixing pad KSPF and the over-resist is applied to each land. FIG. As shown in (b), and FIGS. 216 (c) and (d), a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered is used. Pads KSP, various wiring patterns respectively connected to the pads KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided respectively on the left and right sides) on the surface of the substrate KC ( A housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction, which is soldered and fixed to the mounting surface), and a plurality of through holes having lands. The CTAG (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KCTH”), the wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the tag land is a surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp, each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each land land connection wiring pattern are formed. . Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC have the same size. The wiring pattern for solid land connection which connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid land also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  With respect to the right casing fixing pad KSPF, three lands CKTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the casing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the left housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed by applying a resist liquid on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In a region corresponding to the land KCTH, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. A resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, but the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In the present modification, the opening diameter of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KCxra and the rear surface (solder surface) side resist opening portion KCyra have the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is provided in a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the (3) side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH is applied. In the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr has a back surface (solder surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH to the center of the land KCTH. Thereby, the over-resist is applied to each land KCTH, and the peel strength can be increased so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel from the base material KCo.

  As described above, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the right case fixing pad KSPF. And the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above. It is arranged so that it may be adjacent to the left of. As a result, even if the casing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, the respective lands KCTH are over-resisted. Therefore, the casing fixing pad KSPF and the respective lands KCTH have the above-described solid land connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if the force accompanying the insertion / extraction of the harness to / from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When the casing fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off is attempted to be peeled from the base material KCo, the peeling strength by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. This makes it difficult for the case fixing pad KSPF to be separated from the base material KCo.

  In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be increased or decreased. In the present modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

  Further, in this modification, the right housing fixing pad KSPF includes two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, in the right housing fixing pad KSPF. And two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the up-down direction on the left casing fixing pad KSPF, as described above. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is disposed adjacent to the left side of the left housing fixing pad KSPF, but instead or together with the right housing fixing pad KSPF, two lands are provided at regular intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which the KCTH is arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent above and / or below the right housing fixing pad KSPF, or may be arranged on the left housing fixing pad KSPF along the vertical direction. Two at equal intervals Column 2 rows command KCTH is arranged, it may be arranged so as to be adjacent to the upper or / and lower left casing fastener pad KSPF.

  By the way, conventionally, various types such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, an image control board for controlling display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, various game machines such as the game machine described in this document are proposed. The connector provided on the board receives a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring.For example, when a person unfamiliar with the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector with excessive force, However, there is a problem that the copper foil of the substrate is peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 217 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of the various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are connected to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510. , But are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover 1501 having an open rear and a box shape longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the rendering based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is connected to the main body, and a base body 1502 that closes an opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and an opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by a base body 1502. Thus, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
Peripheral data capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about ⅔ when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the upper right of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected to each other. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground is provided. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. There is.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed on the lower side and the right side to project rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above the center of the cover flat plate 1501a as viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center points are the centers of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a predetermined cylindrical shape is inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are respectively formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501aaa in the shape of a circular arc, it is possible to prevent illegal acts in which various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are illegally taken out from the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa to be mounted, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) having a seat (an integral shape of the pan head and the flat washer) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and the model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawing-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is provided with connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control switch attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The position corresponding to the connector 1510d is a closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting switch 1510d, respectively. Has been formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right area of the cover flat plate 1501a when viewed from the front. For this reason, as measures against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated vertically are formed so as not to interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and project forward with a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is positioned along the lower side thereof at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular regions (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac are formed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 become connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. From each other.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. Compared to the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae. It is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined cylindrical height that is inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protrusion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is provided at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed respectively.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear side. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring flat opening 1501ae is closed, and a flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the touch panel) from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outward in the vertical direction at predetermined center intervals. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda that project toward the front are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is closely arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four attachment boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thus, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to project outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At a position to be formed, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520 rf 1 to 1520 rf 4, and soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520 y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed, respectively. The wiring patterns of 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. ) And mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2, respectively, and land 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The seat surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Of the peripheral control board 1510 by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to a circular surface is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4, and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. The lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal The seat surface of the pan head screw made of steel is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thus, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the cover 1501 is grounded. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is disposed inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Is formed.

  Ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion, thereby performing peripheral control. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 provide clearances. A gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 while being formed. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, the above-described gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven formed on the cover body 1501) are taken. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The above-described gap (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And the gaps formed in the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, when air is taken in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of them can be kept small.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan can be suppressed to a small value, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the air is sucked through the wings by the rotation to rotate around the periphery. To send air to control IC 1510a It may be. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Base body]
A base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing polycarbonate and carbon, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontally-long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front thereof. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to protrude toward the front (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, when the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When is fitted, it becomes inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is spaced apart from the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side (that is, the peripheral control board The terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control board 1510 warps due to the force when a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 is inserted into a position where the peripheral control board 1510 does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals because the terminal protrudes from the terminal 1510y. Vertically elongated disconnection that prevents the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected Stop rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 are formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the left side base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge engaging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502cac and 1502cad. It is capable of engaging.

  A base-side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 in the center of the right side base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (the functions of various ROMs) ), And a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of a game effect (demonstration performed while waiting for a player), and various schedule data that defines the progress of the effect Control to store in advance OM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various types of control information (peripheral data); A backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors Is provided with a N1~CN7, the. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

  The control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. The various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding one of the connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicates via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame using SPI communication and I2C communication. The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, and communicates via a connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, and the game board 5 side For a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side, light emission data for the LED control IC is provided. Or receives signals from various sensors (communicating via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 as detection data, and receives various signals (connectors) provided on the door frame 3 side. Communicating via the N3. The signals from) and receives as the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from an air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of an air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1) or provided on the game board 5 side. The signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or the control signals for the unillustrated controlled object provided on the game board 5 side are transmitted from the GPIO (connector CN6 Output) or a signal from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as SPI communication and a connector in which GPIO coexists), and connector CN7 is SPI communication. Has been assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and has realized a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be transferred at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories), and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  A special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board are further provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 by a plurality of types of video signal systems. The plural types of video signal systems include, for example, the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In the above, four systems (a total of four systems), that is, one system for RGB system, two systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. It should be noted that instead of the MIPI system, for example, the eDP system is adopted, and the RGB system has one system, the LVDS system has two systems (the first LVDS system and the second LVDS system), and the eDP system has one system. It is also possible to create 1510.

  The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , Is provided. Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The LED ML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where DC + 5V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +37 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +37 V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being turned on.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The special connectors SCN4 provided are connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted together, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided in the 1530x are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is pushed in. Are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. A floating mechanism is provided which can absorb an error in the front-rear direction generated when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range (in the direction between the back and front of the machine 1). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and fixed. In the above, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of 1501a.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket and the plug are pushed together. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-back direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. (In the direction between the back and front of the camera), a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range is provided. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the cover.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the control target of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (a peripheral data ROM 1520a (function of the image ROM of the above-described effect display control unit 1512, etc.). Including.). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a character image, a pattern image and the like, various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 In the door frame 3 and the game board 5, light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs and the like that are mounted on the door frame 3, the game board 5, and the like. Examples thereof include drive data for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is cheaper than the NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  Thus, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via the wiring (harness) between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. However, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, together with the peripheral control board 1510, need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction caused when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. By using the plug and To prevent damage to the connection terminals formed in a plurality of numbers in a preparative, can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the plug and socket are connected, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 progresses the game effect (for example, for a player). Image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that informs that the big hit gaming state does not occur, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important board on which images such as an image indicating that the user is approaching or a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state for a player) are displayed as images. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness), but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not connected. By adopting a structure in which the board 1510 and the board 1510 are electrically connected to each other, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. The liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface). After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface) 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, it is possible to absorb an error in the front-rear direction caused when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. In the plug and socket To prevent breakage of the connection terminals the number formed can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely provided. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface ( The mounting surface 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 face the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are positioned on the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. Inserted into the formed mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2, and inserted through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. That. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in 1.

  Next, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of the same and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is constrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions, while the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting boss protruding portions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side thereof for restraining the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is reduced by the peripheral control board 1510. When fixed to the back side of the 1501a, the dimensional dimensions provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. This is because it can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda are formed on the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state in which the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1502 and the base body 1502 is directly covered with the cover body 1501, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of a metal (not shown). The metal one-way screw into which the anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to form the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the base body 1502 is formed. The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in FIG. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by observing the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 form a metal pan screw (not shown). And screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix the game panel.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 at the above-described predetermined position (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back), the surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) Socket of special connector SCN3 provided for 1520x The connector of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the board 1510 and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the mounting surface 1510x and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is packed on the left side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back. (It is arranged.). Also in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time of pushing in, a plug and a socket are formed. It is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in plural from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, and at the same time, to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral. It is possible to reliably form the transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards having different game specifications, which are mounted on the pachinko machine. In this embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used commonly regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. By storing the peripheral data corresponding to, the board depends on the game specification of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the inter-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As the system of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are plural types of systems such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (for example, the first LVDS system system). Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (LVDS system) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter referred to as a “peripheral control board board made of conductive resin”). There is a case to be described as anti-noise effect "by box 1505). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated filters for removing such noises on various substrates, which can contribute to cost reduction of various substrates.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 by air, and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angle in multiple directions. In order to be able to check the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the control ROM 1510b, they are arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thus, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. Can be contributed to.

  Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to be confirmed. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) In addition, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, So that you can see They are arranged distributed and so that the large area almost can check the condition of the surface and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM1520a from time. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is performed in a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +37 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a function provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, although having a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 also have a spotlight function of illuminating the board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN3. ) Special connector for 1520x And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the SCN 3.

  Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). It is arranged so as to be distributed. Accordingly, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be achieved by changing a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having the same. In addition, the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 keeps the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, and therefore, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 illuminate the board-to-board connector brightly. By having a function as a spotlight, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be visually recognized as an inter-board connector. Contributes to improving It has to be able to bet.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with a product number printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the states of the IC pins and the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed from multiple angles. Each of them is distributed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thus, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. And the state of the IC pins can be improved.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

  In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mount type LEDs having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and weak directivity types. It is suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By illuminating the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination, it is possible to illuminate the space thus formed brightly.

  Further, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 are emitted to the area of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which respectively face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Reflecting portions (not shown) for reflecting the reflected light and directing it again to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. These reflection portions (not shown) may be glossy color paints in addition to bright color paints such as white, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged beside the game board 5, so that a ball path constituted by these is provided. In this case, the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may be affected by noise as a noise source. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. Accordingly, noise that enters through the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. The noise can be removed by flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 or the like.

[Some foil strip of Beta Grand]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a ground (GND) other than a region where a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. , A so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. The ground (GND) is used as a ground (GND) other than the area where various land patterns are formed, and is formed as a so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”). The land land (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the land land (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are the peripheral control substrate. Holes (copper) penetrating through holes (both surfaces (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of a plurality of through holes (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1510 The same ground (GND) is obtained by being electrically connected by the (plated holes)).

  Further, as described above, the base plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, which protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) and does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals (at a position that does not interfere with these protruding terminals). It is possible to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 from breaking due to the control substrate 1510 being warped. Elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 in the vertical direction are formed respectively.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed state (surface contact). The front surface of 1502aa3 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. You can do it.

  By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A solid land was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and the solid land was covered with the resist. In the noise resistance test, the peripheral control at the contacted portion was performed. The bottom surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 is covered with a resist by forming a solid land, and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at the contacted portion is covered with the resist without forming the solid ground. It was found that the noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion was covered with a resist without forming a solid land. .

  When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surfaces of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic noise enters through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to the electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection ribs. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portion of the peripheral control board 1510 that is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, malfunction or damage may occur.

  In addition, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with any of the disconnection preventing rib portions on the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is impossible to predict whether or not the electronic component will penetrate, it is difficult to place an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component at a distance from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

  It should be noted that high voltage is applied to a portion of the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. In order to enter the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta gluant are in contact with each other through the resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic noise that has invaded the base body 1502 is applied to this abutting part. As a result, it is considered that unnecessary loop wiring is formed in which electromagnetic wave noise penetrates from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid surface.

  Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at a portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid land in the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. FIG. 3A is a schematic view of the copper foil surface of FIG.

  As described above, the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a vertically long rectangular foil-cutting area 1510ya having a horizontal distance dimension dgw and a vertical distance dimension dgh, and a copper foil surface. 1510 yp. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the solid grass is removed (removed) is formed.

  The distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0 as the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

  In addition, in these foil stripping regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0, which is the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the horizontal direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the foil removal area 1510ya is formed on the copper foil face 1510yp on which the tag land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the tag land, It is an insulated area.

  When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510ya to form the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil-cut region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. Note that a beta land is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. No foil removal region of the same shape is formed at all.

  As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and are connected to the same ground (GND). GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is subjected to peripheral control from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal area 1510ya. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed that cannot enter the beta land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board, and the noise that has entered the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 is described above. By forming a “route through which noise passes” flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan screw, noise can be removed.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specification of the game board, and does not depend on a method of a video signal input to the effect display device 1600. , So it can be reused (reused).

  As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular soldering copper foil (so-called " Lands) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (the seat surface of the head) are in contact with each other.

  In this manner, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removing with a metal pan screw. The boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control substrate 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Peripheral control board 151 rubs against the seat surface of the screw pan (head seat surface) Of the peripheral control board 1510, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed. If so, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510 due to oxidation and deterioration of electrical connectivity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the front surfaces. Each is soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition to being connected so as to be connectable, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are electrically connected. Covered to be connectable. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. Land 1 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of peripheral control board 1510 The copper foil portions of 10rb1 to 1510rb4 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized, and are formed on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The electrical connection in the state where the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) can be improved, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the viscosity of the solder. The electrical connection in a state where the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side are in contact with the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw can be improved.

  Thus, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transferred to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via a metal pan screw. ), The above-mentioned “route through which noise is removed” is reliably formed, so that the noise control effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be stably maintained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are set as described above. , The surface of the copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws as described above, and thus are soldered to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity deteriorates. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform in thickness (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised) unless the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil as the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is uniform. The contact area between the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. If the thickness of the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, The control board 1510 may be distorted, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the seat surface of the metal pan screw contacts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness of the solder applied to the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. Can be. Further, copper which is a surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on a surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed on the metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It is applied from a hole, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put into a reflow furnace and the solder paste is dried by heat, so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is reduced. The thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same surface. Although the copper foil was soldered so as not to be exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (head surface). The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side, and which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf on 1510x side The copper foil is a surface of the may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. You. Even with such a configuration, a metal pan screw is inserted into the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, so that the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal to 1510r4 and screwing it toward mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (such as a spatula). The solder paste is applied from a hole formed in the metal mask and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste by heat. ) May be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is caused to flow into the solder bath.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil, which is a surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. (A shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or in a resist pattern) 221 may have a shape in which a plurality of horizontal lines having a predetermined width are formed a predetermined distance apart from each other.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. Although not shown, a shape in which a plurality of lines inclined upward to the right are formed in oblique lines (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines descending to the right is formed in oblique lines) is not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screw by bringing into contact with each of the metal pan head screw and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 The cover 1501 is electrically connected, and the cover 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. Cover 1501 '. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of a metal instead of being made of a conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

  An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes large power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier substrate is housed in a metal substrate box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier substrate and the heat of the amplifier substrate itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal substrate box. When the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

  The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, like the above-described peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other), the plurality of amplifier boards are formed on the amplifier board. The lands and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box are in contact with each other. When a plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other, the metal lands through the metal pan screw. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box is in a state of being electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal Part case and amplifier board ground and (GND) can be a state of being electrically connected. Further, the heat of the amplifier substrate itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier substrate to the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box via a metal pan screw to efficiently radiate heat to the outside air. You can also.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. it can. For example, a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) of the parent substrate, a plurality of lands of the child substrate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) of the child substrate, and a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are formed. And the plurality of lands of the child board are screwed at both ends of the metal support (spacer), respectively, so that electricity is transmitted through the plurality of lands of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). Connected state. Thus, the ground (GND) of the parent substrate and the ground (GND) of the child substrate can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the conductive resin-made peripheral control board box 1505. However, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are housed. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 need to be transparent according to the rules, and a conductive resin box is used. Although it is not possible, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box while being configured of a conductive resin for the board box that houses the power supply board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. You may make it fix by the same method. By doing so, the same effect as the noise suppression effect by the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be exerted on the board box that houses the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that house the various relay boards. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the fifth gaming panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special board connector including a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By disposing it near the center of 552, the tank rail 553 So that the can be placed apart al. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with a metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed on a lower side thereof (a lower side of a rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Can be dropped. Therefore, by arranging the above-described inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-described inter-board connector can be prevented. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector including the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). With the 1500 attached, as shown in FIG. 217, the upper area of the inter-board connector can be made smaller by arranging it in the vertical direction, so that dust, powder of some metallic property, etc. The area of adhesion can be minimized. In addition, when the above-described inter-board connector is arranged to be long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres extremely increases. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. And the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased, but as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac The protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a prevents the plug from being protruded from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a even when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, so that the plugs are hidden. Dust or some kind of gold attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a. Even powder or the like having a sex may fall from the cover side wall 1501b, thereby making it possible to prevent from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 includes the plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes the socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug) correspondingly. For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data is not transferred. The ROM board 1520 serves as the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) serving as a plug, and correspondingly, when the peripheral control board 1510 serves as a socket, a special connector (or a plug) is formed. Can be provided with a special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) that becomes a plug, and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug) becomes available. A special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one of the 1501e except the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) is dropped and invaded into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter is electrically dropped by the foreign matter. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this case, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is, as described above, if the ventilation holes 1501az are temporarily formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation holes 1501az are formed through the ventilation holes 1501az. A foreign substance (for example, a metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops into the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto the various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles due to foreign matter will occur.

[Other noise measures by peripheral control unit]
As described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate and carbon. When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) by metal pan-head screws, Since it is configured so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the various substrates and become the same ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 can be removed from the various substrates. To the ground (GND) to eliminate noise. It has become so that (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which a noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box capable of removing noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter, “the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments” This will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. Note that in FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of various members given in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. The description is omitted except for a part of the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is, as described above, all of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box, In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is provided in the peripheral control board box. Not content.

  222 to 226 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and Part of the shield plate is in contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an X of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X, and FIG. 226 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

  FIGS. 227 to 230 show the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, which further enhances the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. FIG. 227 shows a configuration in which an area of the back surface (solder surface) such as 1510 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further contact via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 228 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view, and FIG. 230 shows a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate and a lug on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate for improving the contact between the conductive elastic member and the ground. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a method of taking out a solder (GND), and is a schematic view of a copper foil surface on a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (an exposed example (a)); Stripping example (b)), schematic view of copper foil surface on back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic view of back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate It is a figure (example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

  FIGS. 231 to 235 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a first metal shield plate. A back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate. FIG. 231 shows a configuration in which a part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to ground (GND) such as the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 232 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a perspective view of a peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment. Diagram showing installation procedure FIG. 234 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and a diagram (b) showing a foil removal region. 235 is a diagram showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a land and a screw designation symbol (b). FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating a foil removal region. In FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and in FIG. The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate which can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for easy viewing of the drawing.

  236 to 241 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are made of metal shield plates. Among various substrates that are not covered at all and are accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box, a region in which a part of the ground (GND) of the specific substrate is exposed and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are connected via the conductive elastic member. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. The figure which shows a part of rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment (a), a part of the base body which comprises a peripheral control unit is shown so that the state in which the electroconductive elastic member was inserted can be seen. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a), and FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238 and a conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a diagram (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that a state of being pressed against the back cover and deformed can be seen, and FIG. FIG. 241 is an enlarged front view of a cover body that constitutes a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a connector can be inserted and contacted, and FIG. 241 shows a back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board and a conductive material. It is a figure which shows the extraction method of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board | substrate which makes good contact with an elastic member, The schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board ( Stripping (A)), a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (a through hole having a land). It is an example (c) of a plurality of arrangements, and a schematic diagram of an underside (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) of an arrangement of a plurality of through holes having lands).

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates and configured to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, a box shape having an opening at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction is used. A cover 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and a peripheral control that can control the progress of the effect based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520; And a metal that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 A shield plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the metal shield plate 1540, and a base body formed of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes an opening of the cover body 1501. 1502. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, whereby a peripheral control substrate box 1505 (sealed substrate box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. So that Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the metal shield. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match with the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. In addition to being in contact with each other, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is mounted. When sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. A gap (2.3 mm) having the following is formed.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two formed in the cover 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced.

[Base of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, at an L-shaped circuit connection piece. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab which is longer in the vertical direction and has a shape slightly larger than the back surface of the 1540d is formed.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The metal shield plate 1540, which can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. L-shaped bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of the shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

  When viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (the second embodiment). In this example, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 21 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around the shield flat plate 1540a so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, respectively, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawing recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without coming into contact with the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel to each other. In the second embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. One of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed as described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 is projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. 2 of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that are formed by protruding.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this In the second embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having (in the second embodiment, 12 mm) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described below and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) is configured.

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, not shown) Capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (eg, a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, and the like) are housed in the second space 1505b, while various electronic components and the like are housed at all. No. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against the noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing various electronic components and the like that generate heat. . That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 has ventilation holes 1540az of the same shape formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade portion. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 to cover the cover. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating portion 1545a. A foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated with the conductive coating 1545a and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating 1545a are included. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven cloth on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by the peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  Note that the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross section (having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm) (see FIG. 226), and has a conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly method of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Then, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b1a formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is placed so that it fits into the hole 1501ah2 and is made of metal. A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in 1.

  Next, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is removed. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the mounting plate holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. The body 1501 and various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is constrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions, while the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting boss protruding portions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side thereof for restraining the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such constraint is covered by the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are respectively provided with dimensional dimensions. It is possible to absorb it with a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda are formed on the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502, and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d is put on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Inserted metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to form the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. Has a distance dimension (projection length) of 2.7 mm over the back surface.

  In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by observing the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (adhered).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, which is the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is located on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And a transparent pan made of synthetic resin by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that constitutes a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above) having non-conductivity. The effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, the same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 226d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. Since the same ground (GND) can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510, the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. When fixed, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Connected to each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are transmitted to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. A "route through which noise passes" can be formed, which is guided to ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The part number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (eg, IC orientation, part number). , The pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple angles. In order to make it possible to distribute the control ROM 1510b in a larger area than that of the control ROM 1510b, It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the status of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from the angles in multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relation with, the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector is modified by the special connector SCN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the silk-screened content on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so that the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 with the special connector SCN4. Improving the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improving the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In order to be able to check the state of the IC pins and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 from the angles of the multiple directions, the IC pins are dispersed so that the areas are larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the alterations of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. You can Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state when the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC + 12V is being supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades forming the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN, the clearance between the blades (specifically, the clearance between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type LEDML1 having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type is adopted, so that it is used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (in the second embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. . As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the second embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 1.6 mm). As described above, various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the first space 1505a. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a glossiness and is a region on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which has gloss and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, it also has a function as a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 to the surrounding area and redirect the light to the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that these reflective parts may further apply glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is disposed, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities of the game hall in the opposite direction. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is very susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is fixed to the cover body 1501 and the various boards. A configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates by being sandwiched and fixed. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to ground (GND) of various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the second embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the surface between the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. The two spaces correspond to the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shell. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a shield plate of the metal shield plate 1540 A second space 1505b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) between the front surface of the cover 1540a and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large-scale production unit (electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, When the distance dimension has a margin, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and to take measures against the electromagnetic wave noise. The heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing various electronic components that generate heat in the first space 1505a. Can be.

  In the second embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Visually check the part number and model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data RO The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the silk-printing on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. (E.g., the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 of FIG. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the connector between the boards (special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the board of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the connector between the board and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, or a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. At the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is rotated by this rotation. By being blown out toward the outside, air is stored from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 into the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in via a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, it is possible to suppress the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to be small. Although it is possible, FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A line may be formed in which a plurality of lines in the lateral direction having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance dimension.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates and configured to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. The structure in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the device and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via the conductive elastic member is adopted.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, each side of the shield plate 1540a is moved backward. The side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they are spaced apart with a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm), they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. Since the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, Detailed description is omitted.

[Base of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
The base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. A conductive material for a substrate capable of contacting a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az having a square (a shape having both a vertical distance dimension and a horizontal distance dimension of about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed to protrude forward and rearward of the base plate 1502a, the front end face of each insertion port 1502az has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. Are formed so as to have a predetermined distance (for example, 1.5 mm) so as not to be in contact with the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is made of a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be disposed on the same plane as the back surface of the 1540 L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  There are seven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to the regions ROP. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base plate 1502a at a position corresponding to the region ROP. There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions. That is, a total of 11 regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The base plate 1502a is provided with a total of eleven insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. In addition, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back side of the base plate 1502a and near each of the insertion openings 1502az. The serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the manufacturer's worker inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board. As described above, since the base body 1502 is molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 1502a. The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the above-described second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive Elastic Member for Substrate of Peripheral Control Substrate Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board box further includes a peripheral device. A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507 that can be electrically connected is provided. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a rectangular foam 1507b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1507a. , Is composed of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1507b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

  The board conductive elastic member 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the board conductive elastic member 1507 in FIG. 228 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the board conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az and the board conductive elastic member 1507 has a cushioning property (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is difficult to be removed from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, a description will be given of a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. Regions ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b), a region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is formed such that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, beta tag land) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board. A resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

  It is also possible to employ a method of using through holes without exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and 230 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through-holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and the copper is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 so that lands are formed around the through-holes. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1510yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board will be described. Before the worker of the manufacturer attaches the peripheral control unit 1500 to the attachment portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. Then, the serial number 1 to the serial number 11 are inserted in order from the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, and the peripheral elastic control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and A work is performed to bring the rear surface (solder surface) of the various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. The same ground (GND) is formed by connecting the same to.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 229, hits the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND).

  In addition, the conductivity for each substrate, one of which is in contact with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, etc. The other of the elastic elastic members 1507 passes through through-holes (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 229. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is increased. A dimensional deviation due to an assembly error or the like can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507. As a result, the state in which the external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the board conductive elastic member 1507 is maintained, and as a repulsive force, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. , And a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metallic back cover of the performance display device 1600, To maintain the state of good electrical connection, and to connect the ground (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. GND) and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected to each other, and the peripheral control unit 1500 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Ground, such as a substrate 1510 (GND) line and is electrically connected, it can be the same ground (GND). Therefore, in addition to the metal shield plate 1540, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is further reduced. It is possible to form a “route through which noise is removed” that is guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates (GND)) via the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 and removed. Thus, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic noise), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are also used. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed, but comes into contact with the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The mounting surfaces (bosses) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a are soldered to copper foils, which are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the surface (mounting surface) The copper foil is a surface 510x side of the land 1510rf1~1510rf4 may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. You. Even with this configuration, a metal pan head screw is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via the metal pan head screw. It can be in a state. Also, copper which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thicknesses of the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the base plate 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is rotated by the rotation of the blade portion. By being blown out toward the outside, air is stored from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 into the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 at the time of taking in via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540. Although it is possible, FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Also, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part thereof with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed into a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are annularly arranged as the center, and as shown in FIG. 221 (c), the resist has a vertical length. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the direction and lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed, A plurality of lateral lines having a predetermined width may be formed so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension.), As shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line having a predetermined width of the resist is a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are spaced upward and to the right are formed in an oblique line shape (a line in which a resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines in a downward right direction are formed in an oblique line shape) is illustrated. Although not included, a shape in which small circular shapes are aggregated can be cited.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In addition, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. The metal back cover and the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates and configured to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A cover 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and a peripheral control that can control the progress of the effect based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520; And noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be reduced (suppressed). Attachment (adhesion) to a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the various substrates to be cut and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 (adhesion) The conductive elastic member 1545 and various substrates capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A metal backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the backside (solder side) side, and a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 Have. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface. A peripheral control board box formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached at a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the peripheral control board box cover body 1502 according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board box cover body 1502 according to the first embodiment. Are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4, respectively, and on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 that are formed are respectively formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to the real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from a holder (not shown) is also provided. In order to prevent the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) from being cut off, a protrusion preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e. This is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Note that the end face of the protrusion prevention unit 1501aw is arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm) from the backup power supply 1510e.

  Further, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the rear surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral A metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into the through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various boards such as the data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are fixed on the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment by being screwed into the mounting boss hole formed in the. When mounting various boards such as 1530, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1 20 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and other various through holes, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into a specific through hole and screwed into a mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. After performing the first fixing method of fixing by the above, the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is covered with a metal board back surface (solder surface). Each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is excluded except for specific through holes in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Of the through holes of the base plate 1502a by covering the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. Inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are passed through other through holes in various boards, and are screwed into mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. 2 Perform the fixing method.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the penetrating holes formed on the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The hole 1540c2a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to be aligned with the periphery. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. 1540b1a is arrange | positioned so that it may match with the attachment boss hole 1501ah2 formed in the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, peripheral control is performed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw.

  Then, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb4 of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw. Becomes In addition, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby making the metal board. The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal. To the ground (GND) of the output board 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to attach the cover plate 1501a on the back surface side. By screwing toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby making the metal shield. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the same ground (GND) line is provided. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the peripheral control board 1510 has the ground (GND) and the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. .

  After the first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid-crystal output board 1530, and the like, which will be described later, are made of metal so as to cover the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the substrates. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate are respectively provided with various parts such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the through holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as the corresponding through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate. To fit the cover 1501 A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which will be described later, formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the mouth with the base body 1502, and the back surface of the metal board (solder). Through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the (surface) side shield plate 1555, and specific substrates in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r2 and 15 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided as through holes other than the through holes. Fixed by screwing respectively 0r3 to mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through respectively.

  By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are made of metal. The board is sandwiched by the front surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In this state, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) The L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 The be continued. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Thus, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so that the power supply It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield The surface of the plate 1555 and the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the same ground is provided. Since it is (GND), the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and thus the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. And to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

  Also, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate The surface of the 1555 L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 comes into contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal-made substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  In addition, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. Is pressed into contact with the front side of the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 of the substrate. As a result, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

  Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two formed in the cover 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. , Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) which is housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 at the time of taking in via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the (surface) side shield plate 1540. You can do it.

[Base of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
At the front side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are provided at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 each having a thickness of 1502ag6 to 1502ag6. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in, and the base 1502 is fixed to the cover body 1501.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance between the upper left center and the lower left center of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent backward by only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed.

  When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a predetermined distance above the right side and below the right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: L-shaped circuit that is bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around the shield flat plate 1540a so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, respectively, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawing recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring leading recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a are placed in the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It is inserted without contact.

  The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. In addition, the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 and the surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

  In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Is a space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed.

  These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the fourth embodiment, a first space having 12 mm) and a second predetermined height distance between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

  In the first space, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, a resistor not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN3 etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, and the like) are accommodated, whereas the second space does not accommodate various electronic components at all. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against the noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. By not storing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is for efficient communication. That is, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at a position corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade portion. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 to cover the cover. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

  In addition, noise entering the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501 respectively. As a measure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed. These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they are spaced apart with a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm), they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

  Further, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a cylindrical protrusion preventing portion 1501aw formed to protrude from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502. Is formed.

[Metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is formed of an upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). On the sides, L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent backward by a predetermined distance (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are formed, respectively. These L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed by bending so that their surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

  Notch portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed in shield plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502, respectively. Further, on the shield flat plate 1555a, among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, a mounting boss 1502af4 that contacts the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, Notches 1555aa5 are formed so as not to interfere with the mounting bosses 1502af5 that come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, in order to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a, the electric power other than the ground (GND) in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (bonded) to prevent a short circuit due to a physical connection. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a has no side wall 1540ae formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and no ventilation hole 1540az.

  In the lower region of the notch 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, it is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is an area where the conductive elastic member 1545 is pressed (adhered) and is brought into contact with it.

  In a state in which a metallic substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, By arranging a metallic backside (solder side) shield plate 1555 near the back side (solder side) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, Various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is removed from the various substrate from the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, whereby the various substrates can be efficiently cooled. In other words, the metal backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  It should be noted that when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface side of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the surface of the base flat plate 1502 a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity). The conductive covering portion 1545a, a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. As the foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by the peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross-section having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm. The conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , The height of which is approximately 0.035 mm.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Then, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is required. The through-hole 1540c1a formed on the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is provided. The through-hole 1540c2a formed on the bottom surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed. A through hole 1540b1a formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is formed. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501am1.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 233, by a first fixing method, a metal pan (not shown) directly from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A screw is inserted and screwed into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to fix the cover plate 1501a. According to the first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates as silk printing with respect to the through holes to be fixed. The serial number indicates an order (work procedure) in which a manufacturer's worker inserts, screws in and fixes a metal pan screw (not shown). The screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark by silk printing are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ), The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components are mounted, and the component number are the same color (here, white) as the color printed by silk printing.

  Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a thread fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1, a white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by a solid white solid line is printed as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, a white serial number 2 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 that surrounds the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick solid white line is printed on the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, a white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4, a white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  Also, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white solid line is printed in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5, a white serial number 5 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white solid line is printed on the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6, a white serial number 6 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  By performing the operation of inserting and screwing in a metal pan screw (not shown) in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 4 by the manufacturer, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are There are cases where the cover boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are slightly displaced. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is reduced. When the control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since it can be absorbed by the dimensional allowances provided respectively, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted so that the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are covered with the cover flat plate 1501a. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side It can be matched.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of serial number 1 and serial number 2 in order to fix it on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be brought into contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw, respectively. The L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to a land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Accordingly, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  A worker of the manufacturer inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the serial number 3 and serial number 4 in order, and fixes them by screwing them into the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of the pan head screw made of metal are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of the serial number 5 and the serial number 6 to fix it, thereby forming the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) side. Land 1510rb2, 1510rb3, and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other.

  In addition, when the manufacturer's worker performs the work of inserting and screwing in a metal pan screw (not shown) in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker sequentially performs the serial number 1 to the serial number 6. When the work of inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) and screwing it in and fixing it by randomly inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into it and performing the work of fixing it, any of serial numbers 1 to 6 can be used. In some cases, a mistake may occur in which a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the one designated by the serial number, and forgetting to fix it. When such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) is shipped with the metal pan screw (not shown) incompletely fixed.

  Also, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 and One or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, one or more of through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of peripheral control substrate 1510. Even if the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501 after the metal pan head screw (not shown) is erroneously inserted directly into the through hole and screwed into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and fixed. , Base plate 1502 Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the head, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw and the head of the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw Since it always interferes with the portion, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501, so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base body 1502.

  In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, L of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is covered so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to be aligned with the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped attachment of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is performed. The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to be aligned with the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Align the through hole 1555b4a with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is placed so that. In this way, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the rear (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since no holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are provided. The serial number 6 is also covered by the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and becomes difficult to see. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505 molded as a transparent non-conductive resin is viewed from various angles such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is inserted, the point that various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method is that the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. The shield plate 1555 does not allow the user to know it, so that the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal substrate front side (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is attached (bonded).

  Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portions 1502ca of the base body 1502, and formed on the cover body 1501. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. With the base body 1502 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, a mounting boss formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by the second fixing method. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed to fix.

  Specifically, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag1 of a mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b1a formed in the shape mounting piece 1555b1, the through hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. The cover plate 1501a is fixed by being screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The cover passes through the through-hole 1555b2a formed in the 1555b2, the through-hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through-hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. It is fixed by screwing into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 has the L-shaped mounting plates 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the board is made of metal. The back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is the thing.

  Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively pass through the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and fixed. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. It will be in the state of doing. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Accordingly, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag4 of a mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and passes through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 formed. Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is screwed into the mounting boss hole 1501am3 to be fixed.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag6 of a mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through-hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through-hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively passed through and fixed to the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. State. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  According to the second fixing method, when a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a, the metal plate surface is fixed. The (conductive surface) conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and contacts the surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, a metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder surface) that sandwich various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The side shield plate 1555 is in a state where it is electrically and reliably connected, and the periphery sandwiched by the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various boards and the like to have the same ground (GND), and thus noise (electromagnetic waves) A strong environment against noise is provided for the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Can be constructed with various substrate) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530 peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, near the data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

  Subsequently, a metal one-way screw into which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501, and toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw it in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to form the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact).

  In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by observing the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, which is the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is located on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And a transparent pan made of synthetic resin by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that constitutes a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are molded and made of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are provided in the inner space of the cover body 1501. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards made of metal, the board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. When sandwiched and attached by, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various boards. It is configured. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Connected to each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is shielded from the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface). Through the side shield plate 1555, it can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. And the model number (or management number) printed on the control ROM 1510b, the status of the IC pins, the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) So that the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. Each of them is distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the operation state, it also has a spotlight function of illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from the angles in multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relation with, the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector is modified by the special connector SCN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the silk-screened content on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so that the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 with the special connector SCN4. Improving the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improving the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In order to be able to check the state of the IC pins and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 from the angles of the multiple directions, the IC pins are dispersed so that the areas are larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the alterations of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. You can Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state when the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC + 12V is being supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades forming the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN, the clearance between the blades (specifically, the clearance between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type LEDML1 having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type is adopted, so that it is used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed by a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the predetermined height is set between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (In the fourth embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) -side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space to form two spaces. A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), a surface of a shield plate 1540 a of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a cover plate. A second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (in the fourth embodiment, 1.6 mm) between the second space 1501a and the back surface of the first space 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, as described above. I have. The first space formed in this manner can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, the metal substrate has luster and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. A reflection portion that reflects the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and returns the light to the peripheral control board 1510 to the region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the periphery thereof. It also has the function of You may comprise so that these reflective parts may further apply glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is disposed, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities of the game hall in the opposite direction. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is very susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are connected to a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be grounded on various substrates. A configuration was adopted in which the connection was made electrically. In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data via the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be removed by guiding to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is transmitted to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates) via the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. (GND)).

  In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal. The substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate In the state of being sandwiched by the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a are A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the back surface, and a metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Are arranged to form two spaces, and these two spaces are the surfaces of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a). A first space having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a; Distance of a second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) And a second space having: In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large-scale production unit (electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, When the distance dimension has a margin, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space, and at the same time, in the second space. By not containing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space through the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can communicate well.

  In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 to control the peripheral control substrate 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) ), And the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. (Eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) Also, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are included. Although the contents printed by silk printing (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, the peripheral data ROM 1520a, A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the corresponding metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. In addition, a rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3). The shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. Metal substrate corresponding to larger area) It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of (the mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

[Around Through Holes of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 are formed. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) as shown in FIG. ) A land 1520rf4 which is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 is formed.

  These lands 1510 rf 1, 1510 rf 4, 1520 rf 4, and 1530 rf 1 are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1, 1540 c 2, 1540 b 1, and 1540 b 2 of the metal board (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). Note that the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 have mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. , 1501am1 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, and 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 and the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has flowed flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil removal areas NR5 and NR6 each having a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 has the foil removal area NR5. , NR6 respectively. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil-cut areas NR7, NR8, NR9 each having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back side are formed, and mounting of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4. The surfaces (boss surfaces) are in contact with the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a back surface side of the cover plate 1501a as shown in FIG. 234 (b). The foil removing regions NR10, NR11, NR12 having a shape of a circle slightly larger than the outer shape circles of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 are formed. The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removing regions NR10, NR11, NR12, respectively.

  These foil removal areas NR5 to NR12 prevent the intrusion of noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are separated from the ground (GND) of various boards. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through the foil removal regions NR5 to NR12, and to the peripheral control. A “route through which noise does not escape” is formed, which cannot enter the beta lands of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  On the other hand, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is, as shown in FIG. (Solder surface) Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) of the metal data substrate 1520r2 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate back surface (solder surface). ) A land 1520rb2 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 is formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A land 1530rb3 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 is formed.

  These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, and 1530rb3 abut against and are electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 have mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, and 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a from the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, Even if it invades the 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and the lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, and 1530rb3, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 to be directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which the screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 which surround the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with white solid lines are printed as silk printing. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, there is a metal pan head screw (not shown) as shown in FIG. 235 (b). Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed by silk printing.

  In addition, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 are in the area of the solid white solid line part. Although the area near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 has a metal pan (not shown). Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outer shape of the screw, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6. It can contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting a pan screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it. It has become to so that. Further, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the area indicated by the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is not changed. Although the area close to the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since the head of the pan screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the pan screw, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and the metal not shown is made of metal. Contributes to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of forgetting to insert and screw in the pan screw It has to be able to bet. Even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, among the areas of the white thick solid line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. Although the area close to the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 side overlaps with the head of a metal pan head screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is a metal pan not shown. By being formed larger than the outer shape of the screw head, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white solid lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3, DTH4, and the head of the metal screw (not shown) is made conspicuous. This can help prevent mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in inserting the pan head screw and forgetting to screw it in. It has become to so that.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR13 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 to be formed is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil punching area NR13. As shown in FIG. 235 (c), a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR14 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil punching area NR14.

  These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates so as to prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Is isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the bottom land of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the foil removal areas NR13 and NR14. A “route through which noise cannot pass” that cannot enter is formed.

  In this manner, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw (not shown). On the other hand, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 where no screw fixing instruction mark is printed as silk printing, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are fixed by screwing, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base 1501, and the cover plate of the cover 1501. 150 The mounting surface of the mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of a with (a boss surface), a through hole is fixed fastened together is sandwiched.

  That is, a metal pan-head screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and is screwed and fixed to the cover body 1501. If the through-hole and the through-hole, which is clamped and fixed together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, are mixed, the worker of the manufacturer may attach a silk screen to the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510. By visually observing the cover body 150, a metal pan screw is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 150. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are through holes that are clamped and fixed together when fixing the 1530r2 and 1530r3, the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw, the peripheral data ROM Substrate 152 Through holes 1520r1,1520r4, (operation of fixing by screwing) screwing work into the through-hole 1530r1,1530r4 LCD output board 1530 can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of work efficiency.

  In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield. Either one or both of the plate 1540 and the metallic back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut on the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, it is in an electrically floating state with respect to various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna to pick up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 by a not-shown wiring, other than the case where the wiring is not electrically connected. As described above, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity. It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back side (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the shield plate 1555a of the metal-made substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555a is provided with holes such as vent holes, when it is disposed so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as. Since they are not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered by the metal substrate back side (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, making it difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. This allows the manufacturer's worker to determine whether various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is, Whether or not a metal pan-head screw is inserted and fixed in a portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are located) can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is illustrated in FIG. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2, 1510rb3, which are directly inserted and screwed with a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Land 1520 which is inserted and screwed directly The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, which surround the b1 and 1520rb4 with solid white solid lines, are printed by silk printing, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of FIG. 235, a screw fixing instruction enclosing each of the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 into which a metal pan head screw (not shown) shown in FIG. Although the marks DTH3 and DTH4 are printed by silk printing, the white thick solid line may be replaced with a white thick chain line (one-dot chain line, two-dot chain line).

  Further, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing are the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the component numbers are represented by silk printing. The same color (white) as the color to be printed, but an area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the various substrates and their component numbers May be different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are to be arranged and the component number is printed in silk printing, the color is white. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be yellow or black as colors printed as silk printing so that the colors are different from the white color.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) The L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are brought into contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, respectively. (Mounting surface) The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the surface, and a land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; The front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is brought into contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540. However, instead of this, the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are formed on the land 1510rf1 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4, but not the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1555, and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 surface. The back surface of the piece 1540b1 is not brought into contact with the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, but is brought into contact with the front surface of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. And the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the front surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( Without contact with the land 1530rf1 formed Sunda surface) may be configured so as to contact the metallic substrate rear (solder side) side surface of the shield plate 1555. This is a state in which the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned conductive elastic member 1545. Because you can

  In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the It is configured so as not to contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the metal back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 made of metal penetrates through the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1 and 1540b2 of the metal board front side (mounting side) shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a, respectively. The base body 1502 has through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. The through-holes are formed at the positions corresponding to each other. Also, on the back side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540c2a, 1540c2a, 1540b2 formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. The cover body in a state (that is, a state where the electrical connectivity between the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved). Screw holes formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the base body 1501 and the base body 1502. Each can be screwed toward and fixed.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the wing of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be removed from the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing. By extruding outward, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when being taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Flow rate can be kept low. When the vane portion of the cooling fan FAN attached to the mounting recess 1501aa is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 that contacts the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 shown in FIG. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Spread the solder paste on the metal mask with a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the hole formed in the metal mask, and put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow oven to heat it. Although the solder paste is dried with, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and the solder paste is removed. It may be put da. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In order to prevent the contact area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Need to be uniform.

  For example, on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by being partially coated with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils on the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A line may be formed in which a plurality of lines in the lateral direction having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance dimension.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this manner is a back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  A predetermined figure formed by such a resist may be formed on a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, and thus the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. The metal back cover and the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates and configured to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, a box shape having an opening at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction is used. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, and a cover body 1501 that is formed of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material that covers an opening of the cover 1501. And a base body 1502 formed of a resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and an opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by a base body 1502. Thus, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a transparent non-conductive resin, The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is such that the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted on the rear surface side of the base plate 1502a so that a portion of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 having a character shape projects from the rear surface of the base body 1502. Is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The probe is in contact with the test pad on the cover body 1501. It constitutes a difference of the noise countermeasure in that the opening is formed by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment that.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is similar in shape to that of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. At the position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate that can come into contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted and has a vertically long rectangular shape. The rib portion 1502aw is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a toward the front with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not contact the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square (8 mm on a side) is formed in the base plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib 1502aw. The conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1508a and a T-shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1508a. And a foam 1508b having the same. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. As the foam 1508b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be given. The T-shaped foam 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when viewed from the right side, the T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237 has a width of about 3.5 mm and a depth of about 3.5 mm. When viewed from the right side, a protrusion (T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237) having a rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in the front-rear direction from the center of 8 mm and height of about 16 mm has a width of about 11. 5 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm). The conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 is assembled after the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. (A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control substrate box according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.) ), A base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is pushed and fitted in the vertical direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), a protruding portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction of the T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 protrudes rearward from the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502 a. It will be in the state of doing.

  When the base having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base 1502 as shown in FIG. As shown in), the front surface of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the up-down direction is pressed against and brought into contact with the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. In addition, the upper and lower back sides and the lower back side of the base portion having the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped (that is, the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped to which the protruding portion having the shape of the elongated rectangular parallelepiped is not connected) Are fixed to the front surface of the base plate 1502a.

  As described above, the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 has a T-shape, and the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 has the rib portion 1502aw and the insertion portion 1502az formed at the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. With such a configuration, when the board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion port 1502az and pushed in, as described above, the base conductive portion 1508 of the board conductive elastic member 1508 having a rectangular parallelepiped shape in the up-down direction is formed. The upper back surface side and the lower back surface side (that is, the back surface of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction to which the protrusion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction is not connected) are respectively locked to the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. As a result, the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is difficult to come off from the insertion port 1502az. Good sounding and hand treatment is to be able to.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board projecting from the back surface of the base body 1502. (In the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate in the fifth embodiment) is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The portion is collapsed approximately 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and spreads in the vertical direction), and the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape. The conductive elastic member 1508 is provided on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, And a contact surface with the metal back cover of the device 1600, maintaining a state in which good electrical connection is maintained, and a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are securely connected electrically, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530) accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. GND) is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.), and can be the same ground (GND). Thus, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it is electrically connected to the line and can be set to the same ground (GND), an environment that is resistant to noise (electromagnetic noise) can be controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, Various substrates such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control substrate 1510, Can be constructed edge data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

  The cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin. After various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively mounted at predetermined positions, a rectangular parallelepiped of a T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is formed. When the base portion having the shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the liquid crystal output via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The ground (GND) line of the plate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520). Is configured. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Connected to each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 to remove the noise. An "exit route" can be formed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  It should be noted that on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () is the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520). (Not electrically connected to the ground (GND)) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover 1501 has a tip portion of a contact probe (hereinafter simply referred to as a “contact probe”) with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. An opening 1501at into which a “test lead” for checking the conduction of a so-called “tester” may be inserted and contacted is formed. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. The inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not it is connected.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta tag land) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the 1530y is larger than the front shape of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The resist solution is placed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be disposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base plate 1502a and exposed. Is applied to form a back side (solder side) side resist layer 1530yr.

  Note that a method using a through hole without exposing the land land as the region ROP may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the tag land on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectively, and the copper is formed so that lands are formed around the through holes on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist solution is applied on the foil surface 1530yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. When the air is taken out from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the air flows into the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be suppressed to a small value, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the blade to rotate. Through the air to the peripheral control IC 1510a. It may be to send out air me. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A line may be formed in which a plurality of lines in the lateral direction having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance dimension.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

  By the way, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device or the like. (For example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the gaming machines are arranged in a plurality of rows facing the back of the hall, so that the effect of noise generated from the facing gaming machine is reduced by the substrate on which the electronic components are mounted. Under such an environment, the substrate may malfunction due to noise.

  In addition, conventionally, a game machine including a ROM that stores image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, a production control board that includes a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images, and the like are provided. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment in the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment in the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a ROM on which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and a board on which electronic components such as a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some substrates provided in the gaming machine are accommodated in the substrate box, it is necessary to perform an operation for accommodating the substrates in the substrate box, and an improvement in operation efficiency has been demanded.

[Attaching flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state where the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device. It is a figure (b) which shows the state electrically connected with the connector of the output board, and is a partial enlarged view of the B part shown in (a) and the C part shown in (b), and a flexible flat cable is shown. FIG. 244 is a view (c) showing a state electrically connected to each connector through a cutout portion, and FIG. 244 shows a state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device normally. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board normally. A. In FIG. 243 (c), the direction of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is shown as being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 arranged in parallel. In addition, the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring is one third to five times smaller than that of the normal round electric wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba having a predetermined width are provided on the upper end side of a vertically long band-shaped main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A rectangular shape having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and having a predetermined length on the surface side of the main body LFCa and longer than the predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba. While a reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba to be formed is formed, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb have a predetermined length at the lower end side of the main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A reinforcing plate LFCcb, which is disposed bare and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, is provided. Is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600 (FIG. 243). (See (a).) On the other hand, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the first embodiment.

  The flexible flat cable LFC has a straight bent portion LFCd which rises to the right by being bent 90 ° to the left at a portion having a predetermined vertical dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa (the predetermined vertical dimension is: This is a distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.) And a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction) from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right). (A distance dimension 1.5 times larger than the above) is formed. A bent portion LF Ce is formed which is smoothly bent in the front direction and is smoothly bent in the right direction as it is, and is formed so as to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach a flexible flat cable to an effect display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca. The control board 1600c restores drawing data transmitted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to display various images on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and various LEDs constituting a backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode tube) are mounted.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCba and the corresponding electrode of the connector 1600ca, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector 1600ca. , The one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is connected to the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the one electrode LFCba, and the other electrode adjacent to the electrode LFCba, To each other, causing a short circuit There is a case where various electronic components mounted on the control substrate 1600c is damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. As a mark for insertion, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (Right outside) straight up and down And Bill long solid guidelines G1R, are engraved. These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped in a pressing process using a metal back cover 1600b with a press machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided on the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After the insertion, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The flexible flat cable LFC is made of a metal back in order to prevent the short-circuit between the electrode LFCba of the flat conductor and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba obliquely and coming into contact with the other adjacent electrode. Fix to the back side of lid 1600b As a region to which the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape long in the right direction is to be attached, guide brackets G2 in the form of brackets (“) are respectively engraved at positions slightly away from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. These four brackets (") -shaped guide lines G2, G2, G2, and G2 are stamped in a pressing process on a metal back cover 1600b using a press machine. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by being fixed to the back side of the metal back cover 1600b by SFC.

[How to attach flexible flat cable to LCD output board]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as shown in FIG. 243 (b). It is electrically connected. The liquid crystal output board 1530 has mounted thereon, in addition to the connector CN10, the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above, a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board, and the like. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and electrically connected to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above, thereby displaying the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Drawing data of an image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is supplied from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is input to the control board 1600c through the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted into the inside of the connector CN10, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCbb and the corresponding electrode of the connector CN10, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector CN10. Is inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, the other electrode adjacent to this electrode, , Each of which is short-circuited, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 or the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 There is a case where various electronic components mounted around the control board 1510 which is electrically connected may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. To the left and right in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). And a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. ) A long solid line that extends straight in the left-right direction And guidelines G3L, but it has been printed by the silk-screen printing.

  In the present embodiment, no through hole is formed in the area where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor of this exposed flexible flat cable LFC is exposed. This is to prevent the mold conductor from short-circuiting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600, The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally extend to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap. It should be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In other words, if the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

  Also, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb is opposed to the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, that is, the amount of pushing. Is insufficient, the periphery of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[When the flexible flat cable is not properly connected]
The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. 244A, the left end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. The guide line G1R extends linearly in the up-down direction, and the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower end of the connector 1600ba. Of the reinforcement plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector In a state of being exposed from 600ba. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 by the guidelines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca. It can be easily determined visually whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered is properly inserted to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator places a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the connector 1600ca, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba has been properly inserted into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  Further, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and are oblique. 244B, the upper end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. And the left side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in FIG. 243 (c)) is the left end of the connector CN10. 243 (c), the electrode LF is inclined. Some of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the bb is in a state of being exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted to the back. Accordingly, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted correctly into the connector CN10, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing. However, the inside of a rectangular area having the guide line G3U on the upper side and the guide line G3L on the lower side is printed by silk printing. May be. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The resist is prevented from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where the solid 1530x is painted, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC from being short-circuited.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but a liquid crystal corresponding to a rectangular area having the guideline G3U on the upper side and the guideline G3L on the lower side and the inside thereof. Of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 It may be formed foil vent region in foil surface. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Further, even if the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed. Guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out Power board 1530 of a surface (mounting surface) guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of 1530x G3U, it may be G3L is formed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be disengaged from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in order to prevent the short circuit by contacting the electrode LFCbb of the mold conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb obliquely with another electrode adjacent thereto. Fix to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the downward direction. In this case, as a region to which a fixed seal is attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, for example, a bracket (“)” is provided at a position slightly outward from a position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. The guide lines may be printed and formed by silk printing, respectively, or may be formed in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By removing the copper foil, a guide line in the form of a bracket (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the liquid is applied, a part of the area is not applied with the resist liquid, so that a guide line in the form of a bracket (") (may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed. By flat cable LFC is fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x LCD output board 1530 by fixing the seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable LFC.

  In the embodiment described above, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, when a substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by driving of an electric driving power, a flexible flat cable is used as electric wiring for electrically connecting the substrate and the driving substrate. Is also good. Since a load is applied to the movable body by the electric wiring due to the operation of the movable body, the load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of the wiring and the harness as the electric wiring, the load on the movable body due to the operation of the movable body due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, and the overload of the electric drive source is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) Is printed by silk printing with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction, so that in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator can attach the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the lower end side. Multiple flat conductor electrodes to be formed When FCbb was inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it was possible to easily visually determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb was properly inserted into the connector CN10. However, for example, the standby position (original position) of the movable body is set on the substrate in the vicinity of the standby position (original position) of the movable body which is operated by the drive of electric drive. Graphics such as lines and symbols shown may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall performs inspection work on the pachinko machine, it does not turn on the power to the pachinko machine, and when moving the movable body manually to the standby position (original position), the mark is used. Can be Further, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used as a determination as to whether or not the movable body has deviated from the standby position (original position). You can also.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the top (that is, flexible A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (that is, on the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right end of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the right of the position (ie flexible A guide line G1L of a long solid line extending linearly vertically in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. (I.e., a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction on the left side inside the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the back surface of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the side. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Cable LFC body LFCa A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end side of the position corresponding to the upper end side and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (on the upper side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa). In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a vertical direction is provided in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. ), A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long linearly extending in the vertical direction at the position A line guideline G1L and a long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are provided on the rear surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R match the front-rear direction. And the positional relationship will overlap. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. In the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long solid line guideline G3U and flexi And long solid guidelines G3L extending linearly in the lateral direction at a position corresponding to Le flat cable LFC body LFCa the lower side, but may be formed on the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530. That is, the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship is overlapped. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC have the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. 243c, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end of the connector 1600ca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca coincide with each other in the front-rear direction, as shown in FIG. Thus, the distance between the upper end and the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba was properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. Further, in a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end side of the connector CN10 coincides and overlaps in the front-rear direction, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The distance dimension between the lower end and the lower end was the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb that was normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. When the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the end of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are properly inserted, the reinforcing plate LFCca The lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the reinforcing plate LF When the lower edge of the ca is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower edge of the connector 1600ca, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca are separated, so that the electrode LFCba is separated. It is difficult to determine whether or not the connector 1600ca has been properly inserted to the back using the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca. Similarly, the distance between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10, but the upper edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. When the distance between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors are normally inserted to the inside of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, Do not match in the front-back direction, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower end side of the connector CN10. In this case, it is determined whether the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 by separating the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10 from the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. , And the lower edge of the connector CN10.

  Therefore, in such a case, in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, the electrode LFCba is on an extension of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. A solid line linearly extending leftward in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ( Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. The guideline G1L ′ (this guideline G1L ′ is described above) It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above. And the right end of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outer side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Guide line G1R '(this guide line G1R may be replaced by a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca) instead of the solid line. 'May intersect with the above-described guideline G1R, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G1R.) And are stamped on the back surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. Is preferably provided.

  Further, in a state where the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the flexible flat cable A solid line extending straight upward (instead of the solid line) above and near a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, near and above the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). , A one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) The guideline G3U ′ (the guideline G3U ′ intersects the guideline G3U described above). Or an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3U. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the drain G3U 'and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3U described above (the interior may be solid-printed by silk printing) and flexible. A solid line linearly extending downward (to the solid line) below and below the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) Instead, it may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) The guideline G3L ′ (this guideline G3L ′ is the guideline G3L described above) And may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-described guideline G3L. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the in-G3L ′ and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the inside may be solid-printed by silk printing). The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is preferably printed by silk printing.

  Instead of silk printing, the guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as in the above-described modified example. The guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ may be formed by applying a resist solution to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by not applying a part of the area with the resist solution. May be. Further, as in the above-described modification, the copper foil in a partial area is removed from the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L 'and the above-described guideline G3L The guide lines G3U and G3L, and the guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ are formed by forming a rectangular shape having the distance dimension in the left-right direction (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may be removed). You may.

[Connector connection method]
Next, connection is made to a relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, a relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and a connector provided on the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and the connector of the harness will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing an arrangement of connectors on the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which wiring and a harness connector are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a state in which the wiring and the connector of the harness are not normally connected.

  By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not properly inserted into the relay board connector, contact failure may occur between the connector electrodes, and the wiring or harness connector may be slanted with respect to the relay board connector. When the connector is inserted into the connector, the adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, which may damage various electronic components mounted on the relay board or various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD includes a wiring and a connector SCK on the socket into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the harness KDCBL is inserted. I have. The connector SCK on the socket side is of a right angle type (also called “side type”), and has a box-like shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower surface SCKaa of a main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Is formed. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa where the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape that is elongated in the left-right direction, and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the horizontal dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, and the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. In the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side.

  When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is connected to the socket-side connector. The lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed is brought into contact with the lower surface SKAa. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb of the PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap.

  As described above, the socket-side connector SCK is disposed with the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are in the front-rear direction. And are arranged in an overlapping positional relationship. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the operator inserts the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side normally to the end of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the operator touches the finger of the operator. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side of the relay board KD By touching the KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) with the hand, it is arranged on the same plane by touching, the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is connected to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted into the back of the game hall. At the time of inspecting the pachinko machine, staff members and the like also open the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the socket-side connector SCK by the tactile sense of the hand that they are arranged on the same plane as described above. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the part SCKb is normally inserted all the way to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

  In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , And a protruding portion having a protruding amount dSP from the end of the relay board KD). Thereby, the worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine, the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side by the amount of protrusion dSP is connected to the lower end of the relay board KD. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface of the opposite side of the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is applied to the finger of a staff member such as an actor or a clerk of the game hall (that is, The lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by the tactile hand that a step is formed. And the plug PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is correctly inserted into the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine that you are not.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the socket-side connector SCK has a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, it is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are front and rear. The parts of the connector SCK on the socket side were arranged in an overlapping positional relationship in accordance with the direction. The component arrangement line indicating the placement is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the socket-side connector SCK, and the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normal to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. And a surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug side connector PLG). , And the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the socket-side connector SCK may be arranged to match. FIG. 246 is a modification of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and the component part arrangement lines, in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and is a figure (c) which shows a state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board.

  For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), wiring and a connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the harness KDCBL is inserted are arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. KDx, which is about twice as large as the distance dimension arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the KD and has at least 5 mm). Are located in

  The reason why the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be briefly described. When mounting a component or flowing a board into a solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called “disposable plate (a range where electronic components cannot be mounted)”. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (range from each edge of the substrate to its periphery). In the case where electronic components are mounted without forming the discard plate (that is, when electronic components are mounted in a range from each edge of the substrate to the periphery thereof), a gripping jig for fixing the substrate and prevention of substrate warpage are provided. Although it is necessary to use a jig, even in this case, the area of the substrate sandwiched by the gripping jig and the substrate warpage prevention jig cannot be arranged with the electronic components about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. It is about twice as large as the distance dimension, and has at least 5 mm. Thereby, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is formed. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is disposed above the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, so that it is disposed inside the relay substrate KD. Will be done.

  Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is provided with at least a lower side surface SKaaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and a socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape that is elongated in the left-right direction, and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the horizontal dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed around the connector SCK on the socket side. The lower side SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with the second distance dimension dw3. In the present embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is the distance dimension at which the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) is disposed with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The same distance dimension (that is, the vertical dimension (thickness) dc of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG. Has become).

  When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is connected to the socket-side connector. The opening SCKb of the SCK is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa of the lower surface SKAb so as to be in surface contact therewith. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb) of the PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. As a result, an operator such as a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall who performs the inspection work of the pachinko machine can insert the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG into the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the insertion has been normally made all the way. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

  In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not correctly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component arrangement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. An arrangement is made with the amount of protrusion dSP protruding from the lower side of the DSLK. Thus, the worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine can connect the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side to the part placement line DSLK by the amount of protrusion dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily visually confirmed that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Some connectors provided on the board have wires that are inserted and removed, and connectors that have one end electrically connected to the wires are inserted and removed. In the connection work, it is necessary to check the electrical connection to the connector, which takes a long time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, as described above, the payout is performed on the left back surface of the game board 5 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 5 and attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e at the center of the left rear surface of the game board 5. A payout device 580 is disposed, and an upper full tank path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e is disposed below the left rear surface of the game board 5.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back board left portion 551e are provided by the back board left portion 551e which is arranged at a predetermined distance from the rear of the left back surface of the game board 5. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 113, a plurality of protective covers 1601 made of a non-conductive transparent resin are formed to cover except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is arranged along the up-down direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

  The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 capable of retaining the game ball B are mounted. .

  That is, since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper tank full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are provided. The formed space (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The various electric wires routed to the wiring routing space include, for example, wires for transmitting control signals and wires for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. Wiring for transmitting control signals is susceptible to noise and is subject to troubles caused by electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and is garbled, or signals are output even though they are not originally output) Signal, etc.), the wiring is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, whereas the wiring for supplying various power sources is strong against noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

  Then, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid troubles due to electromagnetic noise for wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise, among various wirings that are routed to the wiring routing space. On the other hand, there is no need to take measures against electromagnetic noise in wiring for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

  Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. I do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view of the game board for explaining an area where the wiring groove is to be attached, as viewed from behind (a), and a view showing the state where the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board (b). 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a view (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 relates to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind, and FIG. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front in a state where it is mounted on the back side of FIG. 251. FIG. 251 shows a wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board. State of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind in the state FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state in which the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment are mounted on the back side of the game board and various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front. . Note that, in FIGS. 247 (b) and 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring groove for the first and second electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures and other various wirings are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawings. . In FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Area to attach wiring groove]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left back plate disposed at a predetermined distance away from the rear left rear surface of the game board 5. The space is formed by the portion 551e on the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e. In this space, various kinds of wirings, which are locked by an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 formed on the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5, are provided with various kinds of wirings. 1601 are arranged along the vertical direction. In the wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 is replaced with a mounting boss hole in the protective cover body 1601. 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side, respectively.

[Wiring groove according to first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2 The left side and the right side of (0. 0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section, L-shaped attachment pieces 1605b are formed on the upper side and the lower side by bending by press working. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that a notch 1605c is formed in a portion corresponding to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. Are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that the L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b and Notch portions 1605c are respectively formed in corresponding portions. In addition, a notch hole 1605bb is formed at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b by press working.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. ). This prevents the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5. That is, the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. Therefore, the electrically floating metal is not formed on various substrates provided in the game board 5. .

  The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After the mounting boss holes 1601d are respectively inserted into the notch holes 1605bb (the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 have a U-shaped cross section 1605a. A space outside the groove is formed between the groove and the bottom outer surface 1605d. When the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605 a having the U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having a U-shaped cross section.

  In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. A space outside the groove between the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section and a space inside the groove within the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed. Has become. In other words, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise. In contrast, the space in the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having a U-shaped cross section is a space facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space, is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, the electromagnetic wave noise is transferred from the space in the groove to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outer space.

  Accordingly, troubles due to the electromagnetic noise can be avoided by routing the wiring for transmitting the control signal that is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and to reduce the influence of the electromagnetic noise. Wiring for supplying various powers that are difficult to receive can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In such a case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (abbreviated to FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is repeatedly bent and folded three times to form a three-dimensional shape. And transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Metal wiring groove in order to prevent troubles that the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device (not shown) is disturbed or becomes a sandstorm-like image when affected by electromagnetic noise. It is routed to the space outside the groove formed by 1605. Further, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500. Various wirings to which detection signals from various sensors input to the 1510 are transmitted are conductors (single wire material or stranded wire material) whose periphery is covered with an insulating material. The normal data output by the control board 1510 is changed to other data and is garbled to be received (input) at the output destination, or output as a signal that is output even though it is not a signal originally output. The signal was previously received (input) or the detection signals from various sensors were correctly received (input) to the peripheral control board 1510. Routed into the groove outside the space formed by the metallic wiring groove 1605 to prevent troubles. Twisted pair cables and various wires routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

  On the other hand, the wiring that supplies various powers (may include a ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created by the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (a single wire or a stranded wire). Is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. , The fluctuation of the voltage due to this effect is extremely weak and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise, so that the voltage can be led to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the above-described main frame side drawer connector (concave type) via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. To the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that the various wirings which are supplied to the game board 5 and supply various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through cutouts 1605c formed on the right side wall and the left side wall of the groove part 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. The game board 5 is drawn from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to the upper part of the metal wiring groove 1605. It is routed to a variety of substrates provided.

  As described above, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity makes the space for passing the wiring (the space for arranging the wiring) a space outside the groove for arranging the wiring for transmitting the control signal susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise, and the space for the electromagnetic wave noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story structure divided into a space inside a groove for routing various power supplies that are hardly affected by the power supply, the front surface of the left back portion 551 e and the game board 5 Noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in a space (wiring routing space) formed on the left rear surface can be improved.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. It is formed by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 to be three-dimensionally formed. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are barely arranged on the back side of the main body 1606a on the upper end side, which is the left side of the main body 1606a which is long in the direction. On the surface side of 06a, a reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606ba, while having a predetermined thickness. At the lower end of the body 1606a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb are arranged on the back side of the body 1606a so as to have a predetermined length and are exposed. A reinforcing plate 1606cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are provided with a metal back (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Between them, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor (not shown) for power supply is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Is improving.

  The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. The protective cover body 1601 which covers except the display area and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 are drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, and guided downward along the space outside the groove. Then, it is drawn into the board holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is and electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). To be done.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is, as described above, the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. The protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area is provided between the back surface and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 so as to be surrounded by a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except the display area. It is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters into the flexible flat cable 1606 in the area where it passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND). Alternatively or additionally, the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is pressed by an L-shaped connecting piece toward the protective cover body 1601. In addition, by providing a connection piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is made to pass through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601 in the protection cover body 1601. The L-shaped connection piece may be provided with a conductive elastic member on the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece by being in contact with and electrically connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) in the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. The surface opposite to the surface may be abutted and electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is connected to the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. 1601 may be electrically connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion, a rectangular-shaped foam body as a core material coated with the conductive coating portion, and a conductive coating portion. And a conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. Examples of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape include a conductive double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. The surface of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (bonded) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

  In addition, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 described above to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the game board 5 viewed from the front is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 outside the groove. It may be arranged so that it is drawn into the space and then drawn upward along the space outside the groove. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the wiring to the function display unit 1400 against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), even if the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity electrically floats with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise and functions as a noise source. When there is no possibility that the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is negligible, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Alternatively, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. 'May be configured as. In this case, conductive plating (for example, precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ', and the conductive plated portion is also applied. Is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the grounds of the various boards provided in the game board 5 (substrate ground (GND)). Even with such a configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ plated with conductive metal has the same effect as the above-described metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity (that is, the electromagnetic noise is reduced). (It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.)). It should be noted that even if the conductive wiring-plated non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 'is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. When there is no risk of becoming a noise source, or when the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligible, the conductive plating is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has a conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. '. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). (Which can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the outside).)

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1606 transmits a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged so that the flat conductor that is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Also, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, as these plurality of flat conductors, This is a case in which a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity, interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Therefore, it is preferable to give priority to what is supplied. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit can prevent the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 from being short-circuited when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, thereby ensuring safety. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to second embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 as shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, and has a vertically long U-shaped cross section. A groove 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting upward and downward outward are formed on the left and right walls of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and are integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed in the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and the mounting hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Has been done. When the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is viewed from the opening side, a wire insertion notch 1608d is formed substantially at the center of the left side wall. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded with a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded with a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the resin wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608 b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

  The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, and are formed in the mounting holes 1608bb. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted (the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d) is smaller than the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. In a state in which a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover 1601 is in contact with the bottom outer surface 1608c. A mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is state abuts. When the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed by the front surface of the left back part 551e of the base 551, a space in the groove is formed in the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The height (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left and right walls of the groove 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance in the depth direction). It has the same height. The height (distance in the depth direction) H3 of the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is determined by the outside space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the above-described first embodiment. (A distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 and a height dimension (a distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of a space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the above-described first embodiment. , Plus the length.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the space in the groove formed by the groove.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable. Abbreviation of Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The flat conductors for are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. And the flexible flat cable in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same shape as the cable 1606, and is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) for a sub-effect display device (not shown). When affected by electromagnetic noise, it is displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown). The resulting effect image is disturbed, or a trouble such as a sandstorm image occurs.

  Therefore, a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape is provided on one entire surface of the flat flat cable 1609 and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin is adopted. The shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the board to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and the ground (board) of the board to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. Ground (GND)).

  When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent and formed three-dimensionally by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times, a wiring insertion notch formed in a groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is drawn to the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 through the portion 1608d, and extends from the lower end of the space in the groove by a predetermined distance from the bent portion toward the lower end of the space in the groove. In the portion extending to the portion, the surface on which the shield line 1610 is provided is formed so as to face the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. In other words, of the internal space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609 are formed. The space formed between them (that is, the small space where the flexible flat cable 1609 is disposed) is a space that does not face the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side. The space formed from the surface on which is provided to the opening side of the groove 1608a is a space facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 faces the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided in a direction in which the electromagnetic wave noise enters. Is formed so as to oppose.

  In addition, the wiring that supplies various power sources (including a ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the power source board 630 described above has a conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material) around it. Since it is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power supplies (which may include the ground (GND)) is in a stable state, the influence of electromagnetic noise is greater than that of the control signal. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and is hardly affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is not provided is The resin-made wiring groove 1608 is directed to the inner surface 1608e of the bottom of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is provided in the resin wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section. Face the opening side of 1608a. Then, various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are connected to the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) through the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 by various power supply lines to be electrically connected to the game board. 5, various wirings for supplying various powers from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. A groove space 1608a having a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 and formed from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. And is routed upward along the inside of the groove to be drawn from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various boards provided in the game board 5. It is wound.

  As described above, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 shields the space through which the wiring is routed (the space around the wiring) from the flexible flat cable 1609 which is a wiring that transmits a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The line 1610 is provided, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shield line 1610 is directed to the inner surface 1608e of the bottom of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left rear surface of the game board 5 by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Electrostatic discharge from gaming ball B in (wiring space) It is possible to improve noise resistance due for electromagnetic noise.

  Also, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, the flexible flat cable is a wiring for transmitting a control signal which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various powers that are hardly affected by electromagnetic noise can be coexistently arranged in the space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, described above. Various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings through which the detection signals from the various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed by utilizing the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. And has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Among the flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to cover the shield wire 1610. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 to be three-dimensional. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the left upper end side of the main body 1609a having a predetermined width and extending in the left-right direction and having a predetermined width. And a reinforcing plate 1609ca for reinforcing an electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609ba is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a. On the other hand, the lower end of the main body 1609a has a plurality of flat conductors on the back side of the main body 1609a. An electrode 1609bb is disposed barely having a predetermined length, and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 1609a, and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609bb. A reinforcing plate 1609cb is formed for reinforcing.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are not shown. While the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and The shielded wire 161 is inserted through the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). There ground control board (substrate ground (GND)) to be electrically connected.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between the power supply line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND). Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Between them, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor (not shown) for power supply is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Is improving.

  The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. Via the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers except the display area, and a wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity. And is guided to the lower side along the groove inner space, and is guided to the lower side along the groove inner space and is directly guided to the inside of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. Notch for wiring insertion formed in groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area of device 1600. It can be drawn to the space in the groove formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except the display area. It is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic noise that invades toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where it passes.

[Modification]
A flexible flat cable 1609 having a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape on one surface is a three-dimensional structure in which a strip-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. Although the strip-shaped main body 1606a is mountain-folded or valley-folded once, one side face of a short flexible flat cable 1609 'may be provided with a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape. For example, when two substrates are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ provided with a shield wire 1610 in which one of the two substrates is braided in a net shape is provided between the two substrates. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. In addition, the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 'is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two substrates, and the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is connected to the shield line 1610. The two substrates are electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other substrate.

  Further, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover member 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. In such a region, it can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609. In this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display 1600. Therefore, by combining the mountain fold and valley fold of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 in which the shield wire 1610 is not provided in this area serves as the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600. The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 may be formed to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 while facing the base body 1502. In this way, in a region passing between the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover 1601 covering the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5, the shield wire 1610 is The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that intrudes toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield, which is a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and is provided with a shield wire 1610. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609 by the shielded wire 1610.

  Further, the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 excluding the display area and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 are configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 is If it is made of a resin having non-conductivity, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via this connector (not shown), and a plurality of flexible flat cables 1609 are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is connected and this metal back cover not shown Shielded line 1610 through the control board connector provided has been electrically connected to the ground of the control substrate (board ground (GND)). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both end sides may be electrically connected to the shield wire 1610. Even with such a configuration, the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is possible to control the control board through a connector of the control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)).

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged, and the flat conductors for transmitting the control signal and the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting the control signal are arranged in parallel, but a control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. Regarding the flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as “flat conductor weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), it is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise. The flat conductors that are electrically connected to each other are arranged, and the flat conductors, which are weak against the influence of the electromagnetic noise, are sandwiched by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but as the plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In the case of including a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, as the power supply, the temperature rises and when the temperature reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises rapidly and suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch is related to the element resistance and the element temperature. The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body heats up, the heat lowers the conductivity and interrupts the electric current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to prioritize what is supplied. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness that is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring as compared with the normal circular electric wiring. Since it is thin, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows in a flat conductor that supplies power, so that safety can be ensured and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259 in which a light emission effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back effect effect unit 3400. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind, in which the light emitting effect unit is disassembled, FIG. 257 is a front view showing an arrangement relationship between the LED bear chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the diffused sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of a Z portion shown in FIG. FIG. 2B is a view showing a state in which insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is normal, and FIG. 2B is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in FIG. A diagram (c) showing the state not normal for insertion is insufficient to ED board connectors. Note that, in FIGS. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other parts are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawings.

[Light emitting unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to an upper portion in the back box 3010, A control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is guided along the back side of the main body mounting portion 5020 into the light emitting effect main body 5010 and emits light. A flexible flat cable 5030 (an abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) which is transmitted to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is formed by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times and is bent and formed three-dimensionally. The conductor is covered with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and a method of assembling the main body mounting portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be sequentially described.

[Lighting effect body]
The light-emission production main body 5010 is made of a decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 and has a notch in the upper part. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded, and a conductive sheet which is housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 and which is molded by a circular transparent resin having a notch in an upper part thereof. A light plate 5060, an LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a notch in an upper part thereof, which is housed inside the decoration body 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, and a rear opening of the decoration body 5040. And a lid 5080 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch in a part of the upper side.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded with a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a matching the outer shape of the character projects forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. There is. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a include the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) is printed on which the design that shows Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1). (A player sitting in front of the decorative body 5040) can easily recognize the change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

  On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member accommodating concave portion 5040b that has a circular shape having a cutout in an upper part and that accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 is formed on the back surface 5040y side. ing. A reverse placement preventing piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being turned upside down is provided on the upper left side of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, a lid body that regulates the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 and closes the member accommodating recess 5040b is provided on the upper right, left, and lower sides of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. A mounting boss hole 5040d for fixing 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrudes from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension, and is formed. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided on the left and right sides on the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, and the second distance dimension from the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 toward the rear. (A total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
The LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a cutout on the upper part has a cutout 5070a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, and the decorative body 5040. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b.

  A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The LED bare chip (also referred to as “LED element”) is enclosed in a package such as a surface mount type, a chip-on-board type, and a shell type, and is an extremely small electronic component. In the present embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. A configuration that directly mounts on the device is adopted.

  As a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding, flip chip bonding, or the like can be cited. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, instead of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip and a predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 by using a wire like wire bonding, bumps are applied to the electrode of the LED bare chip. To form a projection portion called "." And electrically connect to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin or the like.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five rows of LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other are provided in the vertical direction, and the first row 5070c1 from the bottom. In the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and in the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom, LED bare chips 5075 are lined up in the horizontal direction. In the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.

  The LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged on the center line of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 in the left-right direction. The fourth row, which is one step higher than the LED row of the third row 5070c3, passes through almost the midpoint between this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is on the intermediate lines parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070. The LED array of 5070c4 is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line that passes through substantially the midpoint of this centerline and a straight line that is parallel to this centerline and that passes through the lowest circumferential point of the LED substrate 5070, and that is parallel to this centerline and the above-described straight line. The LED row of the second row 5070c2, which is one row lower than the LED row of the third row 5070c3, is arranged in. One of the LED rows in the fourth row 5070c4 is on a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row in the third row 5070c3. While the second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 and the fourth row of the third row 5070c3 LED row are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so as not to line up in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 and the seven LED bare chips of the second row of 5070c2 are arranged. Make sure that the two LED bare chips 5075 do not line up in the vertical direction. It is location. Note that the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second row 5070c2 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

  On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth step 5070c5, which is on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through holes 5070b, is one row above the LED row of the fourth step 5070c4. Is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 that is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged on the lowest side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and above one through hole 5070b. Has been done. A straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4, and 1 from the left of the LED row of the second row 5070c2. The vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and the first LED from the left side of the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 is on this straight line. The bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 and the fifth row 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 are arranged. So that the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of are not aligned in the vertical direction. Seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second row 5070c2 and six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first row 5070c1 are arranged so as not to be vertically aligned in a row. . In addition, on the above-described straight line, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged. Further, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. Among them, the second to seventh six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, a connector 5070d that transmits a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is mounted. The lower end of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d to be electrically connected. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect driving board 1720 and is electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission mode of the LED bare chip 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Is done.

  The front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is further printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. In other words, the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white, while the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 is green. Is different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that the light emitted by the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by another member. When returning to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED sheet 5070 has a function as a reflection sheet that can efficiently refract the returned light forward again. This is because the 5070x has it.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the effect driving board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. I was That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled by an electronic component for LED control (eg, an IC such as an LED driver and a gradation control driver) mounted on itself. The signal was output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The electronic component for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance in the depth direction) substantially equal to the height of the connector 5070d is used. Even if this electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to downsizing of the effect drive substrate 1720. Further, with this configuration, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. Can also.

  Further, although flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be adopted instead of flip-chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 molded by a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in a part of the upper side has a cutout portion 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. In addition, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a part of the upper side has a notch so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In addition to having a cylindrical shape (hereinafter, referred to as “semi-cylindrical shape”), the axis of this semi-cylindrical surface is tilted slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the semi-cylindrical curved surface is tilted. Incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains inside the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 contacts the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 and is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylindrical column. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident recess 5060c.

  On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape is formed from the opening side of the incident recess 5060c in a section from the center point where the axis of the semi-cylindrical axis passes to the position of a concentric circle separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in a part of the upper side of the columnar flat surface 5060d, and the columnar flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the entrance recess 5060c are similar to each other.

  When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 exceeds a section defined by a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical axis passes, a prism pattern having a concentric circular cross section is formed, and A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical line passes. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of the adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter, referred to as the “block reference distance in the left-right direction”). It may be described as "dimension".). On the other hand, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the prism portion 5060e is one lower than the step of the LED bare chip 5075 sealed in the main entrance recess 5060c from the notch formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape. Is the distance dimension to the prism pattern of the final stage that passes through the center point of the closest LED bare chip arranged in the step (hereinafter, may be referred to as “vertical block reference distance dimension”).

  On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, the incident concave portion 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Are formed, and each has a prism surface. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the vertical dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction. Among the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x, those closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5) The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left of each of the rows, the first row 5070c1 and the sixth row of LED bare chips 5075 from the left among the five-section LED row, the second row 5070c2, and the left of the fourth row 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075 from the third stage For the eighth LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the ED row, the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f does not become the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the last-stage prism pattern is formed on the back surface of the light guide plate 5060. It is formed to extend to the outer peripheral end of 5060y.

  On the other hand, on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, while no processing is performed to form a flat surface. ing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is surfaced on the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A structure for directly mounting on the 5070x is adopted. Thereby, as the thickness of the light guide plate, compared with the thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface mount type, the chip-on-board type, the shell type, etc. Can be made smaller by the depth distance dimension of the package, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emission effect body 5010 of the light emission effect unit 5000 can be ensured to be larger, which contributes to the three-dimensional shaping of the light emission effect body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if a shock caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the LED bare chip is provided to the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided in the game board 5. Since the impact caused by the weakening is weakened, the probability that the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is damaged due to the impact caused by such a dot is low.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bear chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) Although the configuration of directly mounting on the 5070x was adopted, if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not hinder the three-dimensional shaping of the light emitting effect main body 5010, instead of the LED bare chip, a side type is used. May be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimension distance of the single prism block 5060f including the incident concave portion 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side surface mounting type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050 but faces downward of the incident recess 5060c, and the light emitted from this light emitting surface passes from the prism portion 5060e through the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
Diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in the upper part is cut out at a position corresponding to reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in member accommodating recess 5040b of decorative body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and a through hole 5050b is formed at a position corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with a white paint on the back side and processed into a satin shape having fine irregularities. When the light is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

  The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the ornament 5040 while being in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded of transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, the incident recess is formed at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075. 5060c are formed respectively.

  On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as described above, five LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance dimension are provided in the vertical direction. The LED bare chips 5075 of the row of LED rows are respectively encapsulated in incident recesses 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is illuminated brightly, so that the LEDs of each row of LED columns enclosed in each incident recess 5060c are compared with the area where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the inside of the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin, is emitted from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c is increased. If it does so, it will be in the state where the area | region in which the space of each entrance recess 5060c exists is arrange | positioned like a point light source, and it is difficult to make the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 shine uniformly.

  Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, which are coated with white paint and have a long strip in the left-right direction, are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying white paint in spots on the regions excluding these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The part coated with this white paint becomes an opaque region where the rear or the front cannot be visually recognized through the diffusion sheet 5050. No paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

  Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED substrate 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED substrate 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to, a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, and corresponds to the LED line of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED array 5050c5, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

  The vertical distance dimension of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white band area 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. Each of the light guide plates 5060 has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f. Also, of the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white belt areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white belt areas 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension, and for example, in the left-right direction of the white belt area 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 that is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. are doing. In addition, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance, for example, the horizontal width of the white belt region 5050c2. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. doing. Further, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance of the white belt region 5050c3 is the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape and constituting the single prism block 5060f.

  In this manner, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a strip shape that is long in the left-right direction and coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each row. By doing so, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060. The light emitting state can be softened.

  Further, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, so that it is refracted at the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, passes through the light guide plate 5060, and the surface of the LED substrate 5070 ( The light returning toward the mounting surface) 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

  Further, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e forming the single prism block 5060f is adapted to be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 toward the light guide plate 5060, and the region in which the space of each of the incident recesses 5060c exists emits light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and efficiently emitted to the front again, and the emitted light is a prism. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to the aspect in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is uniformly illuminated. This can contribute to evenly illuminating the surface (front surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 that faces the diffusion sheet 5050, and thus it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
The lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout at an upper part has a cutout 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The lid 5080 is formed with a plurality of long ventilation holes 5080c extending in the left-right direction arranged vertically and horizontally, and has a flexible flat cable 5030 at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d through which the wire passes is formed.

  Further, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at the left and right sides of the center on the rear surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 when the lid 5080 is viewed from the rear, and a third distance dimension from the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 toward the rear. (Two mounting boss holes 5080e in total). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the same as those of the two mounting bosses formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove portion whose side wall is formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. A base body 5020a having two left and right symmetrical metal L-shaped plates 5020b that reinforce the base body 5020a along side walls excluding the upper and lower sides of a T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a; 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

  At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect body 5010, and the light emitting effect body 5010 Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the cover 5080. When the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c for fixing two metal L-shaped plates 5020c are formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e are formed to protrude rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). Note that the outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is determined by the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the center left and right of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 (upper left and right of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010). (Outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5040e) formed about two times.

  Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two upper and lower sides formed on the back 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. In addition, through holes 5020bb are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. The metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has a through hole at a position corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are respectively formed.

  When the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided between the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A through-hole 5020f is formed. At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed.

  Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to a board ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and grounds of various boards provided in the game board 5. It is the same ground (GND) as the (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel with each other. Are covered with an insulator, and have a thickness (diameter) of one-third to one-fifth of a normal round electric wiring as compared with a normal round electric wiring. Although not shown, it is formed three-dimensionally by bending and repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the effect driving substrate 1720 to the light emitting effect main body 5010, and furthermore, the main body mounting portion 5020 Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of FIG. Of the main body 5030a having a predetermined width and being elongated in the left-right direction. Although not shown, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 5030a on the upper end side, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined thickness are exposed on the front side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate for reinforcing an electrode having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrode of the flat conductor is formed, whereas a plurality of flat plates are provided on the lower side of the main body 5030a on the back side of the main body 5030a. The electrode 5030bb of the mold conductor is disposed barely having a predetermined length, and the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a are exposed. Reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a long rectangular shape than fixed length of is formed.

  Electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the performance drive board 1720, whereas they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010.

  A condenser called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the performance drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and the resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance. In addition, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown), or the like is provided between the power line in the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND). A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by reducing the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that the flexible flat cable 5030 is near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facilities of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5 a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof are in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect main unit 5010 is susceptible to noise and is subject to trouble due to electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and is garbled, or a signal that is not originally output). In spite of the above, the output panel may be susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to the occurrence of the signal, but as described above, the vicinity of the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. There are also parts that are routed around.

  Therefore, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the most end sides in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of the electromagnetic noise (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “most end sides”). The electrodes of the flat conductor of (.) Are both ground (GND) lines as power supply lines so that the power supply lines are arranged. Thereby, the other electrodes of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes, except for the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends, are separated from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the electrodes of the flat conductors on the both ends. The ground (GND) line is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge and the other electrodes (electrodes including the control signal) except for the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends at the end, With respect to other electrodes (electrodes including lines for transmitting control signals) other than the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends, noise resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved. .

  In addition, of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is disposed at both ends of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends. A power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) is arranged on the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is strong against noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise, it may be arranged on the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030 that are close to the electrodes on both ends. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the outermost flat conductors and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other outermost flat conductor A power supply line is disposed on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor.

  Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors at both ends are both used as ground (GND) lines, and in addition to the electrodes of the flat conductors at both ends. However, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 in a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c. That is, in the flexible flat cable 503, a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. In addition, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason why the white color is adopted is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that it is mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED by itself, the light leaking through the back of the back unit 3000 is suppressed even a little, and it contributes to the reduction of the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, a power supply line is connected to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 among the electrodes of the flat conductors. Although a ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line to be arranged, a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) may be used as a power supply line so that a power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) is strong in noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. In this case, of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the outermost flat conductors and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other outermost flat conductor A ground (GND) line is disposed on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor. ing.

  In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides at the end are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, at a main body attachment portion of the light emission effect main body 5010. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020, the metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are routed so as to pass between them. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductor on the outermost ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. It may be done. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 has a metal L-shaped plate 5020b that is laid out along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. Shielded by 5020b, it is possible to contribute to improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  Further, although the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, it is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic noise). Regarding the flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as “flat conductor weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), it is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise. The flat conductors that are electrically connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors, which are weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise, are sandwiched by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting a control signal, as the plurality of flat conductors, This is a case in which a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity, interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Therefore, it is preferable to give priority to what is supplied. This is because the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring as described above. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit prevent the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a brief description will be given of a method of assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are sequentially arranged in accordance with the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the mounting boss hole 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A lid 5080 for closing the housing recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are arranged on the same plane to be flush, and the end face of the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the end face of the mounting boss hole 5040d are covered. The first distance dimension described above is set in advance so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d and fixed. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the front.

  Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are connected to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through-hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. A pan screw is screwed in from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c to the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and the metal plate 5020c. The fourth distance dimension described above is set in advance so as to fall within the range.

  Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 through a wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through a wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. The method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described later.

  Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in accordance with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e, 5080e. As described above, the end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not project from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are preset.

  Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is provided between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The light emitting effect unit 5000 is completely assembled by pulling it around.

  By the way, conventionally, substrates such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling display of an image display device and the like. There is proposed a gaming machine in which is arranged on the back side and various wiring members are laid out (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island facility in the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island facility in the game hall and the game machine, and thus can be drawn to the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball on various wiring.

[How to attach flexible flat cable to LED board]

  Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 and inserted to the back. Electrically connected.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted into the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductors There may be a contact failure between the electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are connected to the connector 5070d on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so that the mark can be properly inserted and inserted. A long solid line guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper and outer sides) and a lower portion near a lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, a lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Corresponding position And a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guide line G4V that extends in a straight line that matches the vertical line of the left end side 5030cba is printed by silk printing.

  Note that no through hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting and inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guide line G4V are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the up-down direction. It should be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( When the pushing amount) is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb by the insufficient insertion amount SRT is separated from the guideline G4V. As described above, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted and inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is correctly inserted to the depth of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be visually recognized by covering the guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction. It is in a state of having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. Thus, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the inserted connector 5070d is normally inserted all the way. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the worker attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the connector 5070d to be mounted, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
The flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) Although the long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, the rectangular area having the guide line G4U on the upper side and the guide line G4L on the lower side may be solid printed by silk printing. . Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Furthermore, even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The resist is prevented from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the solid-painted rectangular area, and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is not exposed, but is exposed. The short circuit of the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction near the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, in the upper and outer sides near the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction near the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly to the above was printed by silk printing, but the rectangular area having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side and the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to the inside of the area. (Solder side) 5070y It may be formed foil vent region in copper foil surface. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Further, the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Even if peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, and thus the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented from being short-circuited. it can.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of a position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction near the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly on the printed circuit board was printed by silk printing, but the guide line G4U can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. , G4L may be formed, or L Guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of the back (solder surface) 5070Y of D substrate 5070 G4U, may G4L is formed.

  After the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted into the connector 5070d on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030; In order to prevent each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d from being obliquely displaced and coming into contact with another adjacent electrode to prevent a short circuit, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 5070 of the LED substrate 50700. It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction to secure the. In this case, for example, a hook-and-bracket (") shape is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 as a region to which the fixed seal is attached, at a position slightly away from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. (Graphs such as lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed and formed by silk printing, respectively, or a copper foil in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 , A guide line in the form of brackets (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guideline in the form of a bracket (") (which may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution. Disability By flat cable 5030 is fixed to the rear surface (solder side) 5070Y of the LED substrate 50700 by static seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable 5030.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) And a long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly, and a vertical direction of a left end side 5030cba of a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. Straight line The matching solid line guide line G4V extending linearly is formed on the LED substrate 5070, but may be replaced by a single-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line instead of the solid line, and the guide lines G4U and G4L may be inserted in the insertion direction. May be an arrow line, or the guideline G4V may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

[Each decorative board for door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. 260 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 262 is an LED. FIG. 263 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 263 is a schematic diagram illustrating an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, and an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current will be described. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate. Below the center upper decorative body 312a, a plate lower left decorative body 281, a plate lower right decorative body 286, and a plate central lower decorative body 312b are arranged, respectively.

  The plate upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of plate upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The plate upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a plate upper right decorative substrate 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending laterally along the plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plurality of plate upper right decorative substrates 278 are mounted on the plate upper right decorative body 276. It is illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative body 312a is provided with a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a at the rear of the plate center upper decorative substrate 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

  The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration body 404 at the rear of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the left side lower decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b. A door frame left side decoration board 402 configured by and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decoration board 402a). 5 and 10 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind that, a side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange | positioned, and it light-emits by the full-color LED (12 in this embodiment) mounted in multiple in the decoration part decoration board 413 in a side window. The door frame right side ornamental body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame right side ornamental body 419 at the rear of the door frame right side ornamental body 419. A door frame right side decoration board 418 composed of is arranged, and a plurality of full color LEDs are mounted on each of the right side upper decoration board 418a and the right side lower decoration board 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decoration board 418a). 4 and 10 on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b).

  The door frame top decoration body 453 is provided with a door frame top center decoration board 455 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 at the rear of the door frame top decoration body 453. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decoration body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. A plurality of door frame top right decorative substrates 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip are arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Light emission decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decoration board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decoration board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decoration board 457) It is.

  The plate lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a plate lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower left decorative body 281 and a plurality of plate lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The plate lower right decoration body 286 is provided with a plate lower right decoration board 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower right decoration body 286. A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, six LEDs) are mounted for light emission decoration. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided on the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear as described above, The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semi-circular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semi-circular shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in the present embodiment) mounted on the rear decorative board 352b. In the present embodiment, nine) are illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, each of the decorative substrates included in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, or the like can also be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and sub relay board for frame door]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side disposed on various decorative bodies and decorative portions provided in door frame 3 Decorative part decoration board 413 in the window, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish lower left decoration board 283, the lower right decorative plate 288, the lower central decorative plate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, etc., and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a serial data output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input independently. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 to receive DC + 12V, and the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. ) It is electrically connected to the line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

[Door frame side first serial system]
The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relay of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the board 214 and is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, And input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273, respectively. That is, the lower left plate of the plate is a bridge substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) of the door frame side, direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate of the plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the dish lower left decoration substrate 283 serving as a bridge substrate, respectively. Not provided is provided with an input connector and is not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate left lower decorative board 283 is electrically connected to the plate lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the latter and final stages of the plate lower left decorative board 283) on the plate lower left decorative board 283. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the direct current + 12V, and the ground (GND) respectively output from the output connectors are provided. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decoration board 288 are input to the plate upper right decoration board 278, respectively. In other words, the dish lower right decoration board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decoration board 278. The lower right decoration board 288 and the dish upper right decoration board 278 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), a direct current + 12V, and a ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input to the dish lower right decoration board 288 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decoration board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate right lower decorative board 288 is electrically connected to the plate lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the latter and final stages of the plate lower right decorative board 288). Only the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288, are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, are the decoration board 314 on the plate center and the plate. Inputs are made to the lower central decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the rendering operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the front decorative substrate 352a, are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. In other words, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. The rear decoration substrate 352b is electrically connected to the beads. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are respectively provided on the front decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the latter stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V DC, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the above, are provided only with input connectors (not shown).

  Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the plate unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type as described above, it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

  Further, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate upper left decoration board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the plate lower left decoration board 283. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283, and is a sink type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , SuLED1 to suLED6, and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left dish substrate 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type as described above, it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[Second serial system on door frame side]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the lower right decorative substrate 418b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  The direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the upper left side decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, are the door frame top right decoration board. Has been input to 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridging board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decoration board 457 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 are electrically connected to each other. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which serves as a bridge substrate, has a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. Input connectors (not shown) to which (GND) are respectively input are provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided in the door frame top center. An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top center decorative board 455 electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the latter stage of the door frame top right decorative board 457) includes the door frame top right decorative board 457 shown in the drawing. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided, and not-shown input connectors are provided. , A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively, and output connectors (not shown) are provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top central decoration board 455 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decoration board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, the latter and final stages of the door frame top center decoration board 455) includes a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are input respectively. Only the connector for is provided.

  Here, for example, on the door frame left side decoration board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub relay board 105. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273, and applies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly composed of a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decoration board 273. hdLED10, sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105, and is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The constant current is controlled to flow through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a.

  Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. ing.

  In this way, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted (lower left side decorative substrate 402b). On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (left side lower decorative board 402b). The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a can distribute the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is the subsequent substrate across the substrate on which the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is inevitably involved. A worker who performs this work has his finger touching the connector of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, or the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components caused by.

  As described above, the left side upper decoration substrate 402a receives the direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) from the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and also has five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines for passing current are input respectively. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1, SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. And key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits is to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which of the gradation degrees 0 (zero) to 127 is to be designated.

[Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, and therefore the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is provided for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. You can do it.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to which the direct current + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input and used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. 283xi, and a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. Is supposed to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95, and independently generates + DC5V as the internal power supply Vreg to generate the constant current drive circuit. 283x. This is because, if the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, this + 5V power supply line is used by laying out the electric wiring, and therefore the length of the + 5V power supply line supplying DC + 5V is reduced. The longer the length, the easier noise will enter. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is not necessary for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line having extremely high noise resistance compared to the + 5V power supply line is used. In the linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which DC + 5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only from within the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input to the + 5V power source line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x to initialize the constant current drive circuit 283x and operate the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive, for example, a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. I have. For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as “reset signal transmission line”) is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by laying out electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, if the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using it, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to the prevention of unexpected turn-off and flicker of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. In addition, the electric wiring for input to the reset signal transmission line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”) that transmits a clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

  The data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards as described above. For this reason, the length of both the data line and the clock line becomes long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. Is adopted so that the waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise.

[Address setting part]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 types of addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. Is able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set properly by receiving data by software.

[Oscillator, logic processing unit]
In the logic processing unit 283xg, serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and control is performed to set the gradation degree in the output channel to the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to be the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[PWM part]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation off to lighting (maximum brightness) from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. The gradation control is performed by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation level is set, each of the PWM gradation control section 1 to the PWM gradation control section 24 controls the constant current drive section 283xi so that a current having the set gradation level flows.

[Constant current driver]
The constant current driving unit 283xi has one constant value (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation levels are set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

  Each of the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 has one end of a resistor Rr that sets a maximum current flowing through a red (R) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. The resistor Rr is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets a maximum current flowing through a green (G) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. The resistor Rg is electrically connected, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and receives DC + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be respectively sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thus the green (G) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the blue (B) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

  In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, 8 full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents, and thus dimming lighting. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow in the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through an LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). There is.

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current driving circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current driving circuits will be described. The above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 261 and 262 for convenience of description.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes the light emission data SDAT1 which is the door frame side first serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , A clock signal SCLK1. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 to input DC + 12V, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power board 630. Connected and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the lower left plate of the plate 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the plate unit 200. It is input through the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are output channels LR1 to LR6 (constant currents described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to obtain the captured gradation information, and dimming lighting is performed.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the left upper side of the dish via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). The direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 through the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 while being input to the substrate 273. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) is not transmitted to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 which is the subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

  The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed and turned on so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is responsible for the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c. As a result, it is possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

  In addition to the dish lower left decoration substrate 283 and the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, the dish lower right decorative substrate 288, the dish upper right decorative substrate 278, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are used as the decorative substrates including one LED constant current drive circuit. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 262, the left side lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. To hdLED 10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as described above, the emission data SDAT2 which is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , And a clock signal SCLK2. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 to input DC + 12V, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power board 630. Connected and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. Direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , And the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emitting mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba controls the light emission mode for the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs. For the hdLED 9 and the hdLED 10 which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting modes of the huLED1 to huLED5 are controlled.

  Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to sdLED8, are the same as the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8. Through the heat dispersion resistances hdRr1 to hdRr8, electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above), the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are connected to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively). It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24) described above.

  Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and sdLED10, are different from the two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10. The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ) Is electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, and the cathode terminals of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. It is electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

  In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reds (huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are configured). The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above) of the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. Decoration on the left side Through the heat distribution resistances huRg1b to huRg5b of the plate 402a and the heat distribution resistances huRg1a to huRg5a of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the output channels LG3 to LG7 (the constant current driver 11 to the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and constitute the huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively the heat dispersion resistances huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba outputs the light emission data SDAT2 from the light emission data SDAT2 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2). Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, among the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are individually controlled and dimmed to obtain the obtained gradation information. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (emission data) that is input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the fetched gradation information is set to 10 Of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled to perform dimming and lighting, and the left side that is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b. Top decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistances hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the left Heat is generated by absorbing the constant currents flowing through the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is converted into two full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two hdLED9 and hdLED10. The five heat dissipating resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersal circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5 which are full-color LEDs, the heat distribution circuits huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the left side upper side. Heat distribution resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac in the decorative substrate 402a, are responsible for the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). The heat generation can be dispersed.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function to disperse the heat generated by the device, it also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the side window decoration decorative substrate 413, the right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a as a decorative substrate having no LED constant current drive circuit.

[Method of Arranging LED Constant Current Drive Circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current drive circuit forming the LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. The type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ) And so-called VQFN. Of the four edges of the constant current drive circuit, one edge is the input side and the remaining three edges are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 264, various electronic components are omitted and a part of silk printing is omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits is formed. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-circular shape will be described.

[Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the lower left lower decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are mounted. , Is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the left side upper decoration substrate 402a is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and no LED is mounted on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting electrical wiring to the door frame sub relay board 105 is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) on the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is made by the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

  On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are shown. The area is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 75 provided on the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403 as described above. A left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the door frame left side decorative body 404. As described above, the left side inner lens 403 is formed so as to be transparent, subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron), and capable of irregularly refracting light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 disposed behind the front panel are difficult to clearly see from the player side. When the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even in the case where the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 402bx, in the first place, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided. Since the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, they correspond to full-color LEDs that have no relation to the game for the player at all. The part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are prevented from being visually recognized by the player. It is. Therefore, a number identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the full-color LED It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area (where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged).

  The part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are completely silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed) It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and is formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the left-side lower decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and a copper foil around the character is formed, and is formed as a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are made of foil-free characters (that is, characters are formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, Each may be formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil. The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid earth, as described later. Therefore, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a character without a foil (that is, a character is made with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. Not formed as a blank character) formed on one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by. May be.

  On the other hand, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing using solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and electronic components are provided near these areas. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264 (a)) as a silk print, and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above (FIG. 264 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed in yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 264 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 264 (a)) corresponding to the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) by silk printing and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  In addition, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, there are corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas to be printed are silk-printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (FIG. 264 (a) shows only the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5, and the corresponding chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5, respectively). Part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 near and above or below these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 (FIG. 264 (a) shows the full color LEDs hdLED4, hdLED5 and Corresponding A part number LED 4, LED 5 only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  Note that, on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged. Is printed with a yellow dashed line (or black dashed line) not shown as silk print, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk print near this area. ing.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Silk printing is performed on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the substrate 402b. Yellow not shown Te (or black) it is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white are LEDs that emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the region corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity in, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and the connector that does not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) (not shown) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface. At the same time, in the vicinity of this area, a component number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

  As described above, since the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip that extends vertically, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern can be extracted from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge side because there is a limit of the minimum distance dimension to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns adjacent to each other. .

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input. The terminal on the input side is arranged near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be the terminal on the left side, and the terminal on the input side is the second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), +12 V DC, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. The terminals of the output channels 1 to 3 are output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four edge sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, two edge sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being able to be arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the space between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of a vertically elongated strip.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, there are a group 1 composed of four full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 402bax when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern for the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in one group of the group 1 and the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is connected to the central portion in the up-down direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 263 (a), the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged at the center in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 263 (a)). (The portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed) is closer to the upper side, and can be disposed above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in the group 2 whose emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Accordingly, it is possible to secure a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. 2 full-color LEDs, hdLED9, hdLED10, and five left-side upper decorative substrates 402a shown in FIG. 262, which are provided for the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. It can be secured in 402b.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than those of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have one end side in the longitudinal direction of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb that is the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to the 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor is perpendicular to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance. Rr, Rg, Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b so that they are not parallel to one end side of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left end side and the right end side of the decorative board. The door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 of the door frame top decoration body 453 are the doors although they are arranged in a tilted state and are almost the same. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged in the door frame top decorative body 453, and Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the edge side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative board on which 5 full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, Second LED constant current drive circuit (here, second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Not equipped with two heat distribution circuits (first constant current drive circuit is first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), second constant current drive circuit is second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) The light emission is controlled directly via the The left decoration board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided in itself, another left decoration board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, one LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) provided in itself. The current drive circuit and the maximum current setting circuit) directly control the light emission through one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided in itself (not shown), and the door frame top right decoration board 457 includes six full color LEDs provided in itself. In addition to the other right decoration board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in itself (not shown) The light emission is directly controlled via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided. Then, the other central decoration board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453, and the other left decoration board is the left side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. Is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the line, and the other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance) on each of the other central decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board. As described above, the door frame top has the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) provided in the central decoration board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other center decoration board. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (to be more precise, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, damage to electronic components due to static electricity is prevented. It also has a function that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs are arranged. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, they are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. And the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. L of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit is arranged. One in which the end sides of the land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decoration board 455 of the door frame top decoration body 453, the door frame top left decoration). Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is a decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[Decorative plate on plate center]
As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the dish center decoration board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upper side of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, when the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a). On the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration board 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) on the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light to the front (that is, the side toward the upper side of the production operation unit 300). The reflectance of the can be increased.

  Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and positions at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are shown on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The area is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate control number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 provided in the door frame 3 has the dish center upper inner lens 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center upper decorative board 314 is attached below (or behind) the dish center inner lens 313. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a is formed transparent because the unit front cover 312 is formed transparent. As described above, the inner plate center inner lens 313 is formed to be transparent and lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 arranged below (or behind) the lens 313 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. A player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314, in the first place, the white color solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is filled with the full-color LED. Since the part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a color and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed by silk printing at all, a full color that has no relation to the game for the player. It is necessary for the player to visually recognize the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. It is sealed. Therefore, a number that specifies the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs (that is, the part number that corresponds to the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED) or the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED (that is, in the full-color LED). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area) where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  Note that, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are completely printed as silk-screened. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN having no relation to the game to the player and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin in each package (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. Thus, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and is formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and the copper foil around the character is formed, and is formed on the plate center decoration board 314. Foil-free characters are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (that is, characters are formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and the surroundings thereof). Each may be formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is a character without a foil (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. The solid character of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y are formed as a blank character in which a character is omitted. May be.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are provided on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Also, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are supported. The area to be printed is printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Note that, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is arranged. Is printed with a yellow dashed line (or black dashed line) not shown as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has the same color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed near the plurality of check pins. On a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the substrate 314, yellow (not shown) is printed as silk printing. , It is printed in black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth, which grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, emits light from the full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, in the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is mounted on the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) (not shown) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface. At the same time, in the vicinity of this area, a component number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated band shape having a semicircular arc shape, and thus the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees. When viewed (that is, the state in which the decorative plate 314 on the center of the dish is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish), the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish. Is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern can be extracted from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since there is a minimum distance dimension restriction on the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is said that the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate, the lower left end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end, the upper right end, and the lower right end are mainly terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 3 and the terminals on the output side 1 to the terminals on the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, two end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In addition to being able to be arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, there are a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 314ax when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is laid out. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern for the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in one group of the group 1 and the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative plate 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center is The state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a) and the constant current drive circuit 314ax is a full-color LED in a semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (FIG. 263 (b). The hLED 6 can be arranged closer to the right side than the hLED 6 is arranged, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is provided at the semi-circular center portion (FIG. 263 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. ), Which is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed, and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Accordingly, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 in the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. An area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than those of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have resistors Rr, Rg and Rb whose one end side in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end of the capacitor, which is not shown, is vertical to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistance. Rr, Rg, and Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative board 314 on the plate center such that they are not parallel to one side of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and 10 full-color LEDs are arranged. HLED1 to hLED10 are in the shape of a semi-circle of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which it is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. Like the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx are sink (sink) type as described above, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-circular shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit is provided. Those in which the end sides of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decoration board is the decoration board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be further shortened. As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-sized rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3 and the rendering operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[A pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, as the types of IC packages of the constant current drive circuit, as described above, It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  The metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package is designed to be improved in heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to the substrate.

  In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, in addition to each lead pad, a square EPad land pattern EP is provided. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid pattern. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP and the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out within the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  Note that the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is a constant current. The number and the size of the diameter of the thermal via TV are selected so that the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit is 50% or more. As a result, the joint area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large and the generation of voids is prevented, and the joint area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. Although the EPad land pattern EP can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, in this case as well, in order to prevent the occurrence of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, the constant current drive circuit is used as described above. The EPad (metal pad FP) of EPad (metal pad FP) must be soldered to the EPad land pattern EP at a junction region of 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged. When the edge side of the land pattern is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect for heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is also left in the same manner. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in parallel with the left side edge 402beg1 and the right side edge 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and inclined by 45 degrees, , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees. When the edge side of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the EPad land pattern EP edge and the left lower decorative board 402b are arranged. The distance dimension between the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 is shorter, and the distance dimension to the substrate edge side is shorter, in other words, there is less room for heat radiation on the substrate. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b when the EPad land pattern EP end side is arranged in a state of being inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left-side lower side 402beg1 and the right-side edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right edge 402beg2 and the right edge 402beg2 is a portion where the distance between the apex of the EPad land pattern EP and the substrate edge is short, but the two sides in contact with the apex are not parallel to the substrate edge. Since there is a large room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than that in the case where the edge side EP for EPad and the edge side of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle. Each of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are used to emit an LED by the emission of the full-color LED. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

  Here, another configuration of the present invention in which a measure such as a decrease in reflectance is taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a measure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. FIG. 266 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of the D ″ part in FIG. 266 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 268 shows a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a part from a non-LED mounting surface. 265 to 269, those having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 (hereinafter, referred to as the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment). The same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for clarity of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 269, various electronic components are omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 in the effect operation unit 300 and the handle decoration substrate 184 in the handle unit 180 have the reflection according to the first embodiment described above. Configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction in the rate (a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED, and A countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance that prevents a player from seeing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged, to the player. Has been adopted), but the second Configuration measures the reflectance decreases and the like according to the embodiment to the fourth embodiment may be employed.

[Comparison between Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to First Embodiment and Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed with a yellow chain line (or a black dashed line) as silk printing, respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265 (a), a white resist that is solid painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is used. On the upper side, a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED, and an area indicating a position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are solid lines on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which are solid lines on the yellow resist LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk printing. LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left or above, are yellow as silk printing and are on the lower left side. Each of them is printed on a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b.

  On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), In the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Silk printing on white resist solidly painted on 402bx LED mounting surface 402bx of 402b It is printed at the indicated no yellow. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  Here, a white color is adopted as the color of the resist liquid solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and a white resist is solid-colored on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. A description will be given of an area indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the upper side of the silk-screen printing, and the reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-printing paint of the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 Is printed with a red paint on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the white resist solid-printed with silk, the white resist is silk-printed with a red paint on a full-color LED. Areas indicating positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are conspicuous, whereas a combination of white and yellow (measures such as reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment Configuration), the background is white and yellow is noticeable. First, a region showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with yellow paint. When silk-printing on a white resist, the area where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which is silk-printed on the white resist with yellow paint, corresponds to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is difficult to see the part number. In addition, the area | region which shows the position where hdLED1-hdLED10 which is a full-color LED is arrange | positioned, and the component number corresponding to hdLED1-hdLED10 which is a full-color LED are the front side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. Is a front-side notation part (which may be simply referred to as a “notation part”) which can specify the part number of the front-side electronic component and the position at which the front-side electronic component is arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicated (including the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component. ).

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are full color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The light emission mode changes in various ways depending on whether the light is turned on (light emission) or turned off. For this reason, as described above, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test holes, and the like are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area except for the pads, lands, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Is formed, furthermore, on the solid-colored white resist, it is possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1. The hdLED 10 and the corresponding part number are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. A region where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which are silk-printed with a yellow paint on a white resist when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. In addition to making the corresponding part number inconspicuous, a solid white resist with high reflectance and white A combination of a region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Side lower decorative substrate 402b It is possible to maintain a high reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402Bx.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side and yellow due to the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba has a maximum current on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) as a silk print and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above this area LSLKa (FIG. 267 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) as silk prints and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are a white resist formed by a solid white resist. Layers have been formed. Thereby, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is increased by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is able to.

  In addition, in the configuration of measures against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, , A part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 with a solid yellow line HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk printing. And LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, and are yellow as silk prints on the plate center decoration board. The LED mounting surface 314x 314 is printed on a solid white resist.

  In addition, on the white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), In the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin in each package (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins near the plate. On a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the LED 314, silk-screen printing is performed in yellow (not shown). To have. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  Here, a white resist is used as the color of the resist liquid which is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. A description will be given of an area indicating positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged on the upper side of the silk printing, and the reason why yellow is adopted as the silk printing paint of the part number corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. When silk-printing on a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center with a red paint, in the case of a full-color LED, the white resist is silk-printed with a red paint. Areas indicating positions where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are conspicuous, whereas a combination of white and yellow (measures such as reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment) Configuration), yellow is not noticeable when the background is white, and full-color LED A region indicating a position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged, a part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED, on a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 with yellow paint. In the case of silk-screen printing, the area where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, which are silk-printed with a yellow paint on a white resist, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 stand out. hard. In addition, the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions hLED1-hLED10 which is a full-color LED, the part number corresponding to hLED1-hLED10 which is a full-color LED is the front side electronic component mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. Is a front-side notation part (which may be simply referred to as a “notation part”) which can specify the part number of the front-side electronic component and the position at which the front-side electronic component is arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicated (including the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component. ).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, since the light-emitting effect is brilliantly caused by the illumination by the light-emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors, through holes, test holes, and the like are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area except for the pads, lands, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Is formed, furthermore, the full-color LED capable of specifying full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-colors on the solid-colored white resist can be specified. Multi-color emission is possible by printing the part number corresponding to hLED10 by silk printing with yellow paint. When the full-color LED is turned off, the white resist is silk-printed with yellow paint, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 In addition to being able to be inconspicuous, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (during light emission), a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a very high white reflectance are obtained. Decorative board 314 on the center of the dish by a combination of areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged by silk printing with a near yellow paint, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs. High reflectivity of LED mounting surface 314x It can be maintained.

  When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, it may appear orange, or silk may appear. Ink companies that supply printing paint also have yellow widths (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side), so yellow is specified as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturer or multiple board companies However, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  On the other hand, a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and a resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are formed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314y. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, various dispersion resistors, etc. are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line), respectively. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (integrated on one semiconductor chip 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 are white resists which are solid white paints. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. And the corresponding part numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-painted. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, On the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LED are provided. Areas (solid yellow lines) indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively, and on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. , The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are silk-printed, respectively. They differ in that they are printed.

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the forward reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward facing side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, causing a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player at all and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. By printing on a white resist solidly colored on the LED mounting surface in yellow, which is a bright color different from black, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED It can be difficult to find a line (that is, a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) or find a number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black and light yellow. By printing on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black and light-colored). (When printing on a white resist solidly colored on the LED mounting surface in yellow), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted by the full-color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this area, Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and is printed on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. Although it was configured to be printed on a solid white resist, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged has a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body; (Thick line) and printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED printed by silk printing is arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body. The solid line disappears, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between Countermeasures against Reflection Decrease etc. according to the first embodiment and Countermeasure against Countermeasures against reflectivity decrease according to the Third Embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed with a yellow chain line (or a black dashed line) as silk printing, respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by removing a copper foil around the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed ( In FIG. 266 (c), only the foil-extracted character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area showing a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is shown. A foil stripping area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed In the (copper plane), except for the terminals and wiring patterns, only the foil-leaved region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 266 (c)). ))), And the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as foil stripping regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively, and the foil stripping is performed. Near the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed region and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, an area showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a foil stripping area (not shown) except a wiring pattern (not shown). A layer (copper plane) except for the terminals and the wiring pattern, which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, lighting tests are individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba has a maximum current on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) as a silk print and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above this area LSLKa (FIG. 267 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) as silk prints and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed by a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Thereby, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is increased by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is able to.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil strip character (that is, a blank letter that is formed by forming a letter with the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it). In addition, the regions showing the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are the terminals (not shown) and the foil removal region excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, the terminals in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). And the wiring pattern except for the copper foil, which is formed as a region), and the L of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is formed. WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively, and these foil removals are performed. In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center top decorative substrate 314 as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed region and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a foil stripping region (not shown) excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed. A layer (copper plane) except for each terminal and wiring pattern, which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character that is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin in each package (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative board 314x of the LED mounting surface 314x (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), characters are made with the wiring pattern that is copper foil and its surroundings. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and a resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are formed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314y. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, various dispersion resistors, etc. are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line), respectively. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (integrated on one semiconductor chip 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed by a white resist which is a solid white resist. A layer is formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The corresponding part numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and are solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the component numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are the characters without foil (that is, the wiring that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Characters are formed in a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a cut character), and a region indicating a position where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is arranged includes terminals (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). It is formed as a removed foil area (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, except for each terminal and wiring pattern, an area formed by removing the copper foil), and the left side lower decorative substrate The foil is formed by a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the 402b. Area and its foil-cut characters are respectively covered, and further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed with the foil-less characters (that is, the wiring pattern). Is formed as a character in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed as a cut character), and hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged. A region indicating the position is formed by removing a copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern in a foil removal region excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Area), and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is solid-painted. The difference is that the foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively covered with a white resist.

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the forward reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward facing side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, causing a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting characters and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered with a gist, you can find out the foil removal area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed), or specify the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). ) Can be difficult to find.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting characters and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the LED.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-removed area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction of reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged is formed as the foil removal area). , The polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of light from the full-color LED, emits light from the full-color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region showing the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is a foil stripping region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and in the vicinity of this region, a part number corresponding to an electronic component or a connector (not shown) is not shown. That is, in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and a surrounding copper foil is removed to form a character.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction of the reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged is formed as the foil removal area). Although it was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). It may have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED body). In this case, the blank character and the foil blanking region are not connected and are formed in mutually independent regions. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cut area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body. This can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between Countermeasures against Reflection Decrease etc. According to First Embodiment and Countermeasures against Countermeasures against Reflectance Decrease etc. According to Fourth Embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed with a yellow chain line (or a black dashed line) as silk printing, respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is providedレ ジ ス ト hdLED 10 is a white resist-extracted character using a double-coated white resist (FIG. 268 (c) shows only a white resist-extracted character as a part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED). ), And a region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 268 (c) shows a full color LED hdLED7). And only the white resist removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist as the first time of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed of a white resist. The white resist is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two-coat white resists. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time of the twice-coated white resist (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is In the white resist removal area LSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED, the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED is included as shown in FIG. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and leftward Or hdLED1 to hd, which are full color LEDs, In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and the areas showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are formed as white resist-free characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer white resist is overlapped with the second layer white resist and the first layer white resist. The first layer of white resist is applied to the second layer in the region where the second layer of white resist and the first layer of white resist do not overlap due to masking, Exposed without being covered with white resist White resist the first layer is to appear lighter by the. In other words, when the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second-layer white resist, the white-resist-extracted characters in the first-layer white resist can be identified. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as characters without white resist (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. When shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In a region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer appears dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer is masked by masking. In a region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is exposed without being covered with the white resist of the second layer, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, when the underside of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist can be identified. Has become.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. Is able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 269, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb, An area indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these regions, the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two-coat white resists). The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be disposed (the predetermined pin number arrangement) In the white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 269, the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax are provided. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist cutout area LSLKa, and a constant current is provided near and upward to these white resist cutout areas LSLKa. IC1 (see FIG. 269 (a)) which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer The entire surface is covered with the white resist and the area other than the area masked by the white resist of the second layer is covered, so that the masked area is recessed as a concave portion and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as a white resist removal area, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  In addition, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist (not shown) showing a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. The white resist removal characters R1, R2, which are formed as a removal area and have a part number corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, are not shown in the vicinity of this area. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) formed as R3 are formed as white resist removal characters (not shown). In the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer of 402by (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer white resist overlaps with the first layer white resist in the second layer. The white resist of the first layer appears dark, whereas the white resist of the first layer is applied to the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to the masking. Peel off without being covered by the second layer of white resist First layer of the white resist by an out so that the look faint. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to the above, the white resist removal area can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are a white resist formed by a solid white resist. Layers have been formed. Thereby, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is increased by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is able to.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is the first time of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is made of white resist. The white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as the first of the two-coat white resists. Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center is a region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second of the white resists coated twice (predetermined pin number is arranged). For example, the white resist removal region HSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hLED7 that is a full-color LED includes a notch mark that indicates the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 that is a full-color LED. The notch is formed at the corresponding position) as the white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. ~ LED which is a part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is the white resist removal area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs and LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to them are formed as white resist-less characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center. Because of this, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is formed. Looking at the underlayer, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, whereas the second resist is masked by the mask. In a region where the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the first layer is exposed. That the white resist on the eyes looks pale That. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

  It should be noted that the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate on the plate center 314 has a region showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged as a white resist removal region (not shown), and parts corresponding to the connector HCN are provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as characters without white resist (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. Shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer is formed. In a region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer appears dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer is masked by masking. In a region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is exposed without being covered with the white resist of the second layer, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist. Has become.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. Is able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin in each package (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative board 314x of the LED mounting surface 314x (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersed resistors not shown. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as are formed as white resist removal areas using a double-coated white resist as with the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and these areas are also formed. Similar to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a part number corresponding to an electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white-resist-extracted character using a double-coated white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, but it is masked by the mask. In a region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The first layer of white resist looks faint To become. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters formed on the first layer white resist can be identified. In addition to the above, the white resist removal area can be identified.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has the same color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are white resists which are solid white paints. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The corresponding part numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and are solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist. An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged is formed as a white resist-exposed area using a twice-coated white resist. Further, a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314. HLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-painted white resist, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is painted twice. Uses white resist Was is different in that it is formed as a white resist vent area.

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the forward reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward facing side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, causing a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist with a double-coated part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. In addition to the above, the full-color LED mounting position is formed by forming the region showing the position where the full-color LED has no relation to the game for the player as a white resist removal region using the white resist that is applied twice. It is difficult to find the white resist removal area (that is, the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged) that indicates that, or the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). You can

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist with a double-coated part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. In addition to the above, the region showing the position where the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist, so that the full-color LED emits light. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. In other words, a white resist removal area that uses a number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a double-coated white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is arranged It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area) and to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, the step of silk printing can be omitted for each of the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface. By reducing the number of steps, it is possible to contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using a twice-coated white resist indicating a mounting position of a full-color LED (that is, a position where a full-color LED is arranged is shown. When forming the (region), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the fourth embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color have lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions showing positions for arranging electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of this region. In addition, a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) or a connector mounted on the LED mounting surface is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the white resist of the first layer entirely covers the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged is formed as the white resist removal area. In addition to the above, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as the white resist extraction character, but the white resist extraction region and the white resist extraction character may be formed by using another method. . For example, after the white resist is solidly coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and before the white resist dries, a region showing the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged. And a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector to form white resist-free characters, a LED mounting surface of a decorative substrate, and After the white resist is solidly coated once or multiple times on the LED non-mounting surface, after this white resist is dried, the area showing the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged is set as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation. While forming, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and connector is white And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist showing a mounting position of the full color LED (that is, a position where the full color LED is arranged is shown. When forming the area), the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED body, or simply one thick line). In this case, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body, and the periphery of the full-color LED main body is also the white layer of the second layer. Since the resist and the first layer of white resist overlap each other to make the second layer of white resist darker, it can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

  In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 264, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into groups 1 and 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate included in the game board 5 include decorative boards included in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by flowing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green and the like. It is also possible to use monochromatic LEDs. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply provided in the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261) is a current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage for lighting the LED. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, at most one single color LED (for example, When the LEDs other than the red LED) are electrically connected, the internal power source Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power source is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistor of the heat distribution circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to two single color LEDs (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistance of the heat distribution circuit described above. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit is provided. Of the LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED for one output channel is electrically connected to the output terminal via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the power supply board 630 supplies (outputs) the direct current +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630. DC + 35V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LED. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge of the decorative board is large. Although the edge of the land pattern is arranged to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door Of the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, any one decorative board and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. Then, the door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of another right decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted in addition to the full-color LED included in itself, by the LED constant current drive circuit included in itself. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided with the LED constant current drive circuit provided with the other left decorative substrate on which, for example, one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative boards are printed by white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. It will be printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative boards provided in the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed as silk prints with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively. (I.e., when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line)), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

  In the above-described embodiment, each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 205 (for example, the back-side decorative board 3114 provided on the back-side movable decorative body 3110, the back side provided on the back-bottom left effect unit 3200) Bottom left decorative substrate 3203, Bottom right right decorative substrate 3253 provided in Bottom right decoration unit 3250, Bottom lower first decorative substrate 3322 and Bottom lower second decorative substrate 3329 provided in lower back middle decorative unit 3320, Upper back Decorative board 3422 and back decorative board 3452 of back up and down decorative body unit 3450 provided in effect unit 3400, back left back decorative board 3522 and back right decorative body unit 3620 provided in back and back decorative body unit 3520 Back right decorative board 3622, back front left decorative board 3714, back front right decorative unit provided in back front left decorative body unit 3710 The front and rear right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the base plate 810 includes a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are formed on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate. Notation parts, such as a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which can be specified, are printed by silk printing with yellow paint, and the reflectance is reduced according to the above-described second embodiment. Configuration of countermeasures such as (LED mounting by full-color LED emission according to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) Can be prevented from decreasing, and a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged are visually recognized by the player. Of the decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205 (back face). ), Electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and capacitors are mounted on a white resist solidly painted on the rear surface (rear surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. In addition, areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed by silk printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and electronic components corresponding to these areas are provided near these areas. Part numbers may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively, or a modification of the above-described configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment may be adopted. . In addition, for each of the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, the above-described configuration (including modified examples) of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the third embodiment. Either the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the embodiment (including the modified example) or the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) is adopted. May be.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with various boards which are supplied from a power supply from a power supply board and can control the illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the gaming machine, a line for transmitting a power source or a line for transmitting a control signal is routed to various boards, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a front frame configured to cover a window opening the gaming board back and forth with a see-through protection plate (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]. , And Fig. 1)). By increasing the size of the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrate accommodated in the left and right sides is also strip-shaped. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, and the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emitting means.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that is provided in a standby position below the display screen of the effect display device, and that includes a movable accessory device that operates during effect (for example, JP-A-2005-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is attached. However, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize, through the light emitting unit, a number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, which has no relation to the game.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effect by such a light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered by the number identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the decoration is reduced. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a decorative board on which an electronic component such as a light emitting body (light emitting means) facing a back surface of a light emitting section (lens) is mounted is provided on a frame side or a game board side (for example, JP-A-2005-058064 (Paragraph [0011], Paragraph [0040], FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). However, there is a possibility that a player may visually recognize an auxiliary symbol for specifying an electronic component mounted on a decorative board having no relation to the game through the light emitting unit.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
Next, as shown in FIG. 107-FIG. Each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 205 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “each decorative board provided on the game board 5”) and countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. Each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the above configuration will be described.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board]
First, as the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145, and the back lower left effect shown in FIG. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the unit 3200, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 provided in the lower right right rendering unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, and the lower back middle first provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 shown in FIG. The decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower decorative substrate 3329, the back upper decorative substrate 3422 provided in the upper back effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and the back-up and down decorative body unit provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. The back upper left decorative substrate 3452 provided in the back upper left decorative body unit 3520 shown in FIG. The back right decoration board 3622 provided in the back right decoration unit 3620, the back left decoration board 3714 provided in the front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, and the back right decoration unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197. There is a back front right decorative substrate 3814 and the like, and as described above, the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) are coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid white”). In some cases, a white resist layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs are formed on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Notation parts such as the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are made of yellow paint so that the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission can be specified. It has been printed by the torque printing. That is, each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 has the same configuration as the countermeasure for the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above, and the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. Due to the effect of the configuration of the countermeasure, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being reduced by the emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures such as reduction of reflectance are taken).

  Here, a member disposed in front of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 will be briefly described. As shown in 145, toward the front, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and transparent. They are arranged in the order of the flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (front side) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 provided in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is directed forward to a transparent lower back left decorative body 3202, and a transparent lower back left rotation. The decorative bodies 3201 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a lower back left decorative body 3202 and a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (front side) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 provided in the lower back right effecting unit 3250 has a transparent lower right decorative body 3252, and a transparent lower right rotation, as shown in FIG. The decorative bodies 3251 are arranged in that order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a lower right back decorative body 3252 and a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 toward the front, and They are arranged in the order of a transparent under-rotating decorative body 3310 and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and a under-back under-rotating decorative body 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, as shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorating body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorating body 3329. It is covered by the game board side transparent member such as. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (front surface) of the back upper decorative board 3422 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 is directed forward to the transparent back upper decorative body 3421 or the transparent back upper decorative body. 3421 and a transparent back-upper rotary decoration 3410, and are covered with a game board-side transparent member such as a back-upper decoration 3421 and a back-upper rotary decoration 3410. As shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (front surface) of the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 of the back-up-and-down decorative body unit 3450 provided in the back-up effect unit 3400 has a transparent back-upper decorative body 3451 facing forward. And it is arrange | positioned in order of the transparent back upper decoration body 3440, and is covered with the game board side transparent members, such as a back upper decoration body 3451 and a back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the rear back left decoration substrate 3522 provided in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is, as shown in FIG. The rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is arranged in this order, and is covered by the game board side transparent member such as the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. As shown in FIG. 188, the front (front surface) of the back right decoration board 3622 provided in the back right decoration unit 3620 is directed to the front, the back right decoration 3621, and the back back right, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of the rotating decorative body 3610, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back right decorative body 3621 and the back right rotating decorative body 3610. As shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 faces forward, and a transparent flat front back left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter. A support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front left decorative body 3713 or the like. As shown in FIG. 197, as shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 is a transparent flat back front right decorative body 3813 and a frame-shaped shutter. A support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front right decorative body 3813.

  As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered with the game board side transparent member.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of pachinko machines mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are provided. An LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) changes its light emission mode variously when turned on (emit light) or turned off. For this reason, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 through the game board side transparent member, and the player can enjoy the game. Interestingness may be reduced, and it is also inefficient that the effect member provided with the decorative board on which the LED to be turned off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 are turned off. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate makes the game board side transparent member look like a white member. Thus, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 effectively reflects external light. The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) concept (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) emits external light of various colors from the transparent member on the game board side to the outside because View) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs ( In a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 makes it possible for the game board side transparent member to be a white member. It is visible. Thereby, in the case where each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, even when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit external light, external light of various colors can be emitted from the game board side transparent member. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to be distorted by issuing to the outside. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 is coated with the white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered with the game board side transparent member. Of the game board side transparent member, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, a lower back left decorative body 3202, a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, a lower back right decorative body 3252, a lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Back front front decoration 3410, back front decoration 3421, back rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back left decoration 3521, back right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back right decoration body 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. In one petal of a cherry blossom, the petals are According to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery. Predetermined color (book The facilities form a plurality of dots of pink) is applied by printing. In other words, of the game board side transparent members, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back middle rotating decoration Body 3310, back-upper rotating decoration 3410, back-upper decoration 3421, back-upper rotating decoration 3440, back-upper decoration 3451, back-left rotating decoration 3510, back-left left decoration 3521, back The right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are formed to be transparent, and a shaded area having a pink color is formed. Thereby, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 becomes a white background. From this white background, a shaded area having a pink color rises, and the decoration sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back Middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521 , The back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can provide the player with a three-dimensional modeling beauty.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal decoration parts (gold material) such as the metal decoration part 3111d, the metal decoration part 3310a, the metal decoration part 3711a, and the metal decoration part 3811a are formed by hot stamping a gold metal foil. In contrast to being formed by foil stamping, a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate arranged behind each decorative body in which such a metal decorative portion (gold material) is formed. On the upper side, a notation portion on the front surface side, which makes it possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolored light, is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint. The gold color is a color like gold, and is a color that shines yellow like gold. Therefore, the yellow color of the front side notation part is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration part 3111d. In the amusement machine, as a gold material, in addition to the obstacle nail N using brass and the metal decorative portion formed by the above-described hot stamping foil stamping, for example, a yellow material (for example, transparent A member on which a yellow resin having a light property, a yellow print) is placed, a gold print, and the like.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration portion) in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent region and the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent region with a gold material (metal decoration portion) ]
In addition, as each decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, a back decoration board 3114 provided in a back movable decoration body 3110, a first back bottom middle decoration board 3322 provided in a back inside decoration unit 3320, and a middle back bottom As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710, and the front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has white as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed by applying the resist solution of The notation on the front side, which can identify full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors on a white resist, is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, and gold with metallic luster in the vicinity Decorative portion is disposed. As described above, the front-side notation allows the front-side electronic component to be mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the component number of the front-side electronic component. , Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, It may include the type of the front side electronic component.)

  For example, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 included in the back-removable decorative body 3110 will be described. The front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the back-removable decorative body 3110 faces forward as shown in FIG. 145. The transparent light guide / radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and a transparent flat-plate ornamental body 3111 are arranged in this order. And, it is covered with the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for a metallic decorative part 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. Since the front side notation that allows identification of a possible full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration 3111d. I have.

  Note that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3111d of the transparent flat decoration body 3111 provided in the back back movable decoration body 3110. On the other hand, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent region of the transparent flat decorative body 3111 excluding the rear decorative substrate 3114.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is transparent except for the metal decoration part 3111d having the metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the area indicated by, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d has The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the back. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metallic decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is replaced with the metal decoration portion 3111d having the metallic luster of the decoration 3111. Although visible through the transparent area except for the above, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the color of the metal decoration portion 3111d ( The visual line is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of gold. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration part 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made less visible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors that is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is used. The front side notation portion having a yellow color that can be specified can be visually recognized through a transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d having a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111, but the back side decoration substrate 3114 Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) has a white background, the decorative body 3111 is provided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3111d to be formed (formed), the surface side notation part is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3111d. It is printed by silk screen printing in yellow to, and is capable of obscuring the presence of the yellow silk printing.

  In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. The through holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the existence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to understand, so when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the back decoration board 3114, the position, size and number of the through holes and lands are restricted. It is not necessary to do so, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of drawing the wiring pattern of the back decoration board 3114, and to perform the work of the artwork. It may also contribute to reducing the time required.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk]
The lower middle lower decorative board 3322 and the lower middle lower decorative board 3329 provided in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 will be described. The front of the lower middle lower decorative board 3322 provided in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 ( 165, the transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and the transparent lower middle rotating decoration 3310 are arranged in this order in the forward direction, as shown in FIG. , And a game board-side transparent member such as a lower middle back decoration 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, as shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorating body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorating body 3329. It is covered by the game board side transparent member such as. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is entirely transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and has a solid white color on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. Since the front side notation that enables the multicolor light emitting full-color LED printed on the resist to be specified by silk printing has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is the metal decoration part 3310a. It has a color similar to the color (gold) it has.

  Note that the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3310a of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, while the metal decoration portion is provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 corresponding to the transparent region of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 excluding the 3310a.

  In a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 has a metallic luster of the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although visible through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322 has a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a, a line of sight is drawn from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310. You will be guided naturally. As a result, the metal decoration part 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is attracted to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Can be made difficult to visually recognize. In a state in which the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent lower back middle decoration 3328. Although it can be performed, since the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-back middle decoration 3328, the under-back middle rotation decoration 3310 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is formed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. ) Is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second back lower middle decorative substrate 3329 is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Can be difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is replaced with the metallic luster of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, though visible through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a having the white background. Then, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 to the lower rotation middle decoration body 3310 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. The gaze is guided naturally. Thereby, even when the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back lower rotating decoration 3310 is provided. By attracting the eyes, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back can be made difficult to see. In a state in which the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent lower back middle decoration 3328. Although it can be performed, since the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-back middle decoration 3328, the under-back middle rotation decoration 3310 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is formed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. ) Is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Accordingly, even when the lower back middle decoration board 3329 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle decoration body 3310 is formed. By attracting the eyes, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, multicolor light emission that is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is possible. Although the front side notation having yellow that enables the full-color LED to be identified can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster in the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 has a white background, the lower back middle first decoration is performed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, the front surface side writing portion It is printed by silk screen printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) metal escutcheon 3310a, and is capable of obscuring the presence of the yellow silk printing. When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the multicolor emission capable of being printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is possible. Although the front side notation portion having yellow color capable of specifying a full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent underside decoration 3328, a metal decoration portion having a metallic luster in front of the underside decoration 3328. Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 in which the 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged, a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a, the metal decoration portion 3310a is provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3329 to the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a, even if the front side writing portion is printed by yellow printing similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a by silk printing, this yellow silk printing You can make it harder to understand.

  In addition, a through hole, a land, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The through holes, lands, and the like are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the first decorative substrate under the lower surface is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back rotating decoration body 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Since the presence of through-holes, lands, and the like can be made difficult to understand by attracting the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3310a, when performing the work of the artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and the degree of freedom of routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back is enhanced. Preparative it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork. Further, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329. The through-holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the second decorative substrate under the bottom is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3329 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle decoration 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310a. Since the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a, it is possible to obscure the existence of through holes, lands, and the like. Therefore, when performing the work of the artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and the degree of freedom of routing of the wiring pattern of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is increased. Preparative it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
193. The front left decorative board 3714 provided in the front left decorative body unit 3710 will be described. The front (front side) of the front left decorative board 3714 provided in the front left decorative body unit 3710 is, as shown in FIG. Towards the front, a transparent flat back-front left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and a back-front left decorative body 3713 and other gaming boards. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711, a metal decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed. The metal decoration portion 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714. Since the front-side notation portion that enables identification of the full-color LED that can emit light has a yellow color, the color (yellow) that the front-side notation portion has is similar to the color (gold color) that the metal decoration portion 3711a has. ing.

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3711a of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted, while the metal decorative portion 3711a is mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the region within the frame of the removed frame-shaped front cover 3711.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparently, and therefore the back front left decorative body arranged behind the back front left decorative body 3713. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be seen through the front left back decoration 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the white front coating can be seen. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. With this, the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 is attracted to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparently, and therefore the back front left decorative body arranged behind the back front left decorative body 3713. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be seen through the front left back decoration 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the white front coating can be seen. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. Thus, even when the back front left decorative board 3714 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714. Is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is solid-painted. A front side notation portion having a yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolors printed on a white resist by silk printing is provided on the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the shutter unit. Although it is visible through the frame of 3730, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provides a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a is provided. Is provided on the front cover 3711 from the front (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 by the attractiveness of Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration portion 3711a, even if the front side notation portion is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a, the presence of this yellow silk printing is not considered. It can be made harder to understand.

  In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The through-holes, lands, and the like are prominently present from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is formed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. This makes it difficult to recognize the existence of through holes and lands. Therefore, when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the front left front decorative board 3714, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are determined. And the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be increased in degree of freedom. It may also contribute to reducing the time required for the click operation.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
The front right decorative board 3814 included in the front right decorative body unit 3810 will be described. The front (front side) of the front right decorative board 3814 included in the front right decorative body unit 3810 is, as shown in FIG. Toward, a game board such as a transparent front right decorative body 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame front cover 3811 are arranged in this order. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811, a metal decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is formed. The metal decorative portion 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Since the front side notation that enables the specification of a light-emitting full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3811a. ing.

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3811a of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, the metal decorative portion 3811a is not mounted while the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor is not mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 corresponding to the region within the frame of the removed frame-shaped front cover 3811.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front right decoration 3813 is formed to be transparent, so the back front right decoration arranged behind the back front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the front right back decoration 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. This attracts the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front right decoration 3813 is formed to be transparent, so the back front right decoration arranged behind the back front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the front right back decoration 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. Thereby, even when the back front right decorative board 3814 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814. Is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 is solidly coated. A front side notation portion having a yellow color that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk-screen printing on a white resist is provided in the frame of the back front right decoration 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit. Although it is visible through the frame of 3830, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, so that the metal decorative portion 3811a has a color (gold). Is provided (formed by the front cover 3811 from the front surface (front surface) of the right front decorative substrate 3814) Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration portion 3811a, even if the front side notation portion is printed by yellow printing similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3811a by silk printing, the presence of this yellow silk printing is determined. It can be made harder to understand.

  In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The through holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the through-holes and lands of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decoration portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. By doing so, it is possible to make the existence of through holes and lands difficult to understand, so when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the right front decorative substrate 3814, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are required. The wiring pattern of the right front decorative board 3814 can be more freely routed. It may also contribute to reducing the time required for the click operation.

[Example of disposing a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate between a gold material (metal decoration part) and a gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is at the standby position (original position). , The back side production unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171 is arranged on the upper side thereof, the back front left decoration body unit 3710 of the back front left production unit 3700 shown in FIG. 193 is arranged on the left side thereof, and the right side thereof. The back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159 is arranged on the lower left side thereof, and the lower right side thereof is shown in FIG. 159. The lower back right effect unit 3250 shown is arranged.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 arranged below the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. The front cover 3711 and the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are provided (formed) with metal decoration portions 3310a, 3711a, 3811a, and are predetermined. All have golden colors.

  On the other hand, the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back upper staging unit 3400 arranged above the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparent, and the back upper front decoration. The front side notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3422 has yellow, and the front side notation The color (yellow) of the part is arranged on the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the back upper presentation unit 3400, and on the right side of the back upper presentation unit 3400. It has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810. In other words, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 having the yellow front side notation similar to the gold color includes the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the front front left decorative body unit 3710 and the front cover of the rear front right decorative body unit 3810. 3811a and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3711 of the front back left decoration unit 3710 and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration unit 3810. In the case where the color (yellow) of the front-side notation can be visually recognized through the back upper front decorative body 3421 or the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. However, the presence of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 can be determined by the attractiveness of the metal decorative portions 3711a and 3811a having a gold color. Comb, it is possible to obscure the presence of the surface-side shower unit.

  In addition, the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparent, and the lower back left decorative board is provided. The front side notation has a yellow color to indicate a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk printing on a white resist solid-coated on the front surface (front side) of 3203, and has a front side notation. The color (yellow) of the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the upper left of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower right of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 It has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the under-back middle decoration body 3310 of the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320. In other words, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 having a yellow front side notation similar to gold is provided under the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the lower back of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320. Since the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotating decoration body 3310 is interposed between the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back bottom middle decoration body of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 Since the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be visually recognized through the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 (because it is arranged near the metal decoration part 3310a of the body 3310). Even if there is, the presence of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metal decorative portions 3711a and 3310a having a gold color. It is possible to obscure the presence of the indicating section.

  In addition, the lower back right decoration body 3252 and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed, and the lower back right decoration is formed. The front side notation has a yellow color so that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified by silk-screen printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3253. The color (yellow) of the part is on the lower right of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the rear front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the upper right of the lower back right effect unit 3250. It has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the arranged lower back middle rotating body unit 3320. In other words, the lower right back decoration board 3253 having the yellow front side notation similar to the gold color corresponds to the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the lower back of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Because it is interposed between the metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the front right decoration body unit 3810 and the lower middle rotation decoration of the lower middle decoration unit 3320. Since the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be visually recognized through the lower back right decorative body 3252 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251) (because it is disposed close to the metal decoration part 3310a of the body 3310). Even so, the presence of the lower right back decoration board 3253 is difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metal decoration portions 3811a and 3310a having a gold color. It is possible to obscure the presence of the indicating section.

[Example of disposing nails near a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is formed such that the outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is a transparent flat plate-like panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the gaming panel 1100 as described above. Thus, the presence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) (hereinafter, referred to as “below”). "Transparent game panel 1100" may be described).

  Also, as described above, the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 has the center accessory 2500 formed in a transparent frame shape, the starting port unit 2100 formed of a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 formed of a transparent member. The upper left unit 2300 is formed transparent, and the unit base 2411, the front cover 2412, and the rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 111, the existence of the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the game panel 1100 is transparent to the game panel. It can be seen through various transparent members of 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  For example, in the lower back left rendering unit 3200, behind the transparent game panel 1100, a transparent decoration body such as a lower left rotation decoration body 3201 and a lower back left decoration body 3202 is arranged. At the rear, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 will be arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. In this way, behind the transparent game panel 1100, a transparent decoration body of lower back left rotating decoration body 3201, lower back left decoration body 3202, and lower back left decoration board 3203 are arranged in this order. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the surface number of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of full-color LEDs, the surface indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged, and the like. The attributes of the side electronic component (which may further include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component). The front side notation is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used)) by silk printing.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) in contact with the game balls and having a predetermined gauge arrangement and having a gold color are provided on a transparent game panel 1100. Since it is planted, it is possible to use the attractiveness of the plurality of obstacle nails N having a golden color. That is, since a plurality of gold nails N are implanted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the plurality of gold nails N are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 can be visually recognized through transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the yellow surface-side notation portion (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solid-coated.

  Similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 also contributes to making the presence of the front side notation part difficult to understand. That is, since a plurality of gold nails N are implanted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the plurality of gold nails N are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. Viewing the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration board 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 through transparent decorations such as the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250. Even if possible, yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 ) Contributes to making the presence of the front side notation difficult to understand.

  In addition, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the front side notation. That is, since a plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color. The front (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is passed through the transparent inner and outer decorations 3310 and 3321 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300. Even when it is visible, or through the transparent underbody decorations 3310 and underneath intermediate decoration body 3328 of the underground middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. , Even if the front side (front surface) of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 of the underside medium presentation unit 3300 can be visually recognized, A yellow color (similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk-screen printing on the white resist solidly coated on the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the unit 3250. ) Contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the notation on the front side.

  In addition, for example, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 are turned off, the surface of the lower left decorative board 3203 is The front side notation part formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the back side, the bottom back left decoration body 3202 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, and the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 as a transparent decoration. Although visible through the body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 serves as a white background, so that the front of the surface of the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 can be seen. The obstruction nail N having a golden color from the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is attracted by the obstruction nail N having a golden color which is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged at So that the line-of-sight is induced with nature. Thus, even when the lower back left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the obstruction nail N having a gold color attracts the eyes, and thus the surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 is attracted. Since the white coating film formed on the game machine can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  As with the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250 can also suppress the deterioration of decorativeness. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 are turned off, the light is formed on the surface of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253. The front side notation portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film to be formed, a transparent decoration body of the lower back right decoration unit 3252 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251, Then, although it becomes visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 has a white background, and thus is disposed in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The gaze from the surface of the lower right back decoration board 3253 to the gold-colored obstacle nail N by the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nail N implanted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 to be seen The be induced with nature. Thus, even when the lower back right decorative board 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the obstruction nail N having the gold color attracts the eyes, and the lower back right decorative board 3253 has a front surface. Since the white coating film formed on the game machine can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is also capable of suppressing a decrease in decorativeness. That is, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle lower decorative substrate 3322 is turned off. The front-side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating formed on the surface of the lower surface is referred to as the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, and the lower lower back first First decorative substrate 3322 under the back due to the attractiveness of gold obstruction nail N implanted on the surface of transparent gaming panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of decorative substrate 3322 Gaze from the surface to the nails N having a gold color is to be derived naturally. In addition, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle decorative unit 3300 are turned off, the second lower back middle decorative board 3329 is provided. The front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the surface of the underside of the underside middle decorative body 3328 and the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back left production unit 3200. Although it is visible through the transparent decoration panel 1100 and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, so the second underside second decorative Due to the attractiveness of the obstruction nail N having a golden color which is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329, a gold color is provided from the surface of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. To nails N line of sight is to be induced and natural that. Thereby, even when the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the obstruction nail N having a gold color attracts the eye. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100. Instead, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The sheet has a portion designed in gold (the same color as the gold possessed by the plurality of obstacle nails N or a color close to the gold). The lower back left decoration board in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 through transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating decoration body 3201 and the lower back left decoration body 3202 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 arranged at the rear of the drawn part. Even if the front surface (front surface) of 3203 can be visually recognized, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is solid-painted. Contribute to obscuring the presence of the surface representation of the yellow (color similar to gold with the portion designed cell sheets) printed by silk printing on a white resist. In a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 are turned off, they are formed on the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203. A front side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating film is a transparent decoration body of a lower back left decoration body 3202 of a lower back left rendering unit 3200 and a lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 and a transparent decoration body Although it becomes visible through the simple game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 has a white background, and is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is connected to the cell sheet. Gold to the design portion in the line of sight is to be induced and natural that. With this, even when the lower back left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet is attracted to the lower back left decorative board. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of 3203 can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Also, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N or the same color). There is a part designed in a color close to gold), and the lower back right production unit 3250 arranged behind the part designed in gold due to the attractiveness of the part designed in gold also causes a decrease in decorativeness. Can be suppressed. That is, when a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decoration board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 are turned off, the light is formed on the front surface of the back lower right decoration board 3253. The front side notation portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating, which is a transparent decoration body such as a lower back right decoration body 3252 of a lower back right production unit 3250, and a lower back right rotation decoration body 3251. Then, though it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 becomes a white background, and thus is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. From the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 to the celsi Line-of-sight to the design portion in gold is to be induced and natural in the door. Thus, even when the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet is attracted to the lower back right decorative substrate. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3253 can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is colored gold (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N or the same color). There is a part designed in a color close to gold), and the lower back middle production unit 3300 arranged behind the gold-designed part due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed part also reduces the decorativeness. Can be suppressed. That is, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle lower decorative substrate 3322 is turned off. The front-side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating formed on the surface of the lower surface is referred to as the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, and the lower lower back first The lower part of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of the decorative substrate 3322 is attracted by the gold-designed part of the cell sheet, and the lower part is under the back. So that the line of sight from the surface one decorative substrate 3322 to nails N with gold is derived naturally. In addition, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle decorative unit 3300 are turned off, the second lower back middle decorative board 3329 is provided. The front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the surface of the underside of the underside middle decorative body 3328 and the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back left production unit 3200. Although it is visible through the transparent decoration panel 1100 and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, so the second underside second decorative The second decorative substrate 332 under the back underneath by the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. Surface line of sight to the nails N having a gold color is to be derived naturally from. Thus, even when the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the gold-colored portion of the cell sheet can be seen. Is attracted, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse . Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the above-described second embodiment (hereinafter, may be referred to as “various decorative boards included in the door frame 3”). For example, a handle decoration board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38, a dish upper left decoration board 273 provided in the dish upper left decoration unit 270 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and a dish upper right shown in FIGS. The upper right decorative plate 278 provided in the decorative unit 275, the lower left decorative substrate 283 provided in the lower left decorative unit 280 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the right plate provided in the lower right decorative unit 285 shown in FIGS. The lower decorative board 288, the upper dish center decorative board 314 provided in the effect operating unit cover unit 310 of the effect operating unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, the effect shown in FIG. The decoration base plate 316 provided in the production operation unit cover unit 310 for the production operation unit 300, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided for the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, and the production operation buttons of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. The central button decoration board 376 provided in the unit 360, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60, and the door frame left side provided in the door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. The decorative substrate 402, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, and FIG. Door frame top center decorative board 455 provided in the illustrated door frame top unit 450, figure There is a door frame top left decorative board 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 4, a door frame top right decorative board 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, and the like. ) And a white coating film formed by applying a resist liquid having a white back surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) to form a white resist layer. And a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) can be specified on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the notation such as the part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the reflectance is reduced according to the above-described second embodiment. With the effect of the configuration of the countermeasure such as the above, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from lowering due to the emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, there is an effect that the player can prevent a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged from being visually recognized by the player. (Measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken).

  Here, the members arranged on the front (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 will be briefly described. The front surface (front surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 provided on the handle unit 180 is 38, a transparent inner lens 185a and a transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in this order in the order of the front, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as the inner lens 185a and the handle cover 185. ing. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front (front surface) of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 provided in the dish upper left decoration unit 270 is directed forward to a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272, and a transparent dish upper left decorative body. 271 and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as the upper left dish inner lens 272 and the upper left dish decoration 271. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front (front side) of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 provided in the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is directed forward to a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent dish upper right decorative body. 276, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a dish upper right inner lens 277 and a dish upper right decorative body 276. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 provided in the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. They are arranged in the order of 281 and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the dish lower left inner lens 282 and the dish lower left decorative body 281. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 provided in the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, toward the front, a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent plate. The lower right decorative body 286 is arranged in this order, and is covered by the door lower side inner lens 287, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and other transparent members on the door frame side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 provided in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 has a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 and a transparent plate center. The upper decorative body 312a is arranged in this order, and is covered with the plate center upper inner lens 313, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the like, which are the door frame side transparent members. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 is a transparent dish center lower inner lens 315 and a transparent dish lower center decoration. They are arranged in the order of the body 312b, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the dish center lower inner lens 315 and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent decoration substrate cover 353, a transparent ring mounting base 331, and a transparent rotation operation unit 302 in this order. And is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the decorative substrate cover 353, the ring attachment base 331, and the rotation operation unit 302. As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent center button cover 375 is disposed on the upper surface (front surface) of the central button decoration board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and a door frame such as the center button cover 375 is provided. It is covered by the side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (front surface) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 has a transparent outer substrate cover 378, a transparent outer decoration inner lens 379, and a transparent outer decoration inner lens 379. The outer peripheral button covers 380 are arranged in this order, and are covered by door frame side transparent members such as the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 is directed forward to the transparent left side inner lens 403 and the transparent door frame. They are arranged in the order of the left side decorative body 404, and are covered by the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame side transparent member such as the door frame left side decorative body 404. As shown in FIG. 70, the front side (front surface) of the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window provided in the door frame right side unit 410 is directed forward to the transparent inner lens 414 and the transparent side window decoration. The parts are arranged in the order of the part 410b, and are covered by the door inner side transparent member such as the inner inner lens 414 and the decoration part 410b in the side window. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame right side decorative board 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 is directed forward with a transparent right side inner lens 415 and a transparent door frame right side. The decorative members 419 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the door frame side transparent members such as the right side inner lens 415 and the door frame right side decorative member 419.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top center inner lens 458 and a transparent door frame top as shown in FIG. The decorative members 453 are arranged in this order, and are covered by a top frame inner lens 458 and a door frame side transparent member such as a door frame top decorative member 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is directed forward, with a transparent top left inner lens 459 and a transparent door frame top decorative body. 453, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a top left inner lens 459 and a door frame top decorative body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is directed forward to a transparent top right inner lens 460 and a transparent door frame top decorative body. 453, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a top right inner lens 460 and a door frame top decorative body 453.

  As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is covered with the door frame side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered with the door frame side transparent member.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the electric decoration by the light emitting portions such as the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the door frame 3 can be used. LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) have various light emission modes depending on whether they are turned on (emits light) or turned off. For this reason, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 through the door frame side transparent member, and the player can enjoy the game. It is inefficient that there is a possibility that interest may decrease, and that the effect member provided with the decorative substrate on which the LED to be turned off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect at all.

  Therefore, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 which adopts the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative board mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is mounted. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the door frame side transparent by a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 The members are made to look as if they were white members. Thereby, even if the light emission effect by a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) is not progressing, the light emitting effect is formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the white coating film can effectively reflect and emit outside light, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be achieved by emitting outside light of various colors from the door frame side transparent member to the outside. That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is a door. Since it is covered by the frame-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 are turned off. In this state, the door frame side transparent member looks like a white member by the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. This is a case where each decoration board provided on the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, and a state in which a plurality of LEDs (a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) does not progress light emission. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light, various colors can be used. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hardly broken by emitting the outside light from the door frame side transparent member to the outside. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment is coated with a white resist liquid as described above. Then, a white coating film is formed and is covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the upper left decoration 271, the upper right decoration 276, the lower left decoration 281, the lower right decoration 286, the upper decoration 312a, and the lower decoration 312b are provided. , The rotation operation unit 302, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are as described above. Thus, it is formed transparent. On the other hand, among the transparent members on the game board side covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the above-mentioned game board 5, the decorative sheet 3112, the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201, the back Lower left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper decoration 3451, the back left rotation decoration 3510, the back left decoration 3521, the back right rotation decoration 3610, and the back back right decoration 3621 have the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed.

  Briefly describing this, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the player with an effect having a different world view by replacing the game board. In order to suppress the manufacturing cost of various substrates provided on a door frame or a game board, inexpensive green color is generally used as a resist liquid applied to various substrates. However, when providing a brilliant effect to the player by the cooperation of the light emitting effect by the game board and the light emitting effect by the door frame, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame is turned off. The green color of the resist solution applied to the game board may be visually recognized as it is, which may disturb the world view of the game board without matching the world view of the game board, which may cause the player to wake up and the interest of the game to deteriorate.

  Therefore, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 which adopts the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative board mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is mounted. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the door frame side transparent by a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 The members are made to look as if they were white members. Accordingly, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be variously changed. By using a white background that is easy to be dyed in various colors, the world view of the game board can be easily dyed, and the world view of the game board can be hardly collapsed. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, as described above, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the door frame side transparent member formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is a white member. The appearance as if it is, it is possible to avoid disagreeing with the world view of the replaced game board.

  Further, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”), and is covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, for example, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are formed transparently, and a production operation unit is provided. Surfaces of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in 300, the central button decoration substrate 376 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, etc. Through the corresponding transparent member on the side of the door frame. The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is inconspicuous when the background is white, and when the surface side notation is yellow, the yellow surface side Notation part is hard to stand out. As described above, the front side notation allows the front side electronic component mounted on the front side (front side) or the top side (front side) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to be specified. Attributes of the front-side electronic component, such as the component number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the shape of the front-side electronic component; (Mounting direction) and may include the type of the front-side electronic component.)

  On the other hand, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310 is a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid green color”). Of the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like (further, The front side notation part showing the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be white. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with paint. The power supply board 630 is housed in a transparent power supply board cover 631, and is provided with a power switch 630 a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and is exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 and provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM, and is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320. The power switch 630a is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the power switch 630a. It is located at a position where it is difficult for people to see.

  The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. For this reason, if the background is a color that is closer to black than white, white will be conspicuous, and in the combination of green and white, white will be conspicuous if the background is green, and the surface side notation will be white In this case, the green surface side notation is conspicuous with respect to the green resist. That is, a white front side notation portion (white rear side notation portion for a green resist) is conspicuous for a green resist solidly painted on the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. .

  In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize, the white color of the paint printed by silk printing with respect to the green color of the resist liquid is a combination that is easily visible. Also, the front side notation such as the electronic part number which has no relation to the game for the player does not have to be visually recognized by the player through the transparent power supply board cover 631 and the transparent main control board box 1320. On the other hand, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are arranged at positions easily visible to the player, and the resist solution Because the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is a combination that is not easily visible against the white color, the rotary operation unit where the front side notation part such as electronic part number etc. that has nothing to do with the game for the player is transparent It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize through the 302 and the transparent pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 included in the effect operation unit 300, the central button decoration board 376 included in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 included in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. Even when a decorative substrate such as is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. Is placed at a position where the player can easily see it, and the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see with respect to the white color of the resist liquid, so it is completely related to the game for the player. The rotary operation unit 302 and the transparent pressing operation unit 303, which have a transparent notation on the front side of electronic parts numbers, etc. It can be hardly viewed by the player in. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[White coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, when the player plays a game, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally hits the obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball fired toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player hits the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further stacked on the packed game balls, and the state is such that the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall to have the grape-shaped game balls removed. A clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, called by a player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects that the door frame 3 has been opened, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decorative board to the game board 5. In addition to performing control to turn off a plurality of LEDs to be mounted, all the movable members provided on the game board 5 are controlled so as to be maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not they are operating. Of the game board at the time. " Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not the movable body is operated, while performing control for lighting the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed.

  Also, when the game balls are clogged in the nose for supplying game balls of the island equipment in the game hall, the game balls from the island equipment in the game hall are not supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game balls are not paid out to the player, When the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the like shown in FIG. 77 are clogged with balls and the game balls are no longer paid out to the player, the player moves to the game hall. A clerk such as a clerk will be called to have the ball cleared. A clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, called by the player opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decorative board to the game board 5. As described above, control is performed to turn off a plurality of LEDs mounted on the board, and control is performed so as to maintain each movable body included in the game board 5 at a position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control of the game board at the time of opening" is performed. Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board included in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the open position regardless of whether it is operating or not. The above-described "control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed as described above.

  When the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, the front frame is opened), control and / or opening of the game board at the time of opening When performing control of the door frame at the time, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board included in the game board 5 and / or a specific LED among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board included in the door frame 3 ( For example, all the lights are turned off except for the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Therefore, in the state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can make various decorations on the game board 5. The front surface (front surface) of the board can be visually recognized through the game board side transparent member and / or a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) is provided. Except for the decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to be mounted, the front surface (front surface) of each of the other decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, and the player can play the game. There is a possibility that interest may be reduced, and when the door frame 3 is opened to the main frame 4 or when the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, when the front frame is opened). Even in the state where the effect is progressing along the schedule data, the player cannot visually recognize the state in which the effect progresses, but the game is performed by the effect member provided with the decorative board on which the LED that is turned off is mounted. Cannot convey the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) to the user, and experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). Play a period during which you cannot Fear also that this may create in.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, each decoration provided on the front frame (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full-color capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3”) When the (LED) is turned off, the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member are white members by a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. It looks like it. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 prevents external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be achieved by emitting external light of various colors from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside. The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be transmitted to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be experienced.

  In a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate are turned off. The game board-side transparent member and the door frame-side transparent member are made to look as if they are white members by the white coating film. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 prevents external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be achieved by emitting external light of various colors from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside. The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be transmitted to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be experienced.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3”). The front cover (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above.) The handle cover 185 and the upper left decorative plate 271 of the door frame side transparent member that covers the white coating film formed on the , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are formed transparent, whereas each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is provided. Front (surface Among the transparent members on the game board side that cover the white coating film formed on the game board, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and the lower back right decorative body 3252 , Lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left The decorative body 3521, the back right rotating decorative body 3610, and the back right decorative body 3621 have a predetermined color according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The difference is that a plurality of dots (in this embodiment, pink) are formed by printing. Among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative member 271 and the upper right decorative member 276 are provided. , Plate lower left decorative body 81, lower right decorative piece 286, upper central decorative piece 312a, lower central decorative piece 312b, rotary operation section 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decorative body 404, side window decoration The part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 have predetermined colors according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). A plurality of (pink in this embodiment) dots may be applied by printing.

  That is, among the door frame side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative member 271 and the upper right decorative plate Body 276, lower left decorative body 281, lower right decorative body 286, upper central decorative body 312 a, lower central decorative body 312 b, rotation operation section 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, left side door frame decoration The game that covers the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the body 404, the decorative portion 410 b in the side window, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, the top decorative body 453 of the door frame, and each decorative board provided in the game board 5 Among the board-side transparent members, decorative sheet 3112, lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, lower back left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Top front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear right rotating decorative body The same predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is applied to the 3610 and the back right right decorative body 3621. ) May be applied by printing. By doing so, the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is made one, so that the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is further improved. Can be expressed. In other words, the color related to the door frame side transparent member and the game board side transparent member (associative color) is in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). (Eg, colors with gradations, colors about the sea, sky, space, colors about animals and plants, colors about vehicles, colors about sports, colors about fire, colors about fire, colors about rain, snow, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation , Beaches, hot springs, ski areas, etc.) or the same color is applied to make the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, , The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be expressed more.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 Door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above. , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed to be transparent, but they are formed with respect to the contour of the door frame side transparent member. With metallic luster Metal decoration (gold) or metal decoration with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat design or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member. Is also good. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is replaced with the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 has a white background, so that the color ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of gold). Becomes As a result, the metal decoration portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member attracts an eye, and thus the white color formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 The coating film can be made difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 Door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above. , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed to be transparent, but they are formed with respect to the contour of the door frame side transparent member. With metallic luster Metal decoration (gold) or metal decoration with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat design or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member. Is also good. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is replaced with the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 has a white background, so that the color ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of gold). Becomes Thereby, even when each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration visible to a player, the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member attracts attention. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist. The front side (front side) or the top side of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member through the door frame side transparent member so that the full color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be identified. The front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative part, because the white coating film formed on the (front surface) has a white background. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member from the above, the front side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part. hand Even, so that it is possible to obscure the presence of the yellow silk printing.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d (the decoration provided (arranged) in front of the decorative body 3111) in the decorative body 3111 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b). (Including the hologram portion in the first contour portion 3112a of the sheet 3112.), the metal decoration portion 3310a of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 shown in FIG. 163, and the front cover of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193. The metal decoration portion 3711a in 3711, the metal decoration portion in the game board 5 such as the metal decoration portion 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810 shown in FIG. Although it was configured to have, the metal decorative portion in each decorative body provided in the game board 5 should be a predetermined color. It may be configured to have an opaque gold color, may be configured to have a translucent (translucent) gold color as a predetermined color, or may have an opaque gold color as a predetermined color It may be composed of a mixture of a material and a material having a translucent (translucent) gold color. In the modified examples described below, the same applies, and the metal decorative portions are all configured to have a gold color as a predetermined color. However, the metal decorative portions in each decorative body provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 have a predetermined shape. All the colors may be configured to have an opaque gold color, the predetermined colors may be configured to have a translucent (translucent) gold color, or the predetermined colors may be opaque. A structure having a gold color and a structure having a translucent (translucent) gold color may be mixed.

[Deformation in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part) Example 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110 will be described as the decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), facing forward. The decorative sheet 3112 and the transparent flat decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent, except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). On the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A), a white-colored resist layer is formed, and the surface-side notation that enables a multicolor light-emitting full-color LED to be printed on the solid-colored white-colored resist by silk printing has a yellow color. Have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, furthermore, by forming a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111, the entire structure excluding the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. You may comprise so that an area may be surrounded.

  In this case, a metal decoration portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decoration body 3111, and the entirety excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d is surrounded by a colorless and transparent region shown in FIG. The sizes and arrangements of the metal decorative portions 3111d of the shaded portions shown in FIGS. 149 to 149) and other members related to the metal decorative portions 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 has a metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the metal decoration is achieved. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metallic decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is made to have a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111. Can be visually recognized through a transparent region except for the metal decoration portion 3111d having the following, but the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration part 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made less visible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on a solid-colored white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114. The front side notation portion having yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through a transparent region of the decoration 3111 excluding the metal decoration 3111d having metallic luster. However, since the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, the front surface (back surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (front surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the front side notation portion is the metal decorative portion 31. Even 1d of being printed by silk screen printing in yellow similar to the color (gold), it can be difficult to understand the existence of this yellow silk printing.

[Deformation in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent region or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion) Example 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110 will be described as the decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), facing forward. The decorative sheet 3112 and the transparent flat decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent, except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). On the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A), a white-colored resist layer is formed, and the surface-side notation that enables a multicolor light-emitting full-color LED to be printed on the solid-colored white-colored resist by silk printing has a yellow color. Have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front side notation, for example, a solid white color is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d by a thick solid line or a figure having another shape. You may comprise so that it may be printed in yellow by silk printing on a resist.

  In this case, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d. As described above, the size and arrangement of the metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portion shown in FIGS. 147 to 149) and other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be appropriately changed.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 has a metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the metal decoration is achieved. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metallic decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is made to have a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111. Can be visually recognized through a transparent region except for the metal decoration portion 3111d having the following, but the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration part 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made less visible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Even with such a configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, silk-screen printing is performed on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. In addition to the surface-side notation part having a yellow color that makes it possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a graphic having a thick solid line or another shape is excluded from the decorative body 3111 except the metallic decorative part 3111d having a metallic luster. Although visible through the transparent area, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d has a color (gold color). ), The line of sight is naturally attracted from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Therefore, even if a figure having a thick solid line or another shape is printed with a yellow color similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d in addition to the front side notation portion, the yellow silk printing Can be difficult to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged at the joint of the transparent frame side transparent members arranged in front of the yellow silk-printed substrate]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 May be referred to as "the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in".) A door frame side transparent member (for example, a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration) that covers a white coating film formed on the decoration substrate. Body 276, plate left lower decoration 281, plate right lower decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side decoration 419, and door frame top Although the decoration body 453 is formed transparent, a joint between the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the upper side of the door frame left side decoration body 404 (the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame left side). As if the upper side of the decorative body 404 is connected A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the lower part of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in a part designed to be obtained. A metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided on the eyes (a portion designed so that the lower side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the upper left plate decorative body 271 are connected to each other) ( The joint between the right side of the upper left dish 271 and the left side of the upper center dish 312a (so that the right side of the upper left dish 271 and the left side of the upper center dish 312a are connected to each other). A metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the portion designed to be visible so that the right side of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the left side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 are joined ( Right of the decoration body 312a on the center of the plate And the left side of the dish upper right decoration 276 are designed (formed) so that a metal decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided (formed) on the plate upper right ornament 276. A joint between the right side and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (a portion designed so that the right side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 are connected to each other) A metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided (formed) on the upper side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 and the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453 (door frame right side decorative body). A metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster may be provided (formed) in a portion designed so that the upper side of 419 and the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453 are connected). . In addition, a joint between the right side of the lower left plate decorative body 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decorative body 312b (the design is made so that the right side of the lower left plate decorative body 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decorative body 312b appear to be connected to each other. Is provided (formed) with a metallic decoration portion (gold) having a metallic luster, and a joint between the right side of the lower plate center decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right plate decorative body 286 (lower center of the plate) A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) so that the right side of the decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right decorative body 286 are connected to each other. Is also good. In this manner, a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided as a joint between the door frame side transparent members (a portion designed so that adjacent door frame side transparent members are connected to each other). By (forming), the joint can be blindfolded.

[Modification in which a golden material (glossy sheet member) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
In the above-described embodiment, the center accessory 2500 projects from the outer periphery of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame), and is a flat flange that contacts the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The flange portion 2502 is provided with a glossy sheet member having a glitter that shines in a particle shape (in a color of gold or a mixture of gold colors) on the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and a rear side of the glossy sheet member. In addition, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors may be mounted on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front, and even if the glossy sheet member is arranged so as to cover all or a part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate. It may be arranged in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction without covering the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate at all, or may have a distance dimension of about 5 mm to 10 mm, for example, in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. They may be arranged apart from each other. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side of the etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement and have a gold color are planted. As described above, in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a glossy sheet member having a glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a mixture of gold) and a plurality of obstacle nails N having gold are arranged. Therefore, the presence of the decorative substrate is made indistinct by the luster sheet member having glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a mixture of gold) and the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having gold. Even if the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be seen through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, it can be silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the presence of the yellow-colored surface (a color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member or the obstacle nail N) that is printed.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted is arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 and the decorative board are arranged. You may arrange | position the inner lens formed in three dimensions by the transparent member between and. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that the lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate disposed behind the inner lens. In addition, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the inner lens, the inner lens may be arranged to cover all or a part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate when the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side of the etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement and have a gold color are planted. A plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board, but yellow (obstruction nail N) printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the decorative board. Has no relationship with the decorative portion on the surface side of the surface (not shown). The presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be determined by the area where the inner lens is lens-cut. It can be difficult to understand.

[Modification 1 in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk and a transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the logo decoration body having the logo (logo decoration movable body) may be provided on the game board 5 so as to operate. The logo decorative body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decorative body, a decorative substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decorative substrate. is there. In the front decorative body, a logo area (for example, an area of a character portion of “ABC”) is formed transparent, and other areas except the logo area are formed as a metal decorative part (gold) having metallic luster. I have. That is, the logo area is surrounded by a metal decoration part (gold) having a metallic luster. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that the lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate disposed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side of the etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. The presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the metal decoration part having a metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface side notation part is subjected to lens cutting on the inner lens. Area can make it more difficult to understand.

[Variation 2 in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk and a transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
In the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a graphic decoration having a predetermined graphic (a graphic decoration movable body) operates. The figure decorative body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decorative body, a decorative substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decorative substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster on an outer peripheral portion thereof and a metallic decorative portion having a metallic luster on an outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, a central portion). (Gold) is formed. Then, in this one area (for example, a central part), in addition to a figure area (for example, an eyelid part, a human body mouth part, a human body ear part among human eyes, a character, a number, a graphic, and a symbol) , Etc., which are appropriately combined with these letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc.) are formed as a metal decorative part (gold) having metallic luster. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on an outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, a central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. The region extending to the outside of the held metal decoration (gold) is transparently formed. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster in one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). A region extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having a pattern is formed transparently. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that the lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate disposed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side of the etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint.

  That is, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. An area extending to the outside of the metal decoration portion (gold color) is transparently formed, and a metal decoration portion (gold color) with a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion of one area (for example, the central portion). Since the region extending from the inner side to the outer side of the outer peripheral part of the region where the graphic region is formed as the metal decorative portion (gold color) having a metallic luster in one region (for example, the central portion) is formed transparently, The transparent area is surrounded by a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to recognize by the gold attractiveness of the metal decorative portion having a metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion can be used as the lens for the inner lens. The region where the cut is made can be made harder to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk and surrounds the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
In the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a graphic decoration having a predetermined graphic (a graphic decoration movable body) operates. The figure decorative body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decorative body, a decorative substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decorative substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a figure area (for example, a hexagon or octagon in addition to an eyelid part, a human body mouth part, a human body ear part, etc.) in one area (for example, a center part). It is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster, and a region surrounding this partial region is formed transparent. That is, the metal decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster is surrounded by the transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, a central part) and as an eyelid among eyeballs of a human body, a metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is formed on the upper and lower eyelids. The upper eyelid opens from the lower eyelid as the eyelid, and the opened part and the other area except the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid are formed transparently. In other words, the upper and lower eyelids, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic region in one region (for example, a central portion) and as a mouth of a human body, a metallic decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster becomes an upper lip and a lower lip, and an upper lip. Is opened from the lower lip, and the opened portion and the other area except the upper lip and the lower lip are formed transparently. In other words, the upper lip and the lower lip, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having a metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. Further, when the front decoration is formed as a figure area in one area (for example, the central portion) as a human ear, a hexagon, or an octagon, a metal decoration portion (gold color) having a metallic luster is formed in the ear. (The inner region of the ear may be formed transparent, may be formed to be translucent in a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed opaque), The outer peripheral portion of the hexagon (the inner area of the hexagon may be formed transparent, may be formed to be transparent with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed opaque. .), The outer periphery of the octagon (the inner area of the octagon may be formed transparent, or may be formed to be translucent by a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or formed opaque). , But other regions except the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body are transparently formed. That is, the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having metallic luster, are surrounded by transparent regions. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that the lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate disposed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side of the etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In other words, since the metal decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area, the metal decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board. It is surrounded by the white color of the white resist. As described above, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the gold attractiveness of the metal decorative portion having the metallic luster. The region where the cut is made can be made harder to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is arranged at the standby position (original position) below the lower side. As shown in FIG. 201, in a state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the region where the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) includes the decoration board. Elimination of the existence makes it impossible to perform a light emission effect in this area. Therefore, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are arranged. In order not to interfere, the front (front) surface of the decorative board may be arranged toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) behind the back-and-under middle rotary decorative body 3310. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. When the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the standby position (original position), the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is covered by the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, so that when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, The presence of the decorative substrate is not known at all.

  However, as the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the decoration substrate arranged behind the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 gradually appears and becomes visible. Therefore, control is performed so that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light during the period from when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 starts moving to the raised position until it returns to the standby position (original position) again. To be done. As a result, since the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the presence of the yellow front side marking portion printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board can be understood. Can be difficult. Further, the yellow front side notation printed on the white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate by silk printing is the metal of the lower back middle decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. It has a color similar to the gold color of the decorative portion 3310a, and furthermore, even if the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate is the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Since the metal decoration portion 3310a can be placed in the vicinity of the metal decoration portion 3310a, the metal decoration portion 3310a having a gold color starts to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to the ascending position and the decoration substrate can be visually recognized. Even if it is in a state, it is yellow printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on a decorative substrate (the metal decorative portion 3310a has It is possible to obscure the presence of the surface-side representation of the colors) similar to the color. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold nails N which are in contact with the game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement are planted. Even if the decoration substrate is started to move to the ascending position by moving the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to a position where the decoration substrate is visible, the decoration substrate is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the front side notation portion of yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N).

[Avoidance of arrangement of front side display part printed by silk printing]
Next, a brief description will be given of the avoidance of concentration of the front side display unit printed by silk printing with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 illustrates a method of arranging a front surface display unit capable of specifying a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative substrate and LEDs corresponding to the plurality of LEDs, respectively. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a distributed arrangement (No. 1) and (b). Note that pads, through holes, lands, and the like are omitted in FIGS. 270 (a) to (d). Further, the decorative substrates KC of FIGS. 270 (a) to (d) are the same as the decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 which adopts the above-described measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is shown as an example of each decorative substrate provided.

  On the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, a white resist film is applied to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) to form a white color. Corresponds to a full-color LED that has a resist layer formed on it and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC Of the electronic component such as the component number to be placed, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, and the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction of the electronic component (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component Is printed by silk printing with yellow paint.

  First, consider a case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. The areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs will be printed by silk printing with yellow paint, for example, as shown in FIG. 270 (a). FIG. 270 (b) shows a case where the four full-color LEDs and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are concentrated in a region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged; ), All the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged are surrounded. The outside, as in the case of distributed that arranged distributed without concentrating part numbers KCn1~KCn4 corresponding to four full-color LED, try to consider.

  In addition, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the positions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the distributed arrangement. It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

  In both the concentrated arrangement and the distributed arrangement, the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, it may include a connector.) And are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the areas printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

  In addition, a region except for a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint (that is, a white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively). Of the decorative substrate KC with respect to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy”) of the decorative substrate KC is larger than the yellow occupancy. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which white occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC due to the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution, the white occupancy is due to the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc. ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy occupying KCx, it is printed by silk printing even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player. Compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc., the white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, often enters the eyes of the player to make it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 and the like. Can contribute to. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of the centralized arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are concentrated in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Specifically, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and below the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged, a part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged above a region KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and above a region KCp4 indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. The component number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged.

  As described above, in the case where the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally arranged in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance, but a reflectance reduction region where the reflection efficiency is reduced is formed. Also, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn1 The presence of KCn4 is conspicuous.

  That is, in the case of the centralized arrangement, in a local area, which is an area surrounding all of the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, the white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is used. In comparison, the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 is more likely to be noticed by the player, and it is easy to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, decorativeness may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are dispersed without being concentrated outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. It is arranged. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged at the upper left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and the upper right of the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. On the other hand, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged, the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged at the lower left of the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged The part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged at the lower right of KCp4.

  As described above, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are not locally arranged at all in the area surrounding the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged. When the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the LEDs 4 are arranged, the part numbers corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Since the above-described reflectance-reduced regions formed by arranging KCn1 to KCn4 in a concentrated manner are not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn1 are not formed. High reflectivity due to KCn4 can be maintained. In addition, since the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are dispersed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 Is not noticeable.

  In other words, in the local area, which is the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged, the yellow occupancy is higher in the case of the centralized arrangement than in the case of the distributed arrangement. (In the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with the yellow paint, respectively, by the ratio to the local area of the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC). The yellow occupancy rate (the local area of the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC in the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with the yellow paint, respectively, is adopted in comparison with the case of the centralized arrangement. Is reduced by the ratio of As described above, in the local area, which is the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged, the case where the distributed arrangement is adopted is compared with the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, is more likely to enter the eyes of the player, making it difficult to notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Even if the case of the distributed arrangement is adopted, four full-color LEDs correspond to other electronic components in a region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged. In some cases, one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 must be arranged, but even in this case, the yellow occupancy rate is higher in the case of the centralized arrangement than in the case of the distributed arrangement ( In the regions of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively, the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is increased by the ratio to the local region.

  In the case of the distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as the arrangement method of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270 (b), for example, one of the four full-color LEDs is selected as a full-color LED (other electronic components may be used) as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED 4 are arranged are the regions KCp 1 to KCp 4 which indicate the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED 4 are arranged. First, the full-color LED 3 is arranged so as to be outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the full-color LED 3 with a first distance Ph that is a predetermined multiple of the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 from each other. The LED 4 is arranged to the right of the full-color LED 3 with a second distance Pw that is a predetermined multiple of the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3, and the full-color LED 2 is a first distance that is a predetermined number of the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3. Ph and the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number Distance Pw spaced placed right above the full-color LED 3. In addition, the position where LED1, LED2, and LED4 are arranged may be the same value as the predetermined number of times described above, or may be individually changed. What is necessary is just to select so that it may be outside the area | region surrounding all the area | regions KCp1-KCp4 which show the position where the full-color LED1-LED4 is arrange | positioned.

  Next, considering a case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC, two front-side (front surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC have two adjacent full-color LEDs. The areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the parts are arranged and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two adjacent full-color LEDs are printed by silk printing with yellow paint, for example, FIG. 270 (c). As shown in FIG. 2, the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the areas KCp1 to KCp2 and the parts In the case of the centralized arrangement in which the numbers KCn1 and KCn2 are concentrated in the vicinity, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 0 (d), the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. Let's consider the case of the distributed arrangement.

  In addition, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the positions KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the distributed arrangement It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

  In both the centralized arrangement and the distributed arrangement, areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating positions where two full-color LEDs are arranged, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistance, capacitor, And a connector may be included in addition to the IC.) And the silk printed by yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the area printed by silk printing by yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

  In addition, a region except for a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint (that is, a white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively). Of the decorative substrate KC with respect to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy”) of the decorative substrate KC is larger than the yellow occupancy. As described above, the white occupation ratio of the white color occupying the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is such that the yellow color is indicated by the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 and the like. ) Since the yellow occupation ratio occupying KCx is larger than that of the decorative substrate KC (white coating film), even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visually recognizable by a player, the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing. Compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, the white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is more likely to be noticed by the player and makes it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Can be contributed to. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn1. KCn2 is arranged in a concentrated manner. Specifically, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the vicinity KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and the position at which the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged above and near the area KCp2 shown.

  As described above, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are respectively arranged above and in the vicinity of the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions at which the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the parts corresponding to the two full-color LEDs Since the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are locally concentrated, the reflectance of yellow is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but the reflection efficiency is reduced even if it has a high reflectance. A rate-reduced region is formed.

  In other words, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, in a local area above and near the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs 1 to 2 adjacent to each other are arranged, a white coating film which is a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player is provided. Compared to white, the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 is more likely to be noticed by the player and the player can easily notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Therefore, decorativeness may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. Have been placed. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is disposed at the lower left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is disposed, and the position at which the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is disposed. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged at the lower right of the area KCp2 shown.

  As described above, when the two full-color LEDs and the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed and arranged at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged, two full-color LEDs are Although the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are not locally concentrated and arranged at all, and the above-described reflectance-reduced regions are not formed at all, although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, High reflectance can be maintained by the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Further, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersedly arranged at positions distant from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. The presence of KCn2 is inconspicuous. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be set as the arrangement method of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270 (d), for example, one full-color LED (or other electronic component may be used) of two full-color LEDs is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions at which the full-color LEDs 1 and 2 are arranged are defined as areas KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions at which the full-color LEDs 1 and 2 are arranged. Part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are distributed so as to be outside the area surrounding all, that is, at positions distant from areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. After arranging the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 first, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is multiplied by a predetermined number for the width direction Nw of the full-color LED 1 in the left-right direction by a second distance Pw ' 2 distance Pw 'is at least a full color LED Of the full-color LED 1 is greater than or equal to the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 so that the distance is equal to the minimum character string length of the full-color LED 1). Place it to the right. In addition, a part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is disposed at another location along the vertical direction of the full-color LED 2 disposed to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is disposed In the case where the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged at the upper right of the KCp2), the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 is multiplied by a predetermined number in the vertical direction, and the second distance Ph '(the second distance Ph' is A relationship larger or equal to the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 is established so that at least the height of the character string of the full-color LED 1 is a distance away from the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1. To place. The value of the predetermined number of times for the horizontal direction and the value of the predetermined number of times for the vertical direction may be the same value or may be individually changed. The parts numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs may be selected so as to be dispersedly arranged at a position apart from the position where the LED2 is arranged.

  In the case of the distributed arrangement, the arrangement method of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED is, for example, a case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC. Of the two full-color LEDs, with respect to one full-color LED, another full-color LED is arranged at one of the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left of one full-color LED. One of the full-color LEDs is selected based on one full-color LED (other electronic components may be used), and the width and height of the selected one full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be arranged apart from each other by the second distance Pw ′ and / or the second distance Ph ′ described above, the position at which the two full-color LEDs are arranged is determined. The part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs can be dispersedly arranged at positions away from the indicated areas KCp1 to KCp2.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine provided with a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member for covering the decorative substrate was arranged in front of the light emitting means provided in the gaming machine. By the way, when the decorative member is formed of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decorative substrate can be visually recognized as it is in a state where the light emitting means is turned off, so that the world view of the gaming machine is destroyed and aroused. There was a risk that the entertainment interest of the game would be reduced.

  Further, conventionally, a game machine including a board provided with an operation unit has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112] and FIG. 9)). This substrate was housed in the housing member. By the way, when the housing member is formed of a transparent or translucent material, the electronic component number formed on the surface of the substrate on which the operation unit is provided is visually recognized through the housing member. However, since the electronic part number has nothing to do with the game for the player, there is a possibility that the world view of the gaming machine may be disrupted by the electronic part number being visually recognized through the housing member, thereby reducing the interest in the game. there were.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk printing has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-141683 (paragraphs [0047], [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness to achieve high reflectance. However, when a substrate is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, silk printing can also be visually recognized by the player, and there is a possibility that decorativeness may be reduced.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. This light emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decorative body. . The LED substrate 5070 has the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 mounted thereon as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is arranged in front of the light guide plate 5060. The decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of the diffusion sheet 5050. In the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip in the left-right direction, which are coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 258 as opaque regions at least at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075. Are formed.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting unit is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member through the light guide plate 5060 as the light guide member, but is transmitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member. Are formed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 as a light emitting means, and five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left and right direction applied with white paint are formed. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting means is mounted is applied with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque area without being brightly lit in the decorative body 5040 which is a decorative body like a point light source. Five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction. It is adapted to be softened by 0c5. Accordingly, since it is possible to contribute to evenly illuminating the surface 5060x that is the surface of the light guide plate 5060 that is the light guide member that faces the diffusion sheet 5050 that is a transparent member, it is possible to achieve a light emission effect of the decoration body 5040 that is a decoration body. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 is used as the conductive member, and FIG. A wiring routed to the space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249 is provided as a second wiring member, and a wire routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. . The metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, and the wiring routed to the outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is weak against the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed to the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is more resistant to electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  A metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on a bottom inner surface of a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the generation side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove is arranged and has a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 250 which is the other surface of the conductive member not facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. On the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove 1605a, a wiring routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged.

  As described above, the first wiring member is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 as the second wiring member, which is more resistant to the influence of the electromagnetic noise than the wiring led to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. The wiring routed into the space inside the groove is formed on the bottom inner surface of a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is a first wiring member, is arranged and is less susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise as compared with the wiring routed into the space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed to the formed space outside the groove is a groove 1 having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 which does not face the source of electromagnetic wave noise. By disposing on the bottom outer surface 1605d of the first wiring member 05a, the wiring routed to the outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, in the space affected by the electromagnetic wave noise; The wiring routed into the space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 as the wiring member can be mixed and arranged. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the flexible flat cable 5030 of FIG. 254 is provided as a planar wiring member. In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel as a plurality of conductors including a ground line as a power supply line and a control line and covered with an insulating material. The flat conductors on the both ends as the outermost conductors in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise are arranged as ground lines, which are power lines. In other words, among a plurality of flat conductors including a ground line serving as a power supply line and a control line, a ground line serving as a power supply line is disposed between a source of electromagnetic wave noise and the control line.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030, which is a planar wiring member, has a plurality of flat conductors, which are a plurality of conductors including a ground line, which is a power supply line, and a control line, and a power supply line. The ground line, which is a power line, is arranged between a control line and a source of electromagnetic wave noise among a plurality of flat conductors including a ground line, which is a line, and a control line. Noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved with respect to flat conductors other than the flat conductors on the both ends as the outermost conductor. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the sound of the door frame 3 in FIG. 10 as the front frame and the door frame top unit 450 in FIG. 73 as the light emitting device. It has a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 469. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are provided on the upper front surface as predetermined positions of the door frame 3. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can also emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3.

  Specifically, the pair of top-side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 respectively include a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property. (For example, polypropylene having a milky white color) and a magnet and a magnetic circuit part such as a yoke are formed in a cylindrical shape having a through hole penetrating in the front and back, and the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are casings. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, whereas the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, a sound is attached to a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) that extend rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative substrate 469 is attached. In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through the plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Has become. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

  As described above, the speaker brackets 463 are attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469 so that the acoustic decorative board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, they are emitted to the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear, and then the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Through the gap defined by the outer periphery of the door frame top base 451 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 to be emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451.

  The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 as described above. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same as the outer circumference of the through hole 451b at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451, and the through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, to the rear side. The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through a gap formed by the outer circumference of the substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. To the rear of.

  As described above, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 Of the door frame top unit 450 from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is opened. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. As a result, in the game hall, an acoustic decoration board of the door frame top unit 450 is provided to an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall passing through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey a notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the 469. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 from the front surface side and the rear surface side of the door frame 3.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and the front frame is the door frame 3 of FIG. 10, the front frame light emitting means is the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. 73, the top. It has a speaker illumination unit including a side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided on the door frame 3 and is capable of emitting light in a manner different from a normal time when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal or defective. Yes, when the door frame 3 is in the open state, it is provided on the door frame 3 so that it can be seen not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3 that light is emitted in a manner different from the normal state. ing.

  Specifically, the pair of top-side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 respectively include a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property. (For example, polypropylene having a milky white color) and a magnet and a magnetic circuit part such as a yoke are formed in a cylindrical shape having a through hole penetrating in the front and back, and the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are casings. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, whereas the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, a sound is attached to a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) that extend rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative substrate 469 is attached. As described above, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, so that the speaker illumination unit is assembled. In other words, the speaker decoration unit includes the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the sound decoration board 469, and the transparent plate. In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through the plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Has become. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

  The peripheral control board 1510 causes an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body). (Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or defect (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (standby position), etc.)) (hereinafter, "There is a case where it is described as" abnormality or failure occurrence ".) Is generated, the light emission data serving as a notification mode as a mode different from the above-mentioned normal mode is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. Output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). In addition, in the light emission mode of the effect mode (normal time), there are various light emission modes that combine lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., whereas in the notification mode (mode different from the normal time), it is predetermined. The different color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the color is turned on with the maximum brightness.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the door frame 3 which is the front frame is in an open state, the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or trouble can be visually recognized from the direction (front side) facing the front side of the door frame 3. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect from the direction (rear) facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect is exposed to the outside from both the direction facing the front surface side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. The light emission for notification can be visually recognized (that is, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect can be notified to the outside in a new mode in which both the front side of the door frame 3 faces and the rear side of the door frame 3 faces. ). As a result, in the game hall, both the aisle side that faces the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side that faces the rear side of the door frame 3 cause abnormalities and troubles to the staff such as the clerk in the game hall. It can be transmitted quickly, and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the lottery is performed based on the result of the starting condition, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and the predetermined result is displayed as the variable display of the symbol. A gaming machine that gives a specific gaming profit to the player by deriving a winning variation result, and a gaming board provided with a symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbols, and the gaming board are provided. A frame body, a front frame that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame body, a detection unit that detects an open / closed state of the front frame, and an open state of the front frame that is provided on the front frame and is detected. And a front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a special mode different from the normal time.

  Specifically, for example, as a starting condition, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of FIG. 111, and in the main control board 1310 of FIG. 206, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player ( For example, a lottery of special lottery results for generating “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time shortening (time saving) hit” is performed. Based on the result of the lottery, the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 111, and uses a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal to perform variable display of symbols. An advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player by deriving a predetermined winning variation result as a result of the special lottery that is the variation display of the symbols (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability" It is possible to add "per fluctuation (probability change)" and "per time reduction (time reduction)". A game board 5 provided with a function display unit 1400 for displaying variable display of symbols, a main body frame 4 of FIG. 10 as a frame body provided with the game board 5 of FIG. The door frame 3 shown in FIG. 10 as a front frame, a door frame opening switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 as detection means for detecting the open / closed state of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 are provided. Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of FIG. 73 as front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a notification mode as a special mode different from the normal state. , And a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. In addition, in the light emission mode of the effect mode (normal time), there are various light emission modes that combine lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., whereas in the notification mode (mode different from the normal time), it is predetermined. The different color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the color is turned on with the maximum brightness.

  Further, the front frame light emitting means comprises a light emitting board having a light emitting section mounted on a board surface facing the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitting board emits light in the special mode. At least part of the periphery of the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting portion can be visually recognized not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame when the light-emitting unit is emitting light in the special mode. The light emitting portion is arranged to leak light.

  Specifically, for example, the speaker bracket 463 which is the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the speaker illumination unit including the transparent plate are substrates facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted on the surface as a light emitting portion. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 has a plurality of LEDs when the mounted LEDs 469a emit light in a notification mode as a special mode. From at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that the fact that the LED 469a of is emitted in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from the rear of the door frame 3 as the front frame. The plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light.

  Further, the front-frame light emitting means, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, performs predetermined performance light emission based on a variation pattern set when the symbol is variably displayed, At a position corresponding to the rear of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in a closed state, a light reflecting portion (white printing portion, metal member) capable of reflecting light leakage of the light emitting portion forward is provided. ..

  Specifically, for example, in a speaker illumination unit including a speaker bracket 463 which is a front frame light emitting means, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate, the door frame 3 as a front frame has an open state. When not detected (when the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it sends a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310. However, when the main control board 1310 has not received this door frame opening command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and the symbols are changed using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal. The main control board 1310 causes the peripheral control board 151 to display the commands corresponding to the fluctuation patterns set when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 mounts the light emission data, which is the light emission mode of the effect mode as the predetermined effect light emission (normal time), on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. It outputs to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) to perform various light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting, and speaker power when the door frame 3 is closed as a front frame. At a position corresponding to the rear of the decoration unit, a reflection sheet 1000a shown in FIG. Alternatively, a white printed portion having a color close to white), a metal stopper FT (a metal member having a metallic luster), and the like are provided.

  In addition, the covering portion that constitutes the back surface side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the light emitting portion is visible from the rear of the front frame through (through) the transparent member.

  Specifically, the speaker lighting unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate, and is transparent as a covering portion which constitutes the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 which is a light emitting substrate. The plate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the plurality of LEDs 469a of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is visible through the transparent plate which is the transparent member from behind the door frame 3.

  Further, a plurality of light emitting substrates that constitute the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting substrates is provided on the open end side of the front frame.

  Specifically, the acoustic decoration board 469 is a pachinko machine 1 as a light emitting board that constitutes a speaker lighting unit composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate as a front frame light emitting means. Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of them are provided, and the acoustic decoration boards 469 arranged on the upper left side of the door frame 3 and the upper right side of the door frame 3 are arranged. At least one of the acoustic decoration substrates 469 is provided on the open end side of the door frame 3 with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 arranged on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Thereby, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized.

  Further, a plurality of the light emitting substrates that constitute the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting portion is provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

  Specifically, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is a light emitting substrate that constitutes a speaker illumination unit that includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate as the front frame light emitting means, is the pachinko machine 1 Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of reflection sheets 1000a of FIG. 10 are provided as the light reflecting portions (white with high emissivity or white printing having a color close to white). Part), the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. The metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right area of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 is paired with the acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Metal fasteners FT at a position is located in the upper right side area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5.

  Further, the light reflecting portion is a white printing portion provided on the game board and provided outside a game area of the game board.

  Specifically, the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. 10 (a white printing portion having a high emissivity white or a color close to white) is provided on the game board 5 as a light reflecting portion, and is outside the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is a white printing unit provided in the.

  The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

  The light reflecting portion is a metal member provided on the frame body. Specifically, the metal stopper FT arranged as the light reflecting portion in the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 10 is made of metal (metal member) and has gloss. .

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 illustrated in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 276. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on processing. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 271. FIG. 273 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt processing. 274 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process, FIG. 275 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process, and FIG. 276 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a set value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of an initial value update type counter, main control-side power-on processing, main control-side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display processing will be described.

[Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used in the game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a hit determination initial value used to determine the initial value of this special random number A determined random number, a reach determining random number used for determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variable displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 for generating a big hit game state. A symbol random number for use in determining a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol (determination of a hit type) derived and displayed on a symbol display, and an initial value of the symbol random number. Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining whether or not to perform an open / close operation of a movable piece capable of accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination Initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used for determination of initial value of random number for use, and normal symbol used for determination of variable display pattern of normal symbol variably displayed on normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern and the like are prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After successively extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range, and completing extraction of all values within the predetermined numerical range, once again extracting one value within the predetermined numerical range, the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter counts up from a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number toward a maximum value, and then counts up from a minimum value toward a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal symbol determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or in various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as a numerical value and calculating the total is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-down process (power-off) on the main control side. When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, normally, the random number for initial determination for symbol determination is from the non-volatile RAM included in the main control MPU. An initial value derivation process for extracting the ID code and always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the extracted ID code. And line, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the initial value determination random number for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value set in the initial symbol determination random number for symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that if the ID code is stored, the ID code will not be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. By executing the second security countermeasure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the second security countermeasure, the analysis is prevented by taking two-step security countermeasures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person trying to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincides with the unauthorized acquisition, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is given, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting determination random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if momentary blackouts are generated at predetermined intervals obtained and game balls are passed through the gate unit 2003 at predetermined intervals, the movable piece can be opened and closed to allow the game balls to be received at the second starting port 2004. Game state cannot be generated.

[Processing at power-on of main control side]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU has a circuit configuration so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning from this routine after ending the subroutine. It indicates an address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 271 and 272, the main control-side power-on processing is performed. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control internal RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while determining that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. Note that, in the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination in step S14, since the time is extremely short, the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch is actually performed. The user turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

  If the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated in step S14, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation, unpaid award balls, and other information (for example, the number of main award balls) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This flag indicates whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting signal into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and the first key operation is performed, whereby the setting key switch is turned on. The setting key 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, while it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. And / or by determining from the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition has not been satisfied.

  When determining in step S18 that the main control MPU determines that the preset setting change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (an area dedicated to setting values in a specific area described later). Is a flag indicating whether the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation is permitted or not, and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to a value of 1 when the change is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the change of the set value is not permitted. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing. At the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can be received.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU determines that a power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU returns to step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted and a value 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

  In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. It is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main power supply-side power-off process to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the clockwise turning operation is performed by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the main control-side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b in the above-described determination in step S18, and sets the main frame according to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the key switch 1311a has been turned on by the setting key, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition has been satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1 in step S20A described above. In step S25, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change in step S37 described later is performed. Subsequent to the process, in a process of step S38 described later, a clear area except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Release the RAM error has to be able to proceed a game by (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As another method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, and this routine is executed again. The main control-side power-on process is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated in the above-described step S14, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-described step S16A. In the determination of S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, and in a process of step S38 described later, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control built-in RAM. By clearing the RAM, the game can be proceeded by releasing the RAM error (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error releasing method").

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the determination in step S30, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination in step S32, When the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display of step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When there is a notification that there is an abnormality (or cannot be trusted) in the content stored in the first RAM error release method and the second RAM error release method It can be done by. Thus, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is cut off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person is A state in which a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU itself is reset and then returned is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, when permitting the setting change of the setting value, the main control MPU executes the setting change process. Perform (step S37). In this setting change processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but based on a detection signal from the setting change button of the setting change board 1311, every time the pressing operation part of the setting change button of the setting change board 1311 is pressed, The setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g. When the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. Based on the above, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

  In the processing of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU Are cleared except for the specific area in all the areas (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specific area of the entire main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, the RAM with built-in main control must be used. The specified area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specified area of the main control built-in RAM) is cleared except for the specified area. Here, the “specific area” is an area dedicated to setting values in which setting values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub out port 2011, and a second sub out port provided in a game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. And an area exclusively for out-ball counting in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected in 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value to be changed in the setting change processing described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012 is stored.

  The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is turned off. If the processing at the time of disconnection has not been completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out and a counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code is taken out. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number as described above. Set to a random number.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “the dock dock timer control register” built in the main control MPU for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is normally operating. WDT control register ") to set the timer setting value to start the main control built-in WDT and reset the main control MPU. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU) (until the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value). If the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register” below, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the WDT with main control is cleared and the timekeeping is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The transmission serial port prescaler is set to the communication speed and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the test organization of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU performs startup setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hard random number control register incorporated in the main control MPU in order to be updated by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and acquiring, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit and the like are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is started by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined values are determined in advance. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main random number circuit with built-in main control when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and when the latch signal is input, the main control internal hard disk The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified into Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. You. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure notice signal. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the base monitor, and the like. It stops (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the RAM with built-in main control, it is possible to prevent the content of the RAM with built-in main control from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Since the main control MPU cannot be performed, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs the main control-side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

  As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off processing. For this reason, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and executes the main control-side power-on process again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the power-off process on the main-control side immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the power-off process on the main-control side is not executed. When the power is turned off, the checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power-off process on the main control side and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) must not match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control internal RAM. It will be completely erased.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

  If the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, if the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the processing of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, the information is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38. As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When a setting change that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, per probability variation (probability)). , Etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the start of the next business. Therefore, a clerk at the game hall or the like presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, if the setting change process is performed, (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed is obtained. It is necessary to delete (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM, as described above, in addition to changing the set value, Since this key is an important key that can be used to check the set value, etc., possession is limited to a limited number of persons, including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to two or three persons. Is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a clerk such as a game hall clerk needs to delete the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). Press the clear switch By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 an operation unit while pressing operation, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, description will be made on the point that the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26, and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

  As described above, the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, when a power outage or a momentary blackout occurs and the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even if the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, so that the island in the game hall is The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the equipment. This is when the player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the island facility of the game hall is installed. When the power supply from the power source is cut off, the main control side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware terminal called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated after the timer interrupt processing is performed, Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. That is, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the staff such as the clerk in the game hall operates the RAM clear switch without the intention of the staff such as the clerk in the game hall to indicate the intention. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power outage notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. Thereby, the progress of the game cannot be performed. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the progress of the game cannot be performed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main award ball number information output determination counter or the like). Can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not change. Accordingly, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the value stored and calculated of the checksum of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU is cut off, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) Step which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 because the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing from 58 to step S68 and the main control side power-off processing constituted by the infinite loop. When restarting, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT to thereby reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Can be restarted again without any updating of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) from the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power-off or power-securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the process immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. When the power failure notice signal has been inputted, the process returns to step S24. As long as it remains input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  Since the progress of the game is prevented by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are set by blocking the progress to a control flow of setting and starting the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. It is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for). When the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information) (including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all. , It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, description will be made regarding the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). In order to convey, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is included as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. A description will be given of a problem when the command is not set, that is, a problem when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven to open the second big winning opening 2006 by the opening / closing member, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs an instantaneous power failure or power failure based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Is restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of the game, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. And thus the transition to a state where the second special winning opening 2006 by driving the state or the second attacker solenoid 2612 is closed is opened from a state that is closed by the opening and closing member by.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as the game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state It is not possible to display at which round of the time. In other words, for example, a game ball enters the first special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the large winning opening 1 count that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the first special winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state (ie, what round).

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and terminates the first big winning opening 2005 when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, for example. The special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing that the state changes from the opened state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the first winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 during the round) is mainly performed. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to start the first big winning opening. 2005 is shifted from a state of being closed by an opening / closing member to a state of being opened (that is, the first grand prize) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the fifth round of the 2005 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, for example, a screen informing that a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, a player is notified that the movable piece is open). Screen is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the state where 2004 is opened, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that driving of the starting opening solenoid 2415 is started and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if the player can display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is entered, which indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

  In view of this, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power-on and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, from the state where the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member, as the return destination of the main control board 1310. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen that indicates that it is four rounds of the big hit game state (that is, what round is it?). Although it is not possible to display the screen indicating) on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first attacker in the big hit game state. A screen that starts to drive the solenoid 2418 and informs that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, “Big hit. The big winning opening is open. Screen that tells the player that a ball should be thrown in.) Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives the message It is possible to instruct the player to enter a game ball into the big winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the player enters a gaming state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs in a state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player, and then power is restored, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2415 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that tells that the movable piece is opened to open the second start opening 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Insert the game ball into the second start opening." The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen that conveys the message "Please play the game." To the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine, and then the second start after power recovery. A game of entering a game ball into the mouth 2004 can be instructed.

  This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting on the front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumpy state, a so-called frozen state, when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and it is mistaken for it. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum in step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is constituted by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, the check area values must be cleared except for the specific area in the entire main control RAM.

  Accordingly, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information. By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball Only three commands of the number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first transmitted as a power-on state command, then transmitted as a power-on main control return destination command, and subsequently as a power-on main prize ball count. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command operates the RAM clear switch to operate the RAM clear switch at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure). The information indicating that when clearing is performed, and at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Indicates the pachinko machine model code and information that indicates which state (probability or time saving state) to recover from among the stochastic time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, or high probability non-time saving state It consists of information and. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine, to which the so-called Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310), is the copyright for which work? What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for whichever of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of movies A, B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

  Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and even for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state is maintained until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the time when power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the power-on status to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on status The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus operates as the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes in the special symbol Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) of slipping, and by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, the main control board 1310 can control the copyright of which work. It is possible to determine which is the model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether or not (the game specification or the ST machine that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability variation occurs).

  As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on processing shown in FIGS. 271 and 272.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 273 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing which is the present routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In the timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits the time in which the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands are normally received by the payout control board 633 is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms every time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variable display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control MPU detects a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401. A signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, an output sensor 3053, a detection signal from the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and a detection signal from the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame opening switch 4a, detection signals from the body frame opening switch 4b, and setting key switches 1311a Signal, the signal from the setting switching button, and the prize ball Reading 払主 ACK signal from the dispensing control board 633 a command dispensing control board 633 conveys that it has normally received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area of the main control chip RAM as input information. Further, when the detection signal from the first startup port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second startup port sensor 2401 are read, respectively, the startup port prize command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is detected, the start port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state is input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, the game ball is treated as having no incoming ball or as ignoring the input.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the input terminals having the vacant terminal processing) is repeated for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, Detection signal from the second sub-out sensor 3054, the detection signal from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, the body frame opening A payout control board that notifies that the payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal from the switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from 633 can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as a free terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal process is applied among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display for notifying that a fault has occurred in a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described symbol random numbers are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random numbers are random numbers related to the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the hit random number update processing.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol determination random number, the initial random number for collision determination is updated by the hit random number update processing. The normal symbol determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining a big hit symbol initial value and the random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value are determined in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, but every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the present routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this ball number counting process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a detection signal is input from the out-mouth sensor 3053 to the game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out-mouth sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected by the provided out port 2010, the value 1 is added to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010. (Incrementing) the calculation, the detection signal from the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403 is input, and the game ball collected by the first sub-out mouth 2011 provided in the game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5 is subjected to the first calculation. When the sub-out mouth sensor 2403 detects the count, the counting of the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out mouth 2011 is counted. A calculation is performed to add (increment) the value 1 to the value of the collected ball counter to be counted, and the detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input to the game area 5 a provided in the game area 5 a partitioned on the game board 5. When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is set to a value. An operation of adding (incrementing) 1 is performed. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out-port sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011, and When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, an operation of adding the value 3 to the value of the collected ball counter is performed. The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012, and performs the main control. The output is stored in a special area for counting out-balls in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor is set, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. Each time, a ball collection command notifying the fact is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. When the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) only 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the main control MPU returns the collection ball. The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first grand prize entrance 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. , The main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output in order to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is performed. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information. In order to notify that fact, a main prize ball number information output command classified into other is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, the gate section 2003, the first Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the one starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. To the value of, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is set as the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 sends various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and are stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that an illegal act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the misconduct detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). The radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into the notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, and 3055, a fraud using a magnet (hereinafter, referred to as a fraud). It is determined that “magnet goto” is performed), and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall can find the magnet goto at an early stage. Has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 or the second special winning opening sensor 2601 is performed when the game is not in the jackpot game state. When a signal is inputted (when a game ball enters the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006) or the like, the occurrence of a special winning opening abnormal winning is classified as an abnormal state and displayed as a notification. A winning error display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet When no goto has been detected, a value of 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud has not been detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, when detecting the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal winning, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud.

  Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of a firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is fired is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the above-described fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, that the fraudulent activity has not been detected. Sometimes the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic), and the firing information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input and the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch 4a detects that the main frame open switch 4a is open, the main frame open switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by inputting a detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b. In this case, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), that the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is the main routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery) is performed. Until the start, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to set the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. It is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). Whether to generate a game state (called "special lottery")) or take out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (whether the hit type is determined) whether the hit type determination value matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting mouth sensor 3052, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting mouth sensor 2401. If it is due to the above, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big A winning hole 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open / close the opening / closing member. When the signal output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (round) the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the round of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Point to the 2 round display lamp to turn on the 2 round display lamp of the display unit The output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the 15 round display lamp is turned on. Set the output of the lighting signal, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or set the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the occurrence of time saving in a predetermined color, It is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In the normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on this determination result, the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

  The normal winning opening prize information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and the normal winning opening is in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th partition to the second partition of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information storage of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored. The normal winning opening winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning opening winning information in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage in the 0th section of the normal winning opening storing information, respectively. The two sections and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is set as a reserved ball, and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is set. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so that the hold display is turned on, and stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number per ordinary symbol is determined from the read ordinary winning award winning information to perform the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open / close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, and the game state becomes a state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 is set so as to open / close the movable piece and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the random number for symbol determination is not the same as the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. , Create various commands related to the general figure synchronization effect, and store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, Set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern of the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of being a normal win) is 1/2.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In the setting value confirmation display processing, although a detailed description will be given later, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by a 60-degree turning operation clockwise from the position) and the first ON operation is performed, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by a setting key ON signal. It is determined that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and the setting key switch 1 11a determines that the setting key display ON condition is satisfied, while it determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. 4 is not opened and / or the setting key switch 1311a is determined not to be ON by the signal of the setting key ON, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. Is determined. In the set value confirmation display processing, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Is output and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated and the routine returns to the present routine.

  Following step S117, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU sends a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 633 when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Or a movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 when the big hit game state is established, and for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 that performs opening and closing operations, a 15 round big hit information output signal, a 2 round big hit information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display Various information related to the game (game information), such as an information output signal, an information output signal during time reduction, and a start opening winning information output signal. Output to the payout control board 633, or to the payout control board 633, to output the firing permission signal set to the firing permission logic or the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic). A display signal is output to a base monitor for displaying the counting result (total number) of the game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012, or a setting stored in a dedicated area for a set value in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a lighting signal for displaying the value on the setting display 1310g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control timer interrupt process of this routine are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and classified into jackpot related. Various commands to be performed (for example, the special winning opening 1 corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 when the game ball that entered the first special winning opening 2005 is detected) (Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronized performance related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands classified, various commands related to test, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 on the game board 5) Every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as the main prize ball number information. , A main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558), and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the first sub out port 2011). (2) Each time the number of game balls collected at the sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command for notifying that, a setting change command for notifying that the setting value has been changed, and stored in the main control built-in RAM Error display command to inform that there is something wrong (or something that cannot be trusted), which will be described later in a specific area of the main control internal RAM ON operation of the setting key tell that to verify the configuration values stored in the value-only area command, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by summing the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes various commands as main circumference serial data. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. The main circumference serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main circumference serial data. You can do it. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: A status, a mode, and a sum value which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

  When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the player that the number of game balls collected at the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, the surroundings The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. Updated with the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (the counted value (that is, the total number of balls of the game balls collected at the outlet 2010, the first sub-out 2011 and the second sub-out 2012)) Information associated with date and time) is updated. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after the opening hours of the gaming hall are not received without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011). And ball collection information in which the total number of balls of the game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 and the updated date and time are associated is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when starting the business of the gaming hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the business. The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and retained in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and retained in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection information may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup processing has been executed as a destination to which the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 should be restored when the power is restored, while the processing can be completed. In this case, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are electric driving sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, in the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272, the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Subsequently, the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a lumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has broken down. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

  In the main control board inspecting step, which is an inspection step of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown in the main control side, all areas of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared except for a specific area. With this, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 272, if the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed, the power-on status A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, the power-on state command is configured, and the status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and subsequently the power-on main control return destination command is configured. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The data is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process. It has become.

[Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 274 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is obtained, the setting value may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is used to calculate various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and to calculate the sum thereof. Is the same processing as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process (at the time of power-off) in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the value of the checksum (sum value) matches (step S204). If the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are respectively the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG contains various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-down processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is stored and held in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. To be done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within a normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value It is preset to a value up to value 6. By proceeding with the flowchart to the determination of step S208, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S208, when the main control MPU determines that the value is not in the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is the initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 in the normal range. However, the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, without performing the determination in step S208. In this case, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 which is an initial value may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, or determines in step S208 that the main control When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or after step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). In this determination, a detection signal from the setting switching button is read, and it is determined whether a detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal is input from the setting switching button, and operates the setting switching button when the detection signal is not input from the setting switching button. It is determined that it has not been done.

  When it is determined in step S216 that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) 1 to the setting value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the initial position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the knob 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the (rotational position) and turning it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it back), the second ON operation causes the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON by the set key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal is inputted from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, while when the decision key ON signal is not inputted from the setting key switch 1311a. It is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, the process returns to step S216 again, and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. If the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it again performs the processing of step S218 and step S220, performs the determination of step S222, and does not operate the enter key. When the setting switch button is operated until the determination key is operated, the set value is incremented by one each time the setting switch button is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. Is displayed, and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined to be operated in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is determined by the main control. Since the setting value is not stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the built-in RAM, the setting value stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, Is updated with respect to the set value set in the main control built-in RAM, and the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After the process of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU determines whether there is an operation of turning off the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned on by the enter key. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The determination is made based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a has not been input. Sometimes the setting key is turned off It determined that there is no.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the process returns to step S226 again, and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates that the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is set to the first ON position) stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time of being operated, and when permitting to perform setting change of the set value A value of 1 is set, and a value of 0 is set when it is not permitted to change the setting value. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value It is preset to a value up to value 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU checks whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not any of the set values 1 to 6 that are the range is obtained. If it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  When it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S234), subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process in step S238 is mainly used. This is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, but this is prioritized prior to the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is because the setting change command informs the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting has been changed. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). I do.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 275 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set. When the value is not displayed for confirmation, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU determines whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the set key. Is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads out the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and detects from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The signal and the setting key are inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the 60-degree rotation operation and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main frame 4 Is open, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. By determining and / or determining from the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU terminates the routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the value 1 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and the current installation value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 2, The values are set in advance to a value 3, a set value 4, a set value 5, and a set value 6. In the determination at step S357, the main control MPU checks the setting value acquired at step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. Is determined to be any one of the set values 1 to 6 that are in the normal range, and if it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. I do.

  In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 273. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been started (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (Information associating the effect and the date and time).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the ball collection history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the setting key ON operation history information described above. A predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state in which the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied is rotated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation by the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when the set value is displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a performs an OFF signal. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. While setting key switch 1311a Setting key when the signal of the OFF is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  In the determination of step S362, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is. The value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364). Subsequently, the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped to the setting display 1310g. Then, the acquired setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366). Subsequently, a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, the setting operation of the setting key OFF operation command is performed (step S368), and this routine ends.The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been confirmed) Is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Until then, control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and restore the image.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop for continuously clearing the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop keeps clearing the main control built-in WDT. However, this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Error display processing]
Next, an error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, and is a process performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 (FIG. 274). , And the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 276 (step S400). As described above, the firing permission signal indicates that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. If the logic is set to the firing permission logic, the firing is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permitted). .

  The error display processing of this routine is one of the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 271 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 271. (Specifically, when started as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU causes the interrupt of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 273 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU, in step S400, recovers the power and then displays an error message that is this routine. Even after the processing is started, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port. To the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function.

  When the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU executes the processing in step S357 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 275. In the determination, it is determined that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272, the main control MPU has already shown in FIG. 275 before starting the error display processing of this routine. Since the interrupt non-permission setting has been performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the processing cannot be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU determines in step S400 that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU performs an error display on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), subsequently creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 274 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 includes the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 274 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, and is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 (FIG. 274). When the process is started and ended as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 275) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275, as described above, the endless loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main control serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU displays the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) To update.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a blue background image "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." While performing the control to display the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch equipped on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume is controlled not to depend on the volume, but forcibly set to the maximum volume, and the control is performed through various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command reporting another error, the RAM Error notification is given top priority.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 277, and FIG. 279 is a payout control unit following FIG. 278. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[Discharge control section power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 277 to 279 under the control of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of the interrupts of the payout control MPU is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the instruction does not indicate that the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM clear is to be performed. It is determined that the switch has been operated.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to a payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). The number of prize ball stocks PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. The PRDY signal output setting information etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout is to be erased. The flag is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending the subroutine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when the power is turned off) described later. (Step S526). If the payout control MPU determines in step S526 that they match, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, the payout control built-in RAM is determined as power recovery. Is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this power recovery time is read. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0). If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S536.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S540 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU inputs the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, awarded ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided, and the prize motor number information output determination counter is actually the payout motor 584. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. By a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is displayed. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, the value is added with the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and the memory is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the read prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value of 10 ( In other words, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10), and the number of balls that have exceeded the number is displayed. The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, It reads a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received, and inputs them as input information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition, the number of balls of the game balls received and received by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number. It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the inconsistent game balls due to the disagreement are repeatedly paid out. At that time, time management of the mismatch counter reset determination time set as the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball-game determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is executing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU performs an instantaneous power failure or power outage while exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And the exchange of various signals is interrupted, and even if it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the power outage or power outage may be continued from the time of power recovery. With wear, so that we can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. The data is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. That is, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gami operation determination setting process, For setting the error status output to the CR unit, for example, pay a ball when not communicating with the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball due to is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected to each other, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is notified that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-mentioned lower bowl 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the tank is full, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. Or not. For example, the determination of whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full with the stored game balls is performed by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is counted in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is not full in the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area area.

  To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to check whether the game is full or out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball cut switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball cut switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and the ball cut check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is When the state is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is considered that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that indicates that is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball gamming are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. I do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball cutout information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the ball cutout information, it corresponds. The display data (in the present embodiment, the display value 1 (numeral “1”)) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display are created based on this various information. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  After step S568, the procedure returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. To perform a timer update process, and in step S554 In step S556, a full or missing ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, and an LED is set in step S564. A display data creation process is performed, a command transmission process is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeatedly performed. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 277 to 279.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 280 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). The value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten by using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 283 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 284 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 285 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral controller power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initialization process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. This causes the CPU of the peripheral control IC to enter a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 is output. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the V blank signal for notifying that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the stationary processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) and Various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set. Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 parts 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the light emission mode has been adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and luminance is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and luminance.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light, Are set respectively. While the effect is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. In the case where one specified brightness value from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to have the set specified brightness value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. A player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set the first brightness specified value to the maximum brightness of the 31st brightness. It is possible to set one luminance specified value up to the specified value.

  For example, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotary operation unit 302 in a clockwise direction, the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (light out), and the 0th (zero) brightness is designated. When the brightness is set to the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level, the predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linear expression) from the first brightness specified value toward the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are changed to be higher along a tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed. When rotating clockwise, and when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness to the 1st brightness specified value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk in the game hall) Staff member) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the production of the effect, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image what the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th brightness designation value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as brightness information of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly illuminated with light, as the gradation information described above. is there. The normal pallet value is selected from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. In a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are specified values, a palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a tone curve like a spline curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. It is a value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

  In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is directly illuminated with light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Of the various decorative boards that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and that are provided as direct light on the game board side, a palette is provided for a specific decorative board (LED that makes the player feel dazzling) not shown. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information, which is the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. The special pallet value is different from the normal pallet value in only one step, and is one of the 32 step ranges from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which are the above-mentioned brightness specified values. The palette value corresponding to the brightness designation is set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits the indirect light for the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (off). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value that is almost equal to the 18th brightness specification value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and is in the range from the 1st brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designated value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the While being set according to the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designation value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the LED used as the direct light to be dazzling and to reduce the brightness, the brightness is changed to the direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off) and the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level) Then, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the smallest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emitting mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side or the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set, set the light emission mode according to the flow of production, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side Then, the normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, it is possible to extremely easily change the balance of the entire light emitting mode. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specification value is set up to the brightness specification value, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one specified luminance value is set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship of the light emission modes set (bright or dark) is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the above relationship.

  Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is normally managed by the palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted respectively.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in a display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data of one minute (for one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to an effect by an effect sound such as music or sound effect matched to various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”).

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel in the sound data generation process described later. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various effects.

  Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series which configures the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound command data that directs the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series to configure the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  Further, in the scheduler update processing, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which form the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data from the first drive data to the output target is the number of the drive data. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time the own processing is executed. That is, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor / solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed, and are also used for various effect settings. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to hold prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp pallet setting processing. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to reach the maximum brightness from the above-described first brightness designation value. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, a normal pattern A normal pattern storage command for identifying the number of holdings (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with a variation display of a special symbol. Command, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of starting pending changes is changed, and it is analyzed whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005, and now, Recognize which gaming state you are in.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Various commands are analyzed. The various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Figure Various commands related to performance related, various commands related to normal electric-role effect, various commands related to notification display, various commands related to status display, various commands related to test, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical data. The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-series arrangement of light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set, The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically performed. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before another abnormal condition has been resolved. You can

  Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one minute (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data designated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Outputs sound data from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The value is converted to a value of 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 are controlled. Music and sound effects are played from. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. It is like this.

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC have a sound effect such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the vessel (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, to the peripheral control unit) And 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received and after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds are elapsed after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit. Except the above), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in the fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example the periphery 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 times after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. (Until the second elapses), by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process. The voltage divided by is converted into a value of 7 levels of the substrate volume 0 to 6, and further the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch is rotated by the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust the sub-volume value of the effect sound by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the press operation unit 303 or It has become.

  Further, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC includes a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the central volume speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the low-pitched main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 are amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized. And output as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. The volume that flows from the top-side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume control switch that is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts is combined with the substrate volume that is adjusted by being rotated, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually the center of the top of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top-side speaker 464, and the main volume speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value that is a volume, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the service for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the volume value, is combined, and the combined volume of the notification sound is actually the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main volume speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value that is a volume, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the failure of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine Briefly describing the control for emitting a notification sound to notify the hall clerk or the like of the misconduct with respect to No. 1, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute. The sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with those of the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame 4 on the door frame 3 side. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for sound, and outputs the audio data to the amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, but the production sound is as described above. Progressing according to the generated sound generation schedule data.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute up to the sub-volume that is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch The volume value is set again (at this time, when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. (Set to the volume value), the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame frame spin for the low sound of the main frame 4. So that the flow from mosquitoes 622.

  In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a pachinko machine is generated. When a notification sound is played to notify a clerk of the hall of a misconduct to the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it is played from the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of FIG. 4, the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. 462, the top side speaker 464, and when the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the notification sound starts to flow as the effect sound. Rather than begin to flow again from the time, so that begins to flow again from where it started to alarm sound to flow proceeded according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the sound produced by various speakers, such as sound effects and sound effects, is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 does. When a malfunction occurs or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall from becoming liable to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for regular processing and back up.

  Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, steps S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, if the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is transmitted from VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 282 (step S1045). As described above, the flag SP-FLG during steady processing is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU does not change the state. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 281. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process on the way, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing and setting the value 0 to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral control steady processing) in FIG. 281, the peripheral control steady processing is performed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, so that the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine. Whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed is determined. To have. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next time the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 281 is performed. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 281. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 281 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the number of 1 ms timer interrupts executed STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 283 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher priority as the interrupt processing priority. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN by 1 (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 281. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor / solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the like) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The moving position is grasped by setting or acquiring the moving position.

  Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, it is possible to acquire the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the production operation unit 301. Can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted on a plurality of various decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

  Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Backup is performed by copying to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas and the SDRAM is used. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the above and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the effect progresses within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 281, various processes relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. The start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly cancelled, and the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to send the main circumference serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC for 1 byte (8 bits). ) Information is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 284 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when extracted from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is extracted when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, is extracted from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and the second byte is still the main serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main serial data, and then the second byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as a numerical value and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility in the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the received status is assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), And ends this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects 1 byte (8 bits) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period over which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data that has already been retrieved from the reception buffer in step S1202. Then, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, the routine ends as it is.

[Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 285 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is not input, the CPU ends the routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and the power failure warning signal is not input. When it is determined that this routine is finished as it is, when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

  Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is not input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined. In other words, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 281 is restarted.

  As described above, if the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that they do n’t. On the other hand, if the power outage notification signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and thus the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 286, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first start-up port sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second opening opening passage process, such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM, is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot gaming state. Also, when it becomes a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when it becomes a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" by executing the process of controlling opening and closing of the 1st special winning opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state. Then, the process for controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit game state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, each process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag showing that it is in a time saving state, and the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode that suggests "2R big hit" 2R big hit game It is set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the fact that it has become a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. .. Then, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the count value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 297 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner as the number of times the time reduction state is continued, and controls the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, when the big hitting game state ends, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time saving counter is counted down every time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit is reached before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 297 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (returns the counter value to “0”).

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol reserved storage area is stored in the second. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 287. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires from the main control built-in RAM a counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S243 are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the suspended state. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol change display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing for judging pre-judgment information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (step S245), the processing ends.

  However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored as the first reserved memory. While updating so as to correspond to the number, the command for instructing the first reserved memory number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 stored command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It is like this.

  FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-judgment processing (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers obtained in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, a type of the big hit, and if not, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Type of game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored in association with the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special hold number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to it is set (step S262).

  Then, the preliminary control command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-described peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120), and is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether the display result of the special symbol change display based on the generated starting winning is a big hit or not, if a big hit is made, a type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, the effect display device 1600 is used. The peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed, etc. before starting the variable display according to the starting winning. IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the first variation pattern command that stores the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the advance storage is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

  In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), This can be preceded by, for example, notification at a predetermined timing such as new output of the hold display or shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S234).

  Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2401 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 289. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 are executed in order to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S254 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the number of second reserved memory changes based on the fact that a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored as the second reserved memory. While updating to correspond to the number, the command for instructing the second reserved storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It is like this.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the first pending storage number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is set to “4”, while the gaming ball is set to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved storages based on the entry of the ball is "1". The second starting opening 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, so Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a second start opening 2004. Even if a game ball is entered, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state such as not being able to get the chance to win the big hit.

  FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control is stopped (step S281) )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation process which waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 271).

  FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 291, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process proceeds to step S302 where it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. 185 (A) and a special random number (when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number read out in step S302, If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 293 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of first special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched so that the first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 315 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the loss has occurred. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 3/319). In this example, in the second special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number, a big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit. Loss determination indicating that 144 kinds of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value indicate that the small hit has been won, and that 174 kinds of second special random numbers are the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/1319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit compared to the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that the hit is a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the change is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit judging process is ended.

  The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state and a non-time saving used when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table at the time saving state, the above-mentioned reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating that no reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match with the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number reaches, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), and determines that a reach loss has occurred (step S317), the variation is determined. The reach flag indicating the reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

  FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 294, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery result is made by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 293 (B). The type of the big hit is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or closing when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005, and a special symbol (first special) is provided after the big hit game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual and the high probability time reduction state in which the lottery of the special lottery result is performed with a higher probability than usual. 1. 15R probable big hit to control The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2402 detects that ten game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and a special symbol (first special symbol) is provided after the big hit game state is completed. , The second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and a 5R time-saving big hit,
3. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2402 detects that ten game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If the big hit game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the time-saving state to be ended if the big hit is not reached until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. If the non-time saving state is controlled before the start of the jackpot gaming state, the 2R jackpot is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state,
One of the three types of big hits is decided.

In addition, the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol)
In particular,
1. The second large winning opening 2006 is closed for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects that ten game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and a special symbol (first special) is provided after the jackpot game state is completed. Until the variable display of the symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual and the high probability time reduction state in which the lottery of the special lottery result is performed with a higher probability than usual. 1. 15R probable big hit to control After the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second big winning opening 2006, it is closed. By opening and closing the pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 2006 (easy) by controlling the 5R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, a special symbol (first special symbol) , 2R special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time shorter big hit to shorten the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. The second large winning opening 2006 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects that ten game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state in which the ball can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If the big hit game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the time-saving state to be ended if the big hit is not reached until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. If the non-time saving state is controlled before the start of the jackpot gaming state, the 2R jackpot is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state,
One of the three types of big hits is decided.

  In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed when the 15R certainty variation jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed when the 5R hour short jackpot, and 2R jackpot. In this case, 92 judgment values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 15% big hit with a probability of 4%, a 5R big hit with a probability of 50%, and a 2R big hit with a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 determination values are distributed when the 15R probability variation jackpot is obtained, and 100 determination values are distributed when the 5R time-shortening jackpot is distributed, and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed in the case of a big hit. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R certainty variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined as a 15R probability variable jackpot is high. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, It is in an advantageous state for the player.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is determined to be 2R jackpot, it is determined to be a 2R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, when it is determined to be 5R jackpot, it is determined to be a 5R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 15R jackpot, it is a jackpot. A 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 293 (C), and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening / closing pattern for closing the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed twice, and the game ball is controlled to a small hitting game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). First small hit 2. The opening and closing pattern of closing and opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed nine times to control the small hitting game state in which the gaming ball can enter (easily) the second special winning opening 2006. One of the two types of small hits of the second small hit is determined to be one of the big hits.

  In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit is determined. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small hit is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 determination values are sorted when the first small hit occurs, and 180 determination values are sorted when the second small hit occurs. ing. That is, when the lottery result of the small hit is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 90%.

  When the type of the small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the first small hit is decided, the first small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is decided, the second small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol. .

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a loss symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lottery result (any of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S328. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328). ). Then, thereafter, as the process of step S329, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), the process ends.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are variably displayed, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → middle). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (note that the decorative symbols on the left, the middle, and the right may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a fluctuating manner and may be simultaneously stopped and displayed). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether a small hit or a 2R big hit is specified from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing. Is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R HQ jackpot is specified, the 5R HQ jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even-numbered design and the 15R certain-variable big hit is specified, the 15R certain-variable big-hit design (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols will be the same odd-numbered design from "0" to "9") Combination). In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same pattern whose left and right decorative patterns are "0" to "9" and different middle decorative patterns; If the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outlier with no reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols out of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols) and changed. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time-saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the big hit gaming state, the time saving state is controlled, and if a predetermined number of (for example, two) big hits thereafter occur, the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the predetermined number of the big hit gaming states. Alternatively, control may be performed in a normal state. Even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than the predetermined number, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the control of the time saving state may be performed again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 295, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been done (step S341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. Is set (step S343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the small hit type determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) If the selection is made (step S346), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if a normal loss (a loss in which no reach effect is performed) is obtained, a fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss (not shown) Is selected (step S347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the variation pattern to start is determined in the vicinity. The fluctuation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, and by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the processing of step S351, it is determined whether or not the count value of the hour / hour count counter in which the number of times the hour / hour is continued is set to "0". To do. If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in step S351 that the counter value of the time-saving counter is “0”, and if it is determined in step S353 that the counter is not “0”, Then, control goes to the process of step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the special symbol variation pattern is set in a manner that the special symbol variation time information set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . That is, in the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the time saving state, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the non-time saving state, The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 296, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S371. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is ended when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 297, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S381. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the production display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S384) and resets the time reduction flag (step S385). Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (the control of the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is completed. (Control in the normal state) is started.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that a big hit game is started (step S387), and The standby time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit in a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to finish the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening process (step S401) and the special winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches “0”, and the big winning is achieved. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), the large hit counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”, and the process proceeds to the special winning opening process (step S403) to end the big hit game. Execute the control to make it.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R certain variable big hit start command, 5R short time big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 5R short hit big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol processing process of the second special symbol stop processing, a big hit start command (15R certain variable big hit start command, 5R short hit big hit) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 5R short hit big hit, 2R big hit) A start command and a 2R jackpot start command) are set.

  The big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, in the big hit control processing (step S235A) after the big win opening process (step S403). The opening / closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won the first special winning opening 2005). The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is repeated twice, five times, or fifteen times) and the opening and closing control of the second special winning opening 2006 (for example, the first special winning opening 2005 Opening / closing to be closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2005. Turn twice, five times, or is reset to repeat 15 times the opening and closing control) when completed (all round executable jackpot gaming). While the jackpot execution flag is reset, the jackpot control processing (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is executed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S391), and a standby time until the start of the small hit game (a time for displaying an indication to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the kind of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. Likewise, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit command, 2 small hit start command).

  In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting middle process (step S411) of the small hitting control process (step S236A) described later. ) Open / close control of the second special winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times) Will be reset when is finished. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control processing (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

  Also, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the standby time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

  When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S395), this processing ends.

  FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board informs the player of the transition to the big hit game state based on the change of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) at the time of the change display stop to the big hit symbol. Preliminary opening process of opening a special winning opening to wait until performed by 1510 or to start the next round (step S401)
2. Based on the fact that the special symbol change display stop mode is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. After the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, after the first special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls enter the first special winning opening 2005. When the first prize opening sensor 2402 detects that a prize has been won, or after the second prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are present in the second prize opening 2006 Processing during opening of the special winning opening that is closed when the winning is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402).
3. The big win opening process after waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the player of the end of the big hit game state when all rounds are completed (step S403).

  The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big win opening processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 to a closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a big hit game effect is displayed according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, a mounting surface of a substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to face the player, and light emission decoration is performed. In addition, the mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent ornament, and the LEDs and the like mounted on the substrate are caused to emit light in various colors to cause the ornament to be colored, The light emitted from the LED or the like can be visually confirmed through.

  Further, the substrate of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is solidly coated with a green resist, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, etc. Is printed in close proximity to an electronic component such as an LED using white or black silk. The information formed on these substrates is hard to be visually recognized by the player when the LED emits light, and is visible to the player when the LED is turned off.

  In addition, in recent pachinko machines 1, a unified design is applied to the whole, and images and the like of the effect display device 1600 are fused to express the world view of characters and animations. Design is a very important factor. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, is written when the LED is turned off. When viewed visually, there is a possibility that the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is collapsed, the design is reduced, and the gaming interest is reduced.

  To solve such a problem, the LED is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts arranged on the back surface of the board. Information is printed on white or black silk to make it difficult for the player to see the information, or a predetermined color (white in this example, but green or green) on the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface). After applying a paint (resist, silk, etc.) of black or purple), the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged depending on the unevenness and the light reflection state. A measure is taken to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the contour line by double coating the same color paint so that the information can be recognized.

  However, when information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged is silk-printed on the back surface different from the mounting surface of the LED, it is necessary to perform maintenance inspection. The LEDs and the like must be specified by alternately comparing the front surface and the back surface of the substrate, and the workability is reduced, and the LEDs and information related to the LEDs are not provided on the same surface. It becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relation between the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic parts, and the like. There is a drawback that mistakes such as mistaken identification occur. When information such as the number of pins of a connector, the orientation of an IC, a part number, a pin number, and an outline of an electronic component is visually recognizable depending on the unevenness and the reflection state of light, a portion showing the information. Since the (region) and the other part (region) have the same color, it is difficult to distinguish them, and there is a drawback that workability at the time of maintenance and inspection is deteriorated.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the external shape on which the electronic components are arranged are suppressed while suppressing the reduction in workability during maintenance and inspection. This makes it possible to suppress information that is unrelated to the game, such as a line, from being visually recognized by the player. The details will be described below. As information irrelevant to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like is displayed on the surface of the board (LED The following invention is applicable as long as it is described in (Mounting surface).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inner lens is arranged between the decorative body that covers the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front surface (front surface) of the handle decoration substrate 184 provided on the handle unit 180 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a transparent handle cover 185. 49 and 50, a transparent inner lens 185a is disposed between the plate and the handle decoration board 184, and as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the plate left decoration board 273 is provided in the plate left decoration unit 270 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Is covered with a plate upper left decoration 271, and a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 is arranged between the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 to prepare the plate upper right decoration unit 275. The front surface (front surface) of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with the dish upper right decoration body 276. A transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 is arranged between the plate upper right decoration body 276 and the plate upper right decoration substrate 278, and a plate lower left decoration substrate 283 of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs. The front surface (front surface) is covered with a plate lower left decoration 281 and a transparent plate lower left inner lens 282 is arranged between the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 to prepare for the plate lower right decoration unit 285. The front surface (front surface) of the dish lower right decoration board 288 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the dish lower right decoration body 286, and between the dish lower right decoration body 286 and the dish lower right decoration board 288. A transparent lower right inner lens 287 is arranged at the bottom.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the dish center upper decorative board 314 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is located at the center of the plate. A transparent dish center inner lens 313 is provided between the dish upper decoration body 312a and the dish center decoration board 314, and is provided on the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300. The upper surface (front surface) of the dish center lower decorative board 316 provided with the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with the dish center lower decor body 312b. A transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 is provided therebetween, and a plurality of LEDs are provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The upper surface (front surface) of the mounted outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 is covered with an outer peripheral button cover 380, and a transparent outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is provided between the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is a transparent door frame left side decorative body 404. A transparent left side inner lens 403 is disposed between the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and provided in the door frame right side unit 410 as shown in FIG. The front side (front surface) of the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame right side decorative body 419 and the inside of the side window. A transparent right side inner lens 415 is disposed between the decorative unit decorative board 413 and the door frame top center unit provided with the door frame top unit 450 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs. The front surface (front surface) of the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is covered with a transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative body. A transparent top center inner lens 458, a top left inner lens 459, and a top right inner lens 460 are disposed between the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. I have.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, has a front side of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. A transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is disposed between the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the underside first rotating decorative substrate 3322, and as shown in FIGS. The front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, which is provided in the decorative body unit 3710 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, is covered with a front cover 3711, and between the front cover 3711 and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322. A transparent front plate left front decorative body 3713 functioning as an inner lens is arranged, and as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, a rear front right decorative body unit 3810 is provided. The front surface of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a front cover 3811, and the transparent functioning as an inner lens is provided between the front cover 3811 and the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. A flat front right decorative body 3813 is arranged.

  The inner lens has a three-dimensionally formed uneven surface so as to make the refractive index non-uniform or diffuse the light from the LED irregularly, and is provided at a predetermined interval behind the decorative body. (Provided apart from the decorative body). Then, when visualizing information irrelevant to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which is written on the mounting surface of the board, via the inner lens, Can be visually recognized in a state in which such information is distorted (out of focus, distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as characters or information) due to a three-dimensionally formed surface. Thereby, information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which is written on the mounting surface of the board, is recognized as information by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing a decrease in designability, and a decrease in gaming interest. The inner lens is not limited to one having a three-dimensional uneven surface, but instead or in addition to this, the thickness of the inner lens is made non-uniform so that the refractive index becomes non-uniform, May be diffused irregularly. In this case as well, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like, which are visually recognized via the inner lens, are unrelated to the game. The information is visually recognized in a distorted state (out of focus).

  The inner lens of this example is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, and transmits the light of the LED. Note that the material is not limited to a colorless and transparent material as long as it is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property (resin or the like), and a colored and transparent material that is colored so that it can be seen through. In addition, the surface of the inner lens of this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming a plurality of small surfaces having different angles, such as diamond cuts. Due to the non-uniformity of the ratio, it has an appearance that it is cloudy in some places.

  Further, the decorative body of the present example (handle cover 185, plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate lower left decorative body 281, plate lower right decorative body 286, plate center upper decorative body 312a, plate center lower decorative body 312b) The outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the front cover 3711, and the front cover 3811) are formed of transparent members. It has a relatively smooth surface. Note that, in addition to the inner lens, the front and back surfaces of the decorative body may be three-dimensionally formed in a concavo-convex shape. It is possible to reliably prevent the player from visually recognizing information such as the component number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player may be made weaker than the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player from being lowered, and to make the inner lens visually appear to be cloudy due to the reduced transparency through the decorative body. You will be able to realize a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since white is used as the resist of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, it is likely to be clouded by being provided between the mounting surface of the substrate and the decorative body. The visible inner lens is compatible with the white resist and does not give a feeling of strangeness. That is, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white color is adopted as a resist on the surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the LED mounting surface. Information such as outlines to be printed is printed in yellow silk. Here, in general, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and lightness compared to other colors, and have little visual difference (contrast). In comparison, even when the board is directly visually recognized, it is difficult to identify information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. In addition, white may be adopted as a resist only on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and various information may be printed with yellow silk. On the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface), a color other than white (for example, green) is used as a resist. Or black) or various types of information may be printed with silk of a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

  On the other hand, at the time of maintenance inspection, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic components are to be placed is written in a color different from the color of the resist on the board. In addition to being able to easily identify and understand the contents of such information, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic components are arranged is supported. Therefore, the correspondence between the LED and the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the external line on which the electronic component is arranged can be clarified. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). That is, only the LEDs are mounted on the surface of the substrate (the LED mounting surface). With this, the LED is mounted so that the emitted light is directed toward the player, and the IC, which is easily recognized by the player due to its color, shape, size, etc. By mounting them on the back side of the board which is hard to be visually recognized by a player without mounting resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., the presence of ICs, resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. can be made less noticeable. When a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface is used, the connector may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

  Further, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens may be made different depending on the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of solid formation of the inner lens is increased, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, 1 cm or more). May reduce the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens. This makes it possible to perform optimal obscuring according to the distance from the board, and through the inner lens, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the external shape on which the electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface of the board. Lines and the like can be suppressed from being visually recognized, information that is not related to the game can be suppressed from being recognized by the player as information, and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being collapsed, and the design quality can be reduced. Deterrence can prevent a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, as a method of changing the degree of three-dimensional formation, the degree of three-dimensional formation is strengthened by making the unevenness of the substrate surface deep, the degree of three-dimensional formation is reduced by making the unevenness of the substrate surface shallow, Increasing the degree of concavity and convexity by reducing the shaping (surfaces with different angles), and weakening the degree of concavity and convexity by increasing the shaping (surfaces with different angles) of the substrate surface.

  Further, the inner lens may be any one that makes information written on the substrate difficult to see, and is not limited to one that makes all information written on the board difficult to see, and is written on the substrate. Some of the information may be recognizable to the extent that it can be recognized as information (to the extent that it can be recognized as lines or characters), or some or all of the information written on the substrate Can be recognized, but it is said that it is difficult to recognize the written information as information (to the extent that lines and characters can be visually recognized in an unclear state). It may be difficult to recognize, or it is difficult to recognize the fact that some information is written on all or a part of the information written on the substrate, to the extent that it is difficult to recognize itself (to the extent that lines and characters cannot be viewed at all). May be .

  Further, in the above-mentioned example, the resin molding member whose surface is three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape is used as the inner lens, but instead of the resin molding member or in addition to the resin molding member, all of the information written on the substrate or A light-transmitting sheet may be used to obscure a part of the information or to make it difficult to recognize that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the substrate. For example, a thin-walled circular shape provided between an LED board 5070 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in the light emission effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 and a decorative body 5040 covering the surface of the LED board 5070 are provided. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050 which is processed and molded from the transparent resin plate may be used, or a sheet such as a frosted glass translucent sheet or a crystal translucent sheet which reduces transparency. May be used. In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be made narrower than that using a three-dimensionally formed member, which increases the degree of freedom in design.

  Further, in the above example, the decorative body and the inner lens are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light emitting member such as an LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided except when a game effect is not performed, such as during a period in which the demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. Among them, a plurality of light-emitting members (LEDs provided on the door frame 3 in this example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 in this example) are provided at positions that are always visible to the player. , An LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, an LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, a back bottom right The LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the effect unit 3250 and the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 ED, a proportion which is lit for each, etc.), is set to be higher than the ratio that is turned off. Accordingly, the period during which the light is turned on can be made longer than the period during which the substrate is turned off, and in the lighted state, each substrate can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information unrelated to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts on which the electronic parts are arranged. Further, since information unrelated to the game can be made hard to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent the deterioration of the design, and to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. become.

[Covering of board mounted on movable decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear upper and lower rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed behind the effect display device 1600. The information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is also visually recognized by the player on the board provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I try to make it difficult. The details will be described below.

  As described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are normally difficult for the player to visually recognize (when not driven). It is housed at a position (standby position), and moves to a position (drive position) visible to a player in front of the effect display device 1600 during an effect (during driving), and becomes visible to the player.

  Therefore, in a normal state (at the time of non-driving), the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back rotation back decoration 3440 on the back are provided. A back-upper decorative board 3452 provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a back-left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back left decorative body 3521 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front, and The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, which is provided on each of the back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, It is difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as outlines on which electronic components are arranged.

  On the other hand, at the time of performing an effect (at the time of driving) in which the back movable movable body 3110, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed in front of the performance display device 1600. In the drive, the rear movable ornament 3110, the rear upper rotating ornament 3440, the rear left ornament 3521, and the rear right ornament 3621 are driven from the standby position where it is difficult for the player to see. By moving to the position, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back face provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440 provided on the front. Rear decorative board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and rear right decorative. Body 3621 The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape on which the electronic components are arranged are respectively provided on the rear right decoration board 3622 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. Information such as lines may be visually recognized by the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 299 (A), the rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rotation decoration 3440, the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are rendered and displayed. When exposed in front of the apparatus 1600, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration body 3440, and the back left. The LED mounted on each of the rear left back decorative board 3522 provided behind the decorative body 3521 and the back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 is controlled to emit light, and each board is visually recognized. Hard to be done.

  That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back-side drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-side movable decorative body 3110, or the back-top rear-rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to drive the back-side rear rotation. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the back right decoration body 3621. In the case of exposing, the back decoration motor 3126, the back rotation drive motor 3454, the back left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 are driven in synchronization with the timing of driving the back decoration motor 3110. The back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back left back decoration 3521 are provided. The rear mounted left decorative board 3522 and the back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative board 3621 are controlled to emit light, and the movable decorative body (the back movable decorative body 3110, the back Timing when the movable decorative body has been moved from the driving position to the standby position after the movable effect or the light emitting effect by the upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 (back rear driving). Motor 3126, rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625). Substrate 3114, back-upper decorative board 3452 provided behind back-upper rotary decoration 3440, back-left decorative board provided behind back-left decorative body 3521 522, and turns off the LED mounted on each of the back right rear decorative substrate 3622 provided in the rear of the back right rear decorative body 3621.

  As a result, the rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rotation decoration 3440, the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are rendered in a state where the LEDs mounted thereon are controlled to emit light. Since the LED is exposed in front of the device 1600, each substrate can be made difficult to be visually recognized by light emitted from these LEDs, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the part number written on each substrate By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the pin numbers, the outlines on which the electronic components are arranged, etc., it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being collapsed and to suppress a decrease in designability. It will be possible to suppress a decline in entertainment interest. In other words, in a situation where the player easily recognizes the board in a state where the board is easily visible, the LED mounted on each board is controlled to emit light so that the player cannot easily see the board.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is described near the LED on each board. Then, in order to cause the LED to emit light in the vicinity of the information, the light emitted from the LED causes the number of pins of the connector on the board, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic component to be arranged, and the like. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the area where the information is written. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light source (LED) is arranged near information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline in which the electronic parts are arranged, and the light is emitted. By doing so, it is possible to make these pieces of information less visible.

  Note that the timing at which the LEDs are controlled to emit light is not limited to the above, and as shown in FIG. 299 (B), at least the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back rear left decoration body When the 3521 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 have finished moving to the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600, that is, when reaching the drive position and stopping the movement, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. Rear decorative board 3114, rear rear decorative board 3452 provided behind rear upper rotating decoration 3440, rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind rear left decorative body 3521, and right rear decorative body 3522 The LEDs mounted on each of the rear rear right decoration substrates 3622 provided behind the 3621 are controlled to emit light, and after the movable effect is finished, the drive position is moved to the standby position. When starting, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear decoration board 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-rear left decoration body 3521 are provided. The LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3522 and the rear rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decoration body 3621 may be turned off.

  That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back-side drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-side movable decorative body 3110, or the back-side rear-rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to drive the back-side rear rotation. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to display the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the rear right decoration 3621. In the case of being exposed, the back-side movable decorative body 3110, the back-top rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative body 3621 are exposed to the driving position, so that After the back decorative movable body 3110, the driving of the drive motor 3126, the back rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped. Rear decorative board 3114 provided on the rear side, rear decorative board 3452 provided on the rear side of the rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear left decorative board 3522 provided on the rear of the rear left decorative body 3521, and rear right of the rear side. The timing of controlling the light emission of the LEDs mounted on each of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the decorative body 3621, ending the movable effect and starting the movement from the drive position to the standby position (rear rear drive motor 3126, A back-rear decoration board 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in accordance with the timing of starting driving of the back-rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625). Back-up rear decorative board 3452 provided behind back-up rear rotating ornamental body 3440, back-rear left ornamental base provided behind rear-rear left ornamental body 3521 3522, and LED may be caused to turn off the to be mounted on each of the back right rear decorative substrate 3622 provided in the rear of the back right rear decorative body 3621.

  Thereby, when it is displayed at the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600 and becomes most visible to the player (the back rear drive motor 3126, the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525) And when the driving of the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped), the rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear movable decoration 3110 and the rear upper decoration provided behind the rear upper rotating decoration 3440. The LED mounted on each of the substrate 3452, the back left back decoration board 3522 provided behind the back back left decorative body 3521, and the back right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back back right decoration 3621 is caused to emit light. This makes it difficult for each substrate to be visually recognized. When the LED is off, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration 3440, and the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the rotating decoration 3440 The rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are exposed to the player in a state where they can be easily viewed. However, since the back movable decoration 3110, the back upper rotation decoration 3440, the back left decoration 3521, and the back right decoration 3621 are moving, the player stares at each board. Because it is difficult to perform this, even if each LED is turned off, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is written on each board. Recognized by player Hardly.

  Note that the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the movable back decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back decoration provided behind the back left decoration 3521 are provided. The timing at which the LEDs mounted on each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are not limited to those described above, but are movable behind the rear. During the movement of the decorative body 3110, the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative body 3621 from the standby position to the driving position, for example, the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-upper-back rotating decoration The timing at which the body 3440, the back back left decorative body 3521, and the back back right decorative body 3621 become actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before reaching the driving position, and the like. The LED may be caused to emit light, or each LED may be turned on at the timing of starting the movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621. At the time of the effect of emitting light and the timing at which the back movable decoration 3110, the back upper decoration 3440, the back left decoration 3521, and the back right decoration 3621 reach the driving position and stop driving each motor. The effect of causing each LED to emit light may be executed, that is, one or more of a plurality of timings may be executed in combination.

  In addition, in the present example, the state in which the LED is emitting light indicates a state in which the emission is controlled in a predetermined emission pattern, and is not limited to the state in which the LED continues to be illuminated, but at least the illuminated state and the extinguished state. It also includes a blinking state that is controlled once or more. In any case, the player can make the LED emit light dazzling, making it difficult for the board to be visually recognized, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number on each board. In addition, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as outlines on which the electronic components are arranged, and it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being collapsed, thereby suppressing a decrease in design, It is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the decline.

  In addition, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110, the back top decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440, and the back board provided behind the back left decoration body 3521 are provided. When the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are made to emit light, high luminance (in this example, the maximum luminance that can be set). Value (100%), and may be half or more (85% or more in this example) of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example), or may be higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600. May be emitted). As a result, the LEDs are caused to emit light at a higher brightness at a position closer to the player than the effect display device 1600, and thus it is possible to make the player feel the light from these LEDs dazzling and make it difficult to visually recognize each substrate. In addition, in order to irradiate the player who pays attention to the effect display performed on the effect display device 1600 with a strong light more than the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the player is familiar with the brightness of the effect display device 1600. The probability that the user feels dazzling increases, and the effect of making each substrate difficult to see is enhanced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration body 3440, and the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration body 3440 The back left left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the back right right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 each adopt white as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front face). At the same time, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component is arranged on the LED mounting surface. It is printed on yellow silk with low contrast. As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as the outline. When the present technical idea is exposed to the front of the effect display device 1600 and becomes the most visible state, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the movable back decoration 3110, and the back decoration body rotating above the back. The back upper back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back back left decoration body 3521, the back back left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back back left decoration body 3521, and the back back right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back back right decoration body 3621 are provided. The LED mounted on each of the LEDs emits light so that each substrate is hardly visually recognized. In addition to this technology, a white resist is used as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and a yellow silk is formed on the LED mounting surface. Although various effects can be enhanced by printing various types of information, these techniques are not essential for solving the problem.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the game effect performed by the effect display device 1600, the big hit expectation degree (possibly a big hit) of the change display being executed and the change display (holding display) to be performed in the future is suggested. The expectation suggestion production is performed. In this expected effect suggestion effect, the type of the image of the character or the like displayed on the effect display device 1600, the color, the pattern, and the like indicate the big hit expectation. For example, when the same character is displayed, the big hit expectation indicated as white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold as the color of the character increases.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440, and the back left decoration body 3521 are provided. The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the like on the LED mounting surface of the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 are provided. As a color of silk for printing information such as outlines on which electronic components are arranged, yellow used for indicating the above-mentioned expectation of big hit is adopted. Therefore, it is irrelevant to the game printed on these substrates when the rear back movable decoration body 3110, the rear top rear rotation decoration body 3440, the rear rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear rear right decoration body 3621 are visibly exposed. Although it prevents the player from clearly identifying that the information is written, even if it is recognized that there is something yellow, it suggests the jackpot expectation and plays it. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is written.

  In addition, among the colors used to suggest the jackpot expectation, yellow, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, has the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts arranged on the LED mounting surface. Since it is used as the color of the silk that prints information such as outlines, it can make the player who thinks of the big hit expectation degree think that the big hit expectation is high, and suppresses the decline in the enjoyment of the game it can. In addition, since the yellow color used as the color of silk has a very high expected jackpot expectation (70% jackpot expectation) and is similar to gold, a back provided behind the back movable decoration 3110. Of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the rear upper rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621. A player who just glances at the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided at the rear may mistakenly recognize that it is golden, and it is very likely that it will be a big hit by recognizing that there is something like golden. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the player who recognizes that it is suggested to be high. In addition, as shown in FIG. 149, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 has a transparent portion (for example, a portion of the decoration body 3111 excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d) and an opaque portion (metal decoration portion 3111d). Is formed with a gold-colored metal decoration portion 3111d. Then, when the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is visibly exposed, it can be recognized that the player who glanced at the metal decoration portion 3111d suggested that the jackpot expectation is very high. Note that the metal decoration portion 3111d is not limited to the same color as the gold color having a high jackpot expectation degree among the colors indicating the jackpot expectation degree, but is similar to the gold color and is similar to the gold color or similar to the gold color. May be formed in a different color (for example, yellow) or the like, or a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-removable decorative body 3110 and a back surface provided behind the back-rear rotating decoration 3440. Silk printed on the LED mounting surface of the rear decorative substrate 3452, the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided rearward of the rear rear right decorative body 3621. In addition to the above-mentioned yellow as the color of the above, among the colors that suggest the jackpot expectation degree, the same color as the gold color with a high jackpot expectation degree or a color similar to the gold color and a color similar to the gold color Etc. It may be so that.

  In addition, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back left decorative body 3521, and the back right decorative body 3621 of the effect display device 1600 from the standby position where it is difficult for the player to see. It is designed to move to a driving position that can be visually recognized by a player in front, and during this movement, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and the back rotation back decoration 3440. Staring at the back-upper decorative board 3452, the back-left decorative board 3522 provided at the back of the back-left decorative body 3521, and the back-right decorative board 3622 provided at the back of the back-right decorative body 3621. Is difficult, so a player who only looks at these boards at a glance has written information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. Less likely to be recognized that, easily reminded suggestions jackpot expectations. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a decrease in design.

  In addition, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back decoration provided behind the back left decoration 3521 are provided. A member similar to the above-described inner lens may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621. Thereby, even if these boards are visually recognized at the time of light emission of the LED, it is possible to suppress the information irrelevant to the game written on the boards from being recognized as information by the player. It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

  Further, in the above-described example, the movable decorative body on which the substrate on which the LED is mounted is mounted (the movable decorative body 3110 at the back, the rotating decorative body 3440 at the back, the left decorative body 3521 at the back, and the right decorative body 3621 at the back). Is moved from the standby position, which is difficult for the player to see, to the drive position, which is visible to the player, but by moving the movable decorative body, the decorative body on which the board on which the LED substrate is mounted is mounted can be played. The present technical idea can be applied to a case where the state is changed to a state that is difficult for a player to visually recognize and a state that is visible to a player. For example, the front and rear movable decorative body 3110, which is covered by the front and rear front decorative body 3421 and is usually difficult for the player to visually recognize, is moved back and forth by moving the front and rear front decorative body 3421 to the raised position and the lowered position. Movable from the state of being difficult to see by the player who covers the front of the decorative body 3110 to the state in which the front of the decorative body 3110 is opened and can be seen by the player (exposed state). Even when the light emitting effect and the movable effect are performed by the decorative body 3110, the number of pins of the connector, the IC direction, and the part number described on the rear rear decorative board 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decorative body 3110. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the pin number and the outline of the electronic component.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 300, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, when the motor is driven to move the front back decoration 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the back front The LEDs mounted on the back-and-back decorative board 3114 provided behind the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light in accordance with the timing of driving the motor that moves the decorative body 3421, and the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 emits light. After the end of the movable effect, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is matched with the timing when the back-front decorative body 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor for moving the back-front decorative body 3421 is stopped). The LED mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided at the rear of the LED may be turned off.

  Accordingly, the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light, so that the back rear decoration 3110 is difficult to visually recognize from the player. It changes to a state in which it can be visually recognized (the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 is displayed so that it can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which light emission is controlled). Therefore, the back decoration board 3114 can be made hard to be visually recognized by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, Since the information such as the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being collapsed, and the design is improved. Can suppress below, it will be able to suppress the lowering of game interest.

  The timing at which the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 is controlled to emit light is not limited to the above-described timing. The timing may be the timing when the decorative body 3110 is actually visible from the player, the timing immediately before the back upper decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. It may be timing. That is, during the movement of the back upper decorative body 3421, the player is distracted by the movement of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is less likely to pay attention to the back movable movable body 3110. The LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 may be controlled to emit light at a timing when the state is easily noticed.

  Further, the front movable decorative body movable to the predetermined standby position and the drive position, and the front movable decorative body provided at the standby position behind the front movable decorative body and difficult to visually recognize from the player due to the movement of the front movable decorative body to the drive position. When the state is changed from a state to a state that can be visually recognized by a player and a rear movable decorative body operable in a predetermined mode (rotation, vibration, or the like) is provided, the rear movable decorative body is set to a predetermined position. The information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is written on the board provided on the back side of the rear movable decorative body by operating in the mode of You may make it difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  For example, the back upper decorative body 3421 is configured to be movable between a rising position and a lowering position, and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is hardly visible to a player behind the back upper decorative body 3421 at the rising position. When the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600 and the motor is driven to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the rising position to the lowering position, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is provided. In accordance with the timing of driving the motor to move the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 to rotate the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, after the end of the light emitting effect and movable effect by the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, In accordance with the timing when the front upper back body 3421 is moved from the lower position to the upper position (timing to stop the motor for moving the front upper back body 3421). The upper front rotary drive motor 3425 may be stopped.

  As a result, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is changed from a state in which it is difficult for the player to view it to a state in which it can be seen by the player when the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 is operated. It becomes difficult to stare at the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 provided behind the front rotating decorative body 3410, and the number of pins of the connector described on the back front decorative substrate 3422, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the electronic component By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline of the pachinko machine, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from deteriorating and the deterioration of the design can be suppressed. become able to.

  In this example, the state in which the movable decorative body (in this example, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410) is operating indicates a state in which the movable decorative body is driven and controlled in a predetermined operation mode. The present invention is not limited to the state of continuously moving without stopping, but also includes an intermittent operation state in which at least the moving state and the stopped state are controlled at least once.

  Further, the timing of operating the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the back-front rotating decorative body 3410 may be moved while the back-up front decorative body 3421 is moving from the raised position to the lowered position. It may be the timing when it is actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. Good. In other words, since the player is less likely to pay attention to the movement of the front back decoration 3421 during the movement of the front back decoration 3421 and pays attention to the front front rotation decoration 3410, the front front decoration 3421 is not likely to occur. May be moved at a timing when the back front upper rotating decorative body 3410 is easily noticed.

[Acclusion assistance by surrounding light emitting means]

  Next, an example of an example in which information such as the number of pins of a connector, the direction of an IC, a part number, a pin number, and an outline on which an electronic component is arranged, which is written on a board on which an LED is mounted, is difficult to be visually recognized by a player. A modified example will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined LED is turned off under specific conditions. In this case, since the LED is turned off, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the electronic There is a possibility that information such as outlines where the components are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even when a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition, information written on a board on which this LED is mounted is made difficult to be visually recognized by a player. The details will be described below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to move the lower-lower middle decorating body unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, When the decorative body 3440 is moved to a lower appearance position than the back upper front decoration body 3421, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back front left rendering unit 3700. When moving, the back right rotating decoration 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back front right rendering unit 3800, and the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the back drive motor 3126. In the case where the lock by the lock member 3134 is released by moving and the back movable decoration 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back front left decorative body is used. The LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the knit 3710 (the LED arranged in the area A in FIG. 301) and the LED mounted on the back front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400 (FIG. 301, an LED arranged in the area B in the figure, an LED mounted on the front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decorative body unit 3810 (an LED arranged in the area C in FIG. An LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the right effect unit 3250 (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) and mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 The LED (the LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) is turned off.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the movable decorative bodies (the lower-back middle decorative body unit 3320, the upper-back rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the rear-back left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the rear-right rotating in front of the effect display device 1600). When performing the effect of displaying the decorative body 3610 and the back movable movable body 3110), the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off, so that the effect is displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. The visual effect of the effect performed by the movable decorative body is not obstructed. In addition, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is not moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the LED mounted on the lower back first decoration board 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is turned off. (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) may be used.

  When turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and the door frame right side decorative substrate 418). The door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the dish center upper decorative board 314 are also controlled to emit light. The light emission is controlled. That is, in a situation where the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off and the board on which the LEDs are mounted is easily visible, the right side of the door frame provided so as to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided. The LED mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450 The LED mounted on each of the center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 is controlled to emit light.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (on the player side) with respect to the game board 5. It is provided so as to project. That is, the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5.

  Therefore, when the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are provided. By controlling the light emission of the LED, the light emission control of the periphery of the game board 5 can be performed at a position closer to the player than the game board 5, so that the light emission of the LED can be felt dazzling, or the position close to the player is normal. It is possible to prevent the player's attention from the game board 5 toward the door frame 3 and to stare in the pachinko machine 1 direction by performing the light emission control that is emphasized more.

  As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the board on which LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the pin number on each board, Since it becomes possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the outline of the electronic components, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to prevent the deterioration of the design. It becomes possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

  In addition, the light emission mode when the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light includes, for example, a state in which the LED is continuously lit for a certain period, a blinking state in which the LED is switched at least once between a lighting state and a non-lighting state. Higher than normal brightness (in this example, the maximum settable brightness (100%), more than half of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example) Or may be higher in luminance than the backlight of the effect display device 1600), and light up (including not only a light that keeps on for a certain period, but also a blinking state and a flash), and the like. Is mentioned. In any case, the emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 is made dazzling, or the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light by emphasizing the LED more than usual, so that the player's attention is paid to the game board 5. To the door frame 3 around the game board 5 to prevent the player from staring in the direction of the pachinko machine 1 or to make the difference between light and dark clear so that the portion which is darker than other areas Since the visual recognition can be made difficult, the board on which the LED provided on the game board 5 is mounted can be made hard to visually recognize. As a result, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like are recorded on the board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 is mounted. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being visually perceived and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from collapsing, so that a decrease in the design can be suppressed.

  Further, under specific conditions, an LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, an LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and The LED mounted on the front right decorative board 3814 behind the front right decorative body unit 3810, the LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the lower right right rendering unit 3250, and the back of the lower lower left rendering unit 3200 Even when the LED mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the LED are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on. Therefore, by the light from the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light from the LED provided on the door frame 3, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back front front of the back effect production unit 3400. A decorative substrate 3422, a back front right decorative substrate 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, a back lower right decorative substrate 3253 of the back lower right rendering unit 3250, and a back lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the back lower left rendering unit 3200. Since light can be emitted from the periphery of these substrates by sandwiching, and by this, light and darkness can be generated between the region where the substrate is arranged and the periphery of the substrate, so that the substrate portion that is darker than the surroundings It can be difficult to see.

  In addition, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 A member similar to the above-described inner lens is provided in front of each of the decorative substrate 3814, the lower right lower decorative substrate 3253 of the lower right lower direction unit 3250, and the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower rear left directing unit 3200. You may do so. Thereby, even if these boards are visually recognized when the mounted LEDs are turned off, information irrelevant to the game written on the boards can be suppressed from being recognized as information by the player, It is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing a decrease in design, and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which the LEDs are mounted on the front surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back Each of the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200 is an LED. In addition to adopting white color as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface), information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic components are arranged is reflected on the LED mounting surface. It is printed with yellow silk, which has a close ratio and lightness, and has little visual difference (contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as the outline. Note that, when the LED is turned off, the present technical concept controls the light emission around the board on which the LED is mounted in a predetermined manner so that each board is hardly visually recognized. Although the effect can be enhanced by adopting white as a resist on the mounting surface (front surface) and printing various information with yellow silk on the LED mounting surface, these technologies are used to solve the problem. Not required.

  In addition, under specific conditions, movable decorations (under-back middle decoration unit 3320, back-upper rotation decoration 3440, back-left rotation decoration 3510, back-right rotation decoration 3610, And the effect of displaying the back movable decorative body 3110) is described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422 of the back top directing unit 3400, The LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253, the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, the movable decorative body (lower middle On the game board 5 such as the decoration unit 3320, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610, and the LED provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110). While the plurality of LEDs provided are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (a state where the LEDs are not turned off), for example, the door frame 3. The present technical idea can be applied even when a door opening error occurs when opening is detected. Also, even under specific conditions, among the light emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5, those that display important information related to the game such as the function display unit 1400 are not turned off. Is also good.

[Occupation of the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided on the effect operation unit 300 and having the LED mounted on the surface. An example will be described in which information such as a contour line to be displayed is hardly visually recognized by a player. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off (not limited to turning off the light, but may be one that lowers the brightness than usual). . In this case, since the LED is turned off, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is visually recognized, so that the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the component number, and the pin number of the connector written on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are displayed. In addition, there is a possibility that information such as an outline on which the electronic component is arranged is visually recognized by the player. In this example, even if the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, or in the standby lighting state in which the brightness is lower than normal, The information written on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is made difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The details will be described below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when performing a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. An LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided therein, and an LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer decorative lens 379, the outer button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are illuminated and decorated.

  Then, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is finished, the center button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 The LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when performing the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. Then, the central button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are illuminated and decorated. Attention is paid to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the unit 300 to urge these operations.

  On the other hand, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not normally performed, the center provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. The LED mounted on the surface of the button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are provided on the surface. When the LED installed and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, the effect operation unit 300 is operated, The center of the effect operation button unit 360 is controlled by controlling the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 for a certain period of time. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are light emitting devices. To.

  This makes it difficult for the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, Since information such as pin numbers and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by a player, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being disrupted, and the design can be prevented from deteriorating. Can be suppressed. As described above, during the normal time when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated and the player effects. When attention is paid to the operation unit 301, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 are controlled to emit light, and the central button cover 375 and the peripheral decoration lens of the effect operation button unit 360 are controlled. By decorating the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, which are light-emitted, and the light emitted from the LEDs, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377. Become.

  When the effect operation unit 301 is operated in a normal state, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 is controlled to emit light for a certain period, and the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 emits light. Control to decorate, control to light-emitting the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 over a certain period of time, and to emit and decorate the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and effect operation provided below the effect operation ring 330 One or a combination of two or more of: controlling the LED mounted on the surface of the ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light for a certain period of time and causing the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 to emit light. May be executed). If the effect operation unit 301 is operated again before the certain period elapses, these LEDs may be turned off when a certain period elapses from the operation. That is, these LEDs may be turned off when a period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a predetermined period after the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

  Further, the LED for light emission control may be made different depending on the part of the effect operation unit 300 that is normally operated. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the 360 are controlled for light emission for a certain period of time. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 is turned on for a certain period. By controlling the light emission, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is decorated with light emission. Good. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission of the LED provided in the part that the player is paying attention to, and it is possible to prevent the board on which the LED is mounted from being visually recognized.

  Further, in the above-described example, it is mounted on the surface of the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. Although the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are shown as being turned off, the present invention is not limited to the light that is turned off, and it is a player participation type effect. A light emission mode at the time of prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and a light emission mode at the time of standby in which the luminance is reduced compared to the light state at the time of the effect (including not only the lighted state but also the lighted state). The present technical concept can be applied as long as the light emission is controlled by switching.

  In addition, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect. When the production operation unit 300 is operated during the normal operation in which the LEDs mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light in the standby emission mode, In addition to or in addition to the processing for controlling the light emission by switching from the standby light emission mode to the production light emission mode, in addition to the processing, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is drive-controlled to vibrate the pressing operation unit 303 for a certain period ( (Ascending and descending), and driving and controlling the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate or shake the rotation operation unit 302 for a certain period. May be or is (are rotationally alternately to the left and right).

  That is, the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated based on the operation of the effect operation unit 300 during the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. The board 377 is moved (vibrated in this example) so that it is difficult to stare, or the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is operated so as to overlap the front of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and obstruct the field of view. In the example, it may be rotated or vibrated). Thereby, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface of the center button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as outlines, the appearance of the world of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from collapsing, so that a decrease in design can be suppressed, and a decrease in amusement of the game can be suppressed.

  In this example, a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided therein, and a rendering operation ring 302 configured to form a surface of the rendering operation ring 330 and cover the front of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are provided. Although the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 at 330, a decoration body provided separately from the effect operation ring 330 is moved in front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352. The operation ring decoration substrate 352 may be operated so as to at least partially overlap with the operation ring decoration substrate 352 (vibration, reciprocating operation, or the like) so that the visual recognition of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 may be blocked, or the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300. Without moving the center button decoration board 376 and the outer periphery button decoration board 377 provided in the 360, Even if only the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 that cover the surfaces of the button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are vibrated, it is difficult to visually recognize the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377. Good.

  The center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is shifted from a normal (non-operating) reference position (origin) by the pressing detection sensor 381 based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. When it is detected, the operation of returning the center button cover 375 to the reference position (origin) (origin return operation) may be performed, or the production operation button unit 360 may be pulled by the elevation detection sensor 382 to perform the operation. When it is detected that the effect operation button unit 360 is deviated from the normal (non-movable) lowering position, an operation (origin return operation) of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin) is performed. It may be performed, or the effect operation button unit 360 is set to the normal (non-movable) lowering position by the elevation detecting sensor 382. Even when performing an operation of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference point (origin) (origin return operation) when it is detected that the position is a halfway position that is neither the ascending position during movement Good.

  In this case, since the central button decoration board 376 and the outer circumference button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 move with the origin returning operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these boards. In addition to the case where the effect operation button unit 360 is operated, the above-described movable decorative body (back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear left decoration body 3521, back rear right decoration body 3621). When the movable ornament is returned from the standby position (origin), the movable ornament may be returned to the standby position (origin) (origin return operation). Even during operation, the substrates mounted on the movable decorative body move, so that it is possible to make it difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates.

  It should be noted that the above-described movable decorative bodies (under-back middle decorative body unit 3320, back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back-back left rotating decorative body 3510, back-back right rotating decorative body 3610, and back-back movable decorative body 3110) Even when it is detected that the state has deviated from the standby position or the drive position due to the influence, the operation of returning to the standby position (origin return operation) may be performed. Lower middle decoration unit 3320, rear upper rotation decoration 3440, rear left rotation decoration 3510, rear right rotation decoration 3610, and rear movable decoration 3110) are moved and mounted on the surface of the substrate. Can be difficult to stare at. That is, in the movable decorative bodies that are difficult to be visually recognized by a player, such as the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510, the back-right rotating decorative body 3610, and the back-moving decorative body 3110, the standby state. In a state where the position of the board is shifted from the position and there is a possibility that the surface of the board mounted may be visually recognized by a player, it is difficult to stare at the surface of the board by operating the movable decorative body and moving the board. At the same time, the substrate may be moved to the standby position to change from a state in which the surface of the substrate is visible to a state in which the surface of the substrate is difficult to view.

  In the above-described player participation type production, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 301 is valid for a predetermined period of the game production, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 301 or the pressing operation is performed. When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display content of the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the operation. In other words, the execution of the player participation type effect causes the player to pay attention to the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the effect is produced before the start of the period during which the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are valid in the player participation type effect (operation effective period). The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The LED mounted on the surface is controlled to emit light in a light emission mode for effecting, and the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. , The center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, and the Are less likely to be visually recognized the ring decorative substrate 352.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 302, at the timing of starting the player participation type effect before the operation of the effect operation unit 301 becomes effective, a central button provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 The LED mounted on the surface of the decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operating ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operating ring 330 are controlled by emitting light to effect the effect. The center button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emitting decorated, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are decorated. When a period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) has elapsed, these LEDs are turned off. As a result, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral button cover 380, before the player recognizes that the player participation type effect is started and pays attention to the effect operation unit 301. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated, and the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are suppressed from being visually recognized, and It is possible to prevent information related to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, from being visually recognized.

  The light emission mode of the LED may be changed between before the start of the operation effective period and during the operation effective period. Or the brightness of the LED may be changed to determine whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is valid. That is, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the timing of starting the player participation type effect, and the effect operation ring The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below 330 is controlled to emit light in the first effect light emission mode, and during the operation effective period, from the first effect light emission mode to the second effect light emission mode. Light emission control may be performed by switching to the light emission mode. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, the light emission control is performed by switching from the second effect light emission mode to the first effect light emission mode, and the light emission control is performed after the game effect is switched from the first effect light emission mode to the standby light emission mode. You may do it.

  Further, when the player participation type effect is started, a display prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, an image similar to the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, and "press a button!" Is displayed to urge the player to press the effect operation unit 301. It should be noted that an expectation suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree may be executed by changing a mode (a color or a pattern in this example) of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600. . As described above, in the present example, the big hit expectation indicating the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold is set to be high, and the image mode of the rendering operation unit 301 is changed to one of these. The color may be used to indicate the jackpot expectation.

  Also, an LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and an effect operation ring decoration provided below the effect operation ring 330 When the LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 352 is to be controlled to emit light in the second effect light emission mode, the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to the same as the image of the effect operation unit 301. The light emission may be controlled in colors (including the same). As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be illuminated and decorated in association with the expectation suggestion effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the sense of presence is enhanced. In the case where the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is decorated with light emission before the timing of displaying the image of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, the image of the effect display unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Until the timing, when the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated with a light emission color (white in this example) of a normal (the color with the lowest expected hit), and the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the timing. After a predetermined period (e.g., several seconds) has elapsed from the above, the color may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 to perform light emission decoration.

[Brightness adjustment of lamp and LED]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment operates the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 to rotate the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board). 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the dish upper left decorative board 273, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the dish upper right decorative board 278 and the dish center upper decorative board 314 may be adjustable in brightness.) And LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). Door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate 457, mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the back top decoration board 3452, the back left decoration board 3522, and the back back right decoration board 3622 mounted on the movable decorative body The brightness of the plurality of LEDs may be adjustable, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable, but a display for displaying important information related to the game. (For example, the LED provided in the function display unit 1400) is preferably not adjustable in brightness.) And the brightness of the LED is set in 5% steps from 70% to 100%. It can be adjusted.

  Specifically, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. When the counterclockwise rotation operation is performed, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

  When adjusting the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is reduced until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the display operation unit 300 is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 from being visually recognized, and the connectors described on these boards. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from losing its view of the world. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, since the player participation type effect is not performed as described above, it is mounted on the surface of the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated in a normal state where the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, the center button decoration board The LED mounted on the surface of 376, the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. Is controlled for light emission for a certain period of time, and the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral decoration of the production operation button unit 360 are provided. Emit light decoration and a rotating operation unit 302 of the lens 379 and the staging operation ring 330. When the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the barometer of the effect display device 1600 disappears and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off.

  In this way, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 while operating the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the brightness, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, It is possible to make the surfaces of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LEDs.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and below the effect operation ring 330. With respect to the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in, the brightness cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LED provided in the rendering operation unit 300 which is provided at a position close to the player and which is easily noticed is not adjusted, and the light emission is controlled at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is to be light-emission-decorated in the above-described effect light emission mode, the effect operation unit 300 is always mounted on the surface of the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 with a certain luminance or higher. LED can be made to emit light, and is illuminated from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the staging operation unit 300 (a situation in which the staging operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation-type staging or volume adjustment is being performed). The central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made hard to be visually recognized by the applied light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the components described on these boards are provided. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the world of the pachinko machine 1 To prevent the watch collapses can suppress deterioration of design property, it can be suppressed lowering of game interest.

  In addition, as described above, the center button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 adopt white as a resist on the mounting surface, and the number of connector pins is yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is printed. As described above, in the present example, since such information is printed on the mounting surface of the board with yellow silk, which has a small visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, not only when the LED is turned on, but also when the LED is turned off. However, it is difficult to identify such information.

  It should be noted that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period (for example, before and after the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped for a certain period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the peripheral control MPU is activated). It may be always executable except for one or both of a certain period of time), or a specific condition such as a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for demonstration. It may be executable only when is satisfied. In addition, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 according to the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed). May be changed immediately and the case where the result of the brightness adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302 may be changed.

  In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is opened. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and back bottom left effect unit 3200 LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, movable decorative body (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decoration body 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration body 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration body 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as LEDs provided on the back rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (unlightable state) and provided on the door frame 3. LEDs (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, The upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper central decorative board 314 may also be controlled to emit light.) The light emission is controlled (lighting enabled state). That is, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is opened, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. However, it is not possible to determine the luminance based on the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not open (the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back-front left decoration board 3714 of the back-front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back-up effect unit 3400. LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, a movable decorative body (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration) A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the back back movable decoration body 3110) are turned off. Not controlled for (lighted state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the brightness can be determined based on the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

  In addition, as described above, the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back rear Also for the decorative substrate 3452, the rear-rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the rear-rear right decorative substrate 3622, white is used as the resist of the mounting surface, and the mounting surface is yellow silk with the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the parts. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a lighting-disabled state, such information can be hardly identified.

[Backside emission of pachinko machine]
Conventionally, on the back side of a pachinko machine, only a control board and the like are mounted, and it is not a part to be recognized by a player. Therefore, no special measures are taken except for countermeasures against fraud. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a novel configuration that has not existed in the past so that various work efficiencies with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be enhanced. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 303 to 308.

  FIG. 303 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body at the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 304 is in an appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. FIG. 305 is a side view schematically showing light from the light-emitting decorative body, FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a back decoration board provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 306 is a light-emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 307 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 308 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface of the game board viewed from the left back. It is.

(About the light from the luminous ornament)
In the gaming board 5 of this example, an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided. The effect display device 1600 is visually recognized from the front side and surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is provided with a plurality of light-emitting decorations. The back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. In contrast, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while the various units having the light-emitting decorative body are located inside the back box 3010 at a position forward of the effect display device 1600. Installed.

  As the light emitting decorative body of this example, there are provided a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front decoration 3421, a back-up rear decoration 3451, a back-back movable decoration 3110, and the like. Regarding the LED mounted in, there are a case where it emits light as a part of the effect when the symbol is variably displayed, and a case where it emits light as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not variably displayed.

  First, the back upper front decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front decoration 3421 of the back production unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back front decoration is provided. At the position on the front side of the center of the body 3421, a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and includes a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. In addition, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 in the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are stacked on the front and rear, and the front petals are connected to each other. The lens is formed so as to be rotated so as to be located between the lens portions, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion, and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 303, a back upper decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the front upper back decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. Then, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 causes a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is a lens of the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421. After reaching the part, the lens parts of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player), a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs. The top view type LED can emit light toward the front of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (the player side). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back front rotating ornament 3410 and the back front ornament 3421 located in front, with the back front rotating ornament 3410 and the back front ornament. The lens portion of 3421 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-top front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly illuminated. In addition, especially when the LED is in a non-emission state, the front of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is passed through the lens part of the back upper front decorative substrate 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even through the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421, The player can only recognize the lens portion as white, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 being visible.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back upper front decorative board 3422 (opposite to the player side; in other words, pachinko machines). (A back side of the machine 1).

  In addition, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on a surface portion excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components on the rear surface as well as the front surface. doing. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422.

  As shown in FIG. 303, in a state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper back rotation decoration is provided behind the left-hand side portion of the back-upper front decoration board 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are located, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative board 3422 emits light from the rear-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451. To be irradiated. A part of such light is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-upper decoration board 3422 (the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421). And a state in which light leaks out from the gap between the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, and such leaked light (leakage light) can be visually recognized by a player. Become. As described above, not only the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 emit light, but also the light leaks from the rear surface side of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-side front decorative body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that gives the player a sense of depth.

  Further, in a state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 The rear decoration 3451 is not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion in the up-down direction of the back-rear front decoration substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422 is removed from the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-movable decoration 3110, Without being blocked by the effect display device 1600, the light is directly emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in a state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422 has a back-upper decorative board 3422 behind all the parts in the left-right direction. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are not located. In addition, in a state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back-top front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 emits light from the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451, the back-back movable decoration 3110, and the effect display device. Irradiation is directed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above in detail, the back upper and lower decorative body 3451 is provided with a back upper and lower decorative body 3451 behind the back upper and lower decorative body 3421, and a position on the front side of the back and upper rear decorative body 3451 is provided. , A back decoration 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back-upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 so that the back petals are located between the front petals. The lens is formed in such a shape as to be rotated, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion, and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 303, a back upper decoration board 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451. The back upper decoration substrate 3452 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is applied to the lens portion of the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451. At this point, the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can be illuminated.

  In addition, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can move from the evacuation position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-upper front decoration body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, while the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are located. The effect display device 1600 is located at the rear in the lower part of. In addition, in a state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 have moved to the appearance positions, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back and upper rear decorative substrate 3452. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 located in front, and the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body The 3451 lens portion can be brightly illuminated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface portion of the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Can be brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 passes through the lens portion of the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the front surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is a player especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back upper decorative substrate 3452 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, it is possible to pass through the lens portions of the back upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3452 being visible behind the back surface.

  As shown in FIG. 303, in a state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, in front of the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. From this, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is reflected by the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the back-upper back decorative board 3452. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on an upper portion of a rear surface (a rear surface facing the rear surface of the gaming machine) of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 in this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear back decorative board 3452, a top-view type LED is mounted, which is behind the rear rear decorative board 3452 (on the side opposite to the player side. In other words, a pachinko machine). It is possible to irradiate light toward the rear side of the machine 1.

  Further, the rear upper decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the rear surface as well as on the rear surface, excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting components. have. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452.

  As shown in FIG. 303, in the state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, regardless of whether the back-movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, The rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part of the decorative substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 is not blocked by the back-movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, The light is directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the lights from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative board 3452 pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in a state in which the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, since they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. For this reason, in a state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are at the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper back decoration board 3452 are controlled not to emit light. .

  Next, the back movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above in detail, the rear movable decoration 3110 of the rear rearward effect unit 3100 is provided behind the rear upper decoration 3451. More specifically, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a decoration constituting a part of the decorative portion 3150 by embossed (relief) irregularities. A translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150; and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. A transparent light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent plate, and a back decoration board 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. I have. The back rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body 3111 (back rear The movable decoration body 3110) can be light-emitted.

  As shown in FIG. 304, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back-top front decorative body 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper part of the rear movable ornamental body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part of the rear movable ornamental body 3110. . In addition, in a state where the back movable movable body 3110 has moved to the appearance position, the movable decorative body 3110 is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a top view type plurality of second LEDs 3114b. Has been implemented. The first LED 3114a of the side view type can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back decoration board 3114, whereas the second LED 3114b of the top view type can emit light toward the back decoration board. Light can be emitted toward the side of 3114. Further, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided on the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiating plate 3113 emits light toward the front, and light can be uniformly radiated to the decorative body 3111 as a whole. ) Is easy to visually recognize and can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly illuminated. Further, in the back-rear decoration board 3114, the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 may be visible from the player side through the decoration body 3111 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. is there. In this regard, by providing a coating film made of a white solder resist on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration body 3111 of the back movable decoration body 3110 can be passed through the decoration body 3111 from the player side. Can be recognized as white, and a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 being seen can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 303, in a state in which the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the back-upper back The decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration 3410, the back decoration 3421, and the back decoration 3451. Then, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the movable decoration body 3110 behind the back. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable movable body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is diffused in the light guide radiating plate 3113 and irradiated toward the front of the light guide radiating plate 3113. Light is also emitted from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 passes through the light guide emission plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide emission plate 3113 (the back decoration board 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 emits light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be viewed brightly.

  Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide radiating plate 3113. A part of the light irradiated from the rear side is irradiated upward and backward from the back decoration substrate 3114. In the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not located above and behind the back rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decoration board 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear back decoration board 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further emits light near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 303, in the state where the back movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, the plurality of rear mounted decorative bodies 3110 are mounted on the front surface of the back movable movable body 3110. The light from the LED is not emitted toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

  Note that, in this example, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 conducts light. Although it is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guide emitting plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the side of the back view decorative substrate 3114 is illuminated on the front side of the back view decorative substrate 3114 or toward the top and rear of the back view decorative substrate 3114 so as to irradiate light toward the front and back. Preferably, an LED 3114a is provided. Thus, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is also irradiated toward the side of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back decoration board 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light-emitting area L2 and the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rails 553 located above and behind the back-rear decoration board 3114, and the back box 3010. After passing through the transparent part, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  The back box 3010 of this example is provided with a transparent portion in part, but a penetrating portion may be provided in the back box 3010 instead of the transparent portion. Also in such a case, light from the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, some of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the through-light portion of the back box 3010, and further on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a light-transmitting portion which is a transparent portion and a non-light-transmitting portion. Side) is white-printed or white-painted, or mirror-finished or mirror-finished, and can reflect light with higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting portion can efficiently reflect the light on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, regarding the above-described light emitting decorative body, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of various decorative substrates is not only radiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the front side, but is mounted on the front surface of a decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a luminous decorative body other than the luminous decorative body described above) to be specialized for the effect. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for the decorative substrate that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LED. , And the light from the LED is clearly visible.

  As another example, the rear back decoration substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 305, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted toward the decoration 3111 located in front of the back decoration board 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and goes to the rear of the decorative body 3111. When a plurality of holes are provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and goes rearward of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It becomes possible. Note that a decorative body base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. Holes are provided at corresponding positions. Thereby, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 partially reflects on the decoration 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Thus, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back decoration substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. The tank rail 553 is radiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper rear) of the back back decorative board 3114, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further passes behind the pachinko machine 1. The light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

  In the above description, the back decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The size of the holes is as small as possible. It is preferable that the LED is formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back decoration board 3114 is large, light from behind the back decoration board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is transmitted to the back decoration board 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the size of the hole provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  Similarly, the back decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The number of the holes is as small as possible. For example, the holes are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. It is preferable that the number of LEDs is smaller than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114 is increased, light from behind the back decoration board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is applied to the back decoration board 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  In the above description, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the back decoration board 3114. Similarly, the plurality of front decoration boards 3422 and the back decoration board 3452 penetrating in the front-back direction are also provided. Holes may be provided. In this manner, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 is reflected on the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the light is reflected on the back upper front decorative board 3421. Light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 through the plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422. Also, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 to form the back-upper decoration. Through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes the reflected light, and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3422. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen brightly.

  Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, but will be described below. As described in detail above, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, a back front left decorative body 3713 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the effect display. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, a back right decoration 3813 of the back right decoration unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are provided with characters, items, logos, etc. in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and are provided with non-translucent parts and translucent parts. It consists of an optical lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

  On the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713, a back front left decorative board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the back front left decorative board 3714 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the back front left The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be illuminated. In addition, the back front left decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side to the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portion from the player side can pass through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 from the player side. It can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

  In addition, on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player), side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs. The side-view type LED can reflect light to the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 and irradiate the light toward the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 (player side). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the front left front decorative body 3713 located in front, and the lens portion of the front front left decorative body 3713 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

  In the above description, the direction of the side-view type LED is provided on the back front left decorative board 3714 so that the light is emitted toward the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. In other words, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side face of the back box 3010 on the side close to the back back decorative board 3114 among the side faces of the back box 3010 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED is set. Are provided facing the left side surface of the back box 3010. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is irradiated toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. Becomes The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 307, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 emits light in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be seen brightly.

  Note that the back-front right decoration 3813 has the same configuration as the back-front left decoration 3713, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-front right decoration board 3814 is the same as the back-front right decoration board 3814. It is configured to irradiate the right side surface of the back box 3010 located on the right side of the. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 308, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the transparent portion of the light emitting area L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the performance display device 1600. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference for each angle and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 303, on the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, The lens portion of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 304, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the rear box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In addition, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front (the player side) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 with light, and the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the backside middle first decorative substrate 3322 excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted components. There is. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 with light, and the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the back side middle first decoration board 3322 can be seen from the player side by the front side of the back side middle first decoration board 3322 through the lens portion of the back side middle rotation decoration body 3310, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is a possibility that it will be possible. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even from the lens side of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, from the player side, The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 being visible under the back.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower surface of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the rear surface of the game machine) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a top view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 (the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate the light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

  As shown in FIG. 303, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. However, behind the back box 3010, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is behind the main control board 1310. Is irradiated so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting area L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010, but is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first lower back first decorative substrate 3322 are controlled not to emit light.

  From the above, as the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper decorative body. 3451, a back and back movable decorative body 3110 is provided, on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative bodies. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 306, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. The luminous decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and brightens the luminous area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 308, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the gaming board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the vicinity of a transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are lightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a line on one side of the island equipment, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island equipment. It is done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is closed and darkened. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring connecting the control members, a supply mechanism of a game ball B used for a game, and the like are arranged. In some cases, maintenance is required for a predetermined location on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on both sides of the island facility, the pachinko machines 1 on one side of the island facility are opened and the pachinko machines 1 on the other side are opened. Although the back surface can be maintained, since the inside of the island facility is dark, visibility of a portion to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as an axis. For the pachinko machine 1 that requires maintenance, the main body frame 4 does not move with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be opened to maintain the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of a hole) is emitted to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be viewed brightly, light from the outside (light from the hall) does not easily reach the part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the open axis of the body frame 4, I can't see it brightly. That is, when the location to be maintained is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor and the visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is difficult.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes, the back side and side surfaces are also other than decoration. It is configured to brighten for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decorative body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side, and the light is transmitted to the transparent part of the back box 3010. The light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light-emitting area L2 and the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side of the pachinko machine 1 are configured to pass through. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, and further brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the inside is closed and dark, but by making the back of the pachinko machine 1 bright, the inside of the island equipment can be made bright. Thereby, when performing maintenance on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, and the efficiency of visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In this example, the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 have both the function of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the role of brightening the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to be. For example, by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts increases and the cost increases. In this regard, a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

  In this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1. During the maintenance of the back side and the side, it is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed. Therefore, the light from the LED that makes the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter is not used. It is configured to be indirect light that cannot be seen directly. For example, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is viewed), the LED is provided with a cover so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED whose back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened from hindering the operation.

(About the characteristic configuration of the light-emitting decorative body of this example)
The light-emitting decorative body of the present example is variously devised so that the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is not only brightened for decorative purposes, but also the back side and the side faces are brightened for purposes other than decoration. Although described above in detail, specific configurations include the following configurations.

  First, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and enables light emission toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In the state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the back-back upper decorative body 3451 are located in front of the back-side movable decorative body 3110. I have. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration 3410, the back decoration 3421, and the back decoration 3451. The light is indirectly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. As a result, the lights from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 decorate the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 with light emission and brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1. After passing through 3010, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  The back decorative movable body 3110 of the present example receives and emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper decorative body 3421, and the back upper decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper decoration body 3421, and the back upper decoration body 3451. In addition, it is diffused to an area wider than the back movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently lit.

  In the above description, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the front upper back body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper back body 3451. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected with high reflectance on the rear surface of the back decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the back decoration body 3451. Thus, the light is efficiently emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. Accordingly, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  Next, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, and can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the back decoration board 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decoration 3111 of the back decoration 3110 is formed. , Through a plurality of holes, it is possible to go to the rear of the back decoration board 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and backward) the back decoration board 3114. Accordingly, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 emits light and decorates the back movable decoration body 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1. After passing through the transparent part 3010, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be played.

  Next, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, and can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. I have. Behind the back upper decorative body 3421, a portion where the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are located at the retracted position, and a back upper rear rotating decorative body. There is a part 3440, a back decoration 3451, and a part where the back movable decoration 3110 is not located. Among them, the part where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 are located at the retracted position is mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decoration board 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected by the rear upper and lower decorative ornaments 3440 and 3451 located behind and the rear movable ornamental body 3110 and directed forward (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiation. On the other hand, for the portion where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail located at the rear of the back-upper decoration board 3422. 553 is directly irradiated. As a result, the lights from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422, in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, pass through the back box 3010 and reach the pachinko machine 1. It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, as the light emitting decoration, a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front decoration 3421, a back-up rear decoration 3451, and a back-rear movable decoration 3110 are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided, and they are provided separately from each other. Has been. Then, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper portion of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is By visually observing the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side, and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 is brightened, and a plurality of areas on the back side or the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. It makes it possible to brighten.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, Is provided. As for the LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by a member located in front of the LED and is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The light is directed to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by the indirect light. On the other hand, with respect to the LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and an area that can be brightened by the indirect light and the pachinko machine 1 are used. It is also possible to use an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back side) and to divide it from a region which can be brightened by the direct light.

  In the above description, the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED may be a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where a worker such as a hall manager can work. Is suitable. As will be described later in detail, examples of the site where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work include an operation unit 640a and a detachable unit of the back cover 640. The operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where the direct light from the LED can be received, so that the operation unit 640a can receive the direct light from the LED and make it brighter than the indirect light. it can. Thus, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By visually recognizing the operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit, an object to be operated by the operator can be easily confirmed, and the attachment / detachment of the back cover 640 to / from the main body frame 4 is facilitated, and the inspection work of the hall manager is performed. Can be facilitated.

  When direct light from an LED is applied to a portion where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work as described above, a substrate on which such an LED is mounted may be used. Preferably, the mounting surface is dark (eg, green or black). When a dark mounting surface is used, light is hardly reflected on the dark mounting surface, so that the direct light from the LED does not diffuse much, and the portion irradiated with the direct light from the LED is pinpointed. It becomes possible to irradiate light. Thereby, for example, when the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED can be received at a pinpoint. The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly recognized by the difference in brightness from the peripheral portion.

(Adjustment of light intensity of light emitting area provided on back side of pachinko machine)
It should be noted that there are various hall environments in which the island equipment is provided, and for example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island equipment is separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration for brightening the back side, but there is a possibility that such a back side need not be brightened. In addition, although the inside of the island facility is dark, as the gaming machines provided in the island facility, if the number of pachinko machines 1 whose back side is brightened is small, only the back side is brightened with normal brightness. Then, there is a possibility that the inside of the island facility may not be bright enough. Therefore, an example in which the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

  The light emitting decorative body of this example includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. Are provided, but for these LEDs, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, so that the light amount is stepwisely increased. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light amount of the LED from 1 (lowest light amount) to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the stage increases. . In other words, the LED of the light emitting decorative body is configured such that light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, but the light amount of the LED is adjustable. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the interior of the island facility has a bright hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the light amount of the LED to be small so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is dark. In the case of a dark hall environment inside the island facility, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the amount of light of the LED to be large so as to make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 bright. As described above, by adjusting the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when maintaining the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, The efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body, and the degree of freedom of the visual recognition mode with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, assuming that the light amounts of the LEDs are adjusted collectively for all the light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example, when the light amounts of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorative bodies are reduced. The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and the original effect (such as a customer approach) using the light-emitting decorative body may be lost while the worker is working during the hall operation. Further, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body and neglected to return the light amount of the LED after the work, the original effect using the light-emitting decorative body is reduced. May be lost. In this respect, in this example, among the light emitting decorative bodies provided on the front surface side of the game board 5, the back front rotating decoration 3410, the back front decoration 3421, the back rear decoration 3451, and the back As for the rear movable decoration body 3110 and the like, since it also has a role of making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter as described above, it is an object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. Among the light emitting decorations provided on the side, a light emitting decoration having a first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for light emitting decoration of the first special winning opening 2005 is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is a light-emitting decorative body that does not have a role of brightening the light, and that is made brighter by focusing on the purpose of attracting customers, and is not subject to the adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. That is, among the light-emitting decorative bodies for the purpose of decoration, at least the light-emitting decorative body having a role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is an object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. Thereby, the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body is adjusted, and, for example, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the light emitting decorative body provided on the front side of the game board 5 has the brightness. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the purpose of attracting customers satisfactorily without becoming dark.

  Note that the light amount adjustment operation of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can be performed both in a standby state in which the symbols are not variably displayed and in a variable display in which the symbols are variably displayed. In this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a separate operation unit that allows the hall manager to perform a light amount adjustment operation may be provided. At this time, the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the player's operation unit is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount cannot be set to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off. Regarding the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that uses the light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5 to brighten the back side, the wiring exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 It is easy to confirm the state from the outside, but it is difficult to confirm the state from the outside of the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 from outside will be described below.

  In this example, on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided as light-emitting decorative bodies for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 307, the luminous decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is a transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side. Brightening the light emitting area L2 in the vicinity, and as shown in FIG. 308, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 allows the pachinko machine 1 to be visually recognized from the rear side, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the pachinko machine 1). The light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of FIG.

  Further, on the back surface of the back box 3010, a decorative board provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510, a production drive board 1720 for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like are attached. Has been. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings extend along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. I arranged it like this. In this regard, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, when the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side or the right side inside the back box 3010 is disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating the light such that the left side and the right side are brightened, the visibility of the wiring from the side of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the work of confirming the state of the wiring is performed. Efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is a portion far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. Light from the outside (light of the hall) easily reaches the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. , Light from the outside (light of a hole) hardly reaches, and it cannot be visually recognized brightly. For this reason, when a structure for brightening the back surface or side surface is not provided unlike a conventional gaming machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1, which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. When it becomes necessary to check the state of the wiring, it has become particularly difficult. In this regard, in this example, in the present example, light is applied so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010, and wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 is described. Are arranged along the right side inside the back box 3010. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

  In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring connecting the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is given. Alternatively, for example, a wiring connected to the main control board 1310 may be used. The main control board 1310 is for controlling the progress of the game, and for example, outputs information about the game to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. I am trying. At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is illegal, the information on the game cannot be normally grasped outside (the hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 A situation arises in which fraud is likely to occur. In other words, among the various wirings, the wirings connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be highly important wirings for playing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the light so as to brighten the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and the illegality of such wiring is reduced. Can be prevented.

  In addition, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook portion formed integrally with the back box 3010 and a bundling wire with respect to the wirings along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. These hook portions and the bundled wires are formed of a translucent member, and are provided at positions visible through transparent portions on the left and right sides of the back box 3010. Thus, light is emitted to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). At this time, it is possible to make the hook portion and the bundled wires themselves bright and to visually recognize the state of the wiring. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). Moreover, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

  In addition, the wirings along the left side surface and the right side surface in the inside of the back box 3010 are formed so that the transparent parts on the left side surface and the right side of the back box 3010 are not blocked by the plurality of wirings. Are superimposed or bundled in the vertical direction on the left side surface or right side surface of the back box 3010. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided so as to be parallel to the left side and the right side of the back box 3010, a transparent portion on the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 will be blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 will be closed. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to cover the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(About the change of the visual recognition mode of the light emitting area when the state changes)
Further, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, if the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the main body frame 4 is being maintained, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility are to be maintained. Even if an abnormality occurs, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized, making it difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a light-emitting decorative body, at the upper part of the gaming board 5, a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper front decorative body 3421, a back-upper decorative body 3451, and a back-movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, with regard to these luminous decorative bodies, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibrations occurs and the game cannot be played, the luminous decorations remain until the abnormality is resolved. The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting regions are made to blink. With this, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility and the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility can be maintained. When an abnormality occurs, the light-emitting area that can be brightened by the other light-emitting decorations of the pachinko machine 1 blinks, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized through the interior of the island facility. Become. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility can be found at an early stage through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  Further, with respect to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorative body, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, so that the light amount is adjusted stepwise. Making it possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light amount of the LED from 1 (lowest light amount) to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the stage increases. . As described above in detail, for the LED of the light emitting decoration, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the amount of light of the LED. However, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration is detected, the LED of the light emitting decoration body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be controlled to blink with the adjusted light amount. When the adjusted light amount is darkened, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body and neglected to return the light amount of the LED after the work, the light amount of the LED is small and the light amount of the LED from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. Then, in some cases, the occurrence of an abnormality was not noticed. In this regard, in this example, during a period in which a game cannot be performed due to occurrence of some abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is determined. The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined light amount (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit light amount among the light amounts that can be adjusted in a normal state). Accordingly, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light-emitting area that can be made brighter by the light-emitting decorative body flickers, the light-emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to detect the abnormality without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality, and to surely detect the abnormality, thereby preventing illegal operation of the other pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented.

  Similarly, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting regions are made to blink. For example, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility, the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed. Even if a fraudster opens the frame 4 fraudulently, it is difficult to notice the fraudulent opening action because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that has been fraudulently opened cannot be seen. However, in this example, when the fraudulent person illegally opens the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 brighter with the light emitting decoration. The blinking of the light emitting area makes it possible to recognize an unauthorized opening action through the inside of the island facility. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility via the inside of the island facility is found at an early stage. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 3, not only a period until the main body frame 4 is closed but also a certain time after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until the control, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration may be continued. With this, when a fraudulent person opens the body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, even if the opening is short, the light emission decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 Blinking of the light emitting area that can be brightened by the body will continue for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent situations in which an illegally opened action is missed through the inside of the island facility.

  In addition, regarding the light emitting decoration, when the state shifts to the standby state in which the pattern change is not performed, the light amount of the LED provided in the light emitting decoration is changed until the pattern change is started and the standby state ends. I am trying to control the decrease. Then, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side surface of the back box 3010 (a right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ) The light emitting area L2 near the transparent area and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent area on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided to reduce the light amount of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration. It was decided that these light emitting regions would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance and the main body 4 is under maintenance, the front of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is installed. Since the side is invisible, it is difficult to grasp whether the pachinko machine 1 is playing a game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be made brighter by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , It is possible to determine whether or not a game is being played through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, it is possible to know whether another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is playing a game through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to judge whether or not it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring so that fraud is not performed during the standby state.

(Regarding change in visual recognition mode of light emitting area during operation of light emitting ornament)
In addition, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized. It is difficult to check whether the body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a luminous decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back-upper rotating decoration 3410, a back-upper decorative body 3421, a back-upper rotating decoration 3440, and a back-up. A rear decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided. The light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. doing. Of these, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. . Then, in a state where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-back movable decoration 3110 have moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is transparent to the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 near the site was prevented from reaching the region. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not interrupted because it is not located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the light reaches the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, during operation of the light-emitting decorative body that can operate, of the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies, the brightness in the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes, and the light is visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. Thereby, even if it is from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light-emitting decorative body is operating by changing the visual recognition mode of the light-emitting area L1.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the operable light emitting decorations are initially operated. Specifically, the operation of moving the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-side movable decoration body 3110 from the retreat position to the appearance position and then from the appearance position to the retreat position is performed. Repeatedly, the operation of confirming that these light emitting decorations can be moved to the appearance position is performed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. At times, it is not possible to directly visually confirm from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration is normally performed, and it is particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this respect, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed in accordance with the operation of the light emitting decoration body, and the light emitting area L1 is generated even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. By visually observing the change in the visual recognition mode, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body is normally performed. Thereby, although the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized when the power switch is operated, the visual appearance of the light emitting area L1 is changed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is performed. It is only necessary to check whether or not the visual operation is performed, and the efficiency of the visual operation for the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body can be improved.

  It should be noted that among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is configured to change in brightness when the light emitting decoration capable of operating is operated. It is preferable that the light-emitting decoration body be configured so that the change in brightness becomes large between the retracted position and the appearance position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light-emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422, but a back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422. When the back decoration 3451 or the back movable decoration 3110 moves to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3422 may be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. In such a configuration, when the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 located behind the back-upper decoration board 3422 or the back-movable decoration 3110 move to the appearance position, Light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be reduced. As a result, the change in brightness in the light-emitting area L1 between the state in which the light-emitting decorative body is in the retracted position and the state in which the light-emitting decorative body is in the appearance position is large, and whether the light-emitting decorative body is operating from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be easily grasped.

(About the light from the back side of the staging display)
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using light from the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, and the effect display is performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration is cut off by the effect display device 1600, and it is not possible to light the bright spot on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 only by using the light-emitting decoration. There is. For example, in a region behind the effect display device 1600, if a part that the hall manager needs to work on is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be made bright even in a region behind the effect display device 1600 will be described below.

  First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 309, the effect display device 1600 is provided so as to cover a box-like box 1611 (metal frame) having an opening at the front and back and an opening at the front side of the box 1611 to display a predetermined image. A liquid crystal panel 1612 which is provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and which is capable of irradiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612; and a light guide plate 1613 which is provided below the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light guide substrate 1615 provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box 1611; A metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel driving board that drives the liquid crystal panel 1612.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the light emitting substrate 1615 on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can emit light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and can surface-emit the front surface side of the light guide plate 1613, and can be positioned in front of the light guide plate 1613. Light can be emitted toward the liquid crystal panel 1612 that operates. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  Further, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  On the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect drive board 1720 is mounted. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and is connected to the wiring side connector on which the wiring from the effect driving substrate 1720 is bundled, so that the effect of the light emitting substrate 1615 can be obtained. The driving substrate 1720 can be electrically connected. Thus, the effect drive board 1720 can control whether or not a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are lit, adjust brightness, and the like.

  The light guide plate 1613 is configured such that the front surface side of the light guide plate 1613 emits light strongly by receiving light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. On the other hand, the rear side surface and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit light weakly. As described above, since the light emitting substrate 1615 has the coating film made of white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components, The light emission is strong not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613.

  The back panel 1614 is configured to block the light from the light guide plate 1613, which emits light by receiving light from the plurality of LEDs, to the rear. A plurality of openings that can pass through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. Thereby, the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted rearward (rearward of the effect display device 1600) from the plurality of openings. It is possible.

  Specifically, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left portion of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600, and two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 slightly near the center. The opening C was provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D was provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

  First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Further, the opening A is one size larger than the connector 1615a. Thereby, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A. Then, light from the rear surface or side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is radiated from the opening A, so that the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wires from the production drive board 1720 are bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a. By visually recognizing brightly, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the connector on the wiring side is properly connected, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work by the hall manager.

  By the way, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light emitting board 1615. From the opening A, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is visible, while all of the plurality of LEDs are visible. It is configured to be impossible. In other words, of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position where the LED can be visually recognized from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly radiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the worker, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is indirectly emitted through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. Can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured such that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be seen through the openings B to D.

  The opening B of the back panel 1614 is provided side by side vertically on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600, at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. Is provided so as to cover. The back cover 640 can be opened and closed around the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided vertically separated so as to be operable by an operator, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. Are provided at two positions where the two operation units 640a can be respectively attached and detached. By detaching the operation unit 640a from the attachment / detachment unit, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640) and the detachable portion are both transparent or translucent members.

  When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, an operation section 640 a of the back cover 640 and a detachable section are provided at positions corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (the rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. In other words, since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is radiated from the opening B, the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the detachable unit Are provided at positions where such light can be received. Thus, the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 can receive the light from the opening B and make the light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 bright. When performing work on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640. By brightly visually recognizing the light emitting region L6 near the attachment / detachment portion, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, facilitate the attachment / detachment of the back cover 640 to / from the body frame 4, and allow the hall manager The inspection work can be facilitated.

  The main body frame 4 can be opened and closed around a main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 when viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation unit 640 a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions near the open shaft of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided side by side on the gaming island, and the inside of the gaming island is darkened in a closed space. When the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, external light (hole light) reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main frame 4. While it is easy and can be visually recognized brightly, external light (hole light) hardly reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4 and is brightly visually recognized. Can not do it. In this regard, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main frame 4, and the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. However, light from the outside (light from the hole) is difficult to reach, but the light from the opening B allows the operating section 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting area L6 near the attaching / detaching section to be viewed brightly. Can be.

  The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side portion along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Or a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit. 600 is located. Note that at least the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 of the payout unit 560 are transparent members.

  Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 includes The light-emitting region L7 near the payout device 580 and the upper full ball path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. Thus, in the payout unit 560, when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. It is possible to easily check whether or not the ball is clogged in the passage for guiding the ball B, and when the ball is clogged, the ball can be easily removed. Work can be facilitated.

  The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided at an upper portion along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. A tank rail 553 is provided at the position. Note that the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting area near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is emitted. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  As described above in detail, with regard to the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration occurs and the game cannot be played, the abnormality is performed. Until the situation is resolved, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. As a result, these light-emitting regions blink.

  In addition, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibrations occurs and the game cannot be performed, if the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 needs to contact the outer frame 3. In some cases, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates disposed inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4 by operating the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640. In some cases, a ball clogging may occur in the payout unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is configured to blink the LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the effect display device 1600 similarly to the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the maintenance can be performed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work target. In this regard, in the present example, the effect of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced even if some abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played. The LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is controlled to be always on as in the normal case. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area around the connector 1615 a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is provided as a light emitting area capable of receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 and brightening the light. A light emitting area L5, a light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the detachable unit, a light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 are provided. By controlling the LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the illuminating device 1660 to be constantly turned on as in the normal state, the visibility of these light emitting regions does not change. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but in a place where maintenance is highly necessary, the lighting is controlled constantly as in the normal case. Providing the light emitting region described above is favorable without changing the visibility thereof, and can improve the efficiency of the maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

(About visibility of the gap between control boards provided on the back side of pachinko machine 1)
In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using light from a light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 and an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. When the entire area on the back side of the machine 1 is configured to be bright, the hall manager can easily perform maintenance work in the island facilities, while various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Therefore, an example will be described below in which the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright, but it is difficult for a wrongdoer to perform wrongdoing on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. .

  As shown in FIG. 306, as the light-emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, A decorative body 3451 and a back movable movable body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right sides are provided. A decoration unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from behind, and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

  In addition, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 can be given. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 and slightly near the center, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. In addition, an opening D is provided above the back panel 1614. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B is used to operate the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the attaching / detaching portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting area L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting area L6 from behind the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700, which are attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is provided on each of the effect drive boards 1720 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emitting mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp on the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light-emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp on the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light-emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. The light from the pilot lamp on the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 near the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be cited as configurations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The above-mentioned light emitting area is provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided around a control board group. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. Thus, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is closed and darkened. However, by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect driving board 1720 is provided. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, a gap between the control boards that form the control board group (a gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, and the panel). The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. And such wiring is arranged in a gap between the control boards constituting the control board group. Among them, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, so that if a wire connected to the main control board 1310 is tampered with, the wrongdoer can benefit. There is a problem that an unjust situation occurs. In this respect, while making the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, by making the gap between the control boards forming the control board group darker, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap. It is possible to prevent fraud on the wiring or the like connected to the control board 1310.

(About visibility for the configuration of metal powder measures)
Next, an electric trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 310. FIG. 310 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of a configuration for preventing metal powder.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rails 553 are separated from the game balls B by the abrasion such as the game balls B colliding with each other, rubbing against each other, and falling. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is blocked, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game balls to the game balls B by the payout device 580.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Have been. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding part 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the cutout part 553aa, The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. By doing so, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to cause the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing the operation of removing the metal powder.

  By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, which causes a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with peripheral control ICs, ICs such as ROM and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described below is provided with ICs such as peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs are reduced, the pin intervals of the various connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are narrowed, and the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased. And the space between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, so that it is necessary to take measures against electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 310, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed in a staircase shape in which a plurality of bends are made downward as it goes. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 310, the first eave portion 551da extended rearward of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551 da in surface contact.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. I have. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa by the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a causes the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. To prevent the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  As described above in detail, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, as a light-emitting decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-upper front rotary decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decoration A body 3421, a back decoration body 3440, a back decoration body 3451, and a back decoration body 3110 are provided. The light-emitting decoration body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is provided in the back of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is irradiated toward the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is removed from the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the metal powder adheres to the main guide portion 553a of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder floats up as a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become something. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and efficiently removes the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a. It can be carried out.

  Further, the light emitting region L1 also includes the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guiding portion 553a. The first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the notch portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a adheres to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, the transparent member is provided from behind the pachinko machine 1. When the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder floats up like a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder has adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also to remove the metal powder from the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be performed efficiently.

  In the above, even when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is used. Since the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is opened, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is released from the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guiding portion 553a and the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, the light from the LED of the back-upper rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-upper decoration body 3421, the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-moving decorative body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in a tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not desirable. Is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed by the light source of the LED.

  After confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 or the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is removed. Luminous decorative body (back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and back upper front decorative body 3421, back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and back-upper decorative body 3451, back-back movable) The light from the decorative body 3110) may hinder the removal operation. For this reason, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder by opening the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which the metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is opened. Of the luminous decorative body (the front upper back rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, the rear upper back rotating decorative body 3440, and the rear upper back decorative body 3451) brightening the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. Alternatively, the LED of the back movable movable body 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not brightened. In addition, not only the light-emitting decorative body that makes the light-emitting region L1 bright, but also the light of the LED that may hinder the operation of removing the metal powder may be turned off. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter to hinder the operation of removing the metal powder.

  However, depending on the hall environment, it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, for example, when the hall itself is dark and metal powder is removed. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light emitting decorative body (a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and a front upper rotating decorative body 3410) that arbitrarily brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. A light emission start switch may be provided to enable the LEDs of the front upper back decoration 3421, the rear upper back decoration 3440, the rear upper back decoration 3451, and the rear back decoration 3110) to start emitting light. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position that can be operated only when the body frame 4 is open. Thus, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start the light emission of the LED for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to match the hall environment. be able to.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is molded of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the operational effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the abutting portion with the first eave portion 551da such that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. , The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, has the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first eave portion 551da of the 551a, the metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Dropping toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the vehicle, and eventually from the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. I can do it.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are formed of the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. From falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eave portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main eaves portion 553aa is mainly provided not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the guiding portion 553a can be received and adhered at the first eave portion 551da, and the metal ball of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 by suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the 1500. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the example described above, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eave portion 551da are in contact with each other. The portion 551da may be arranged to be separated. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da cooperate with each other, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is placed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is not limited as long as the entry is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in the present embodiment, about two-half the diameter of the game ball B). 1 (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), so that the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is displaced. This is effective for preventing metal powder from causing electrical trouble.

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, temporarily, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover body 1501.

  In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, respectively, one or a combination thereof is provided except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) is dropped and invaded into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter is electrically dropped by the foreign matter. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

  When the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface is increased or the area of the ventilation holes 1501 is increased to compensate for the heat dissipation function. May be. This can contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

  Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is substantially horizontal. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls outside from the main guiding portion 553a and adheres to the upper surface of the cover 1501 via the cutout portion 553aa, the metal powder can be retained on the upper surface of the cover 1501. it can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. In addition, as long as the metal powder of the game balls B does not drop toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined.

  Further, the first eaves member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate 551a as another member (another structural component).

  In addition, when the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and / or the back cover 640 covers the upper and rear sides of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, or the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a are used. If the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a toward the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low is low, one of the upper surfaces of the cover 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is (For example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are partially closed, May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. However, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state where the cover body 1501 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are partly closed). In this case, the ventilating hole 1501az is also provided.

  A plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes along the lower side thereof, seven connector holes provided at a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 and a position corresponding to the volume control switch, and seven connector holes, and Volume adjusting holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output substrate, which will be described later, is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 form a gap, Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are exposed through these two connector holes.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 receives air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a shield plate housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is taken in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the 1540, and the gaps described above (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) A gap formed in the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a volume control hole formed in the cover 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed on the cover 1501 Through the hole and the gap formed in the hole)

  Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the flow of the air and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to an increase in the probability of being sucked and an electric trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder. In such a case, a malfunction (failure) occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the game ball is formed by forming the first eaves portion 551da along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves which prevents heavy metal powder of B, which is heavy powder, from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls, similar to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide path 570a is removed from the guide path 570a. A cutout, hole, or groove that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570. A payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630. , A payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, hole, or groove on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a notch formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 can be formed. , Holes or grooves, and positions of various substrates such as a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted, can be configured to be shifted, and both can be configured. Can also. Further, an eave-shaped member is formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The position of the cutout, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured by shifting, or can be configured by adopting both.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above has the following features.
(Solution 1)
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A light emitting unit capable of emitting light in association with a game effect executed as the game progresses,
A decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted,
A light-emitting decorative portion having a light-transmitting property and covering the front side of the decorative substrate,
A white coating film is formed on the surface of the decorative substrate, and a mounting auxiliary symbol is formed on the white coating film in a color different from that of the white coating film so as to identify the light emitting means.
Inside the light-emitting decoration portion, an obscuration member that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting auxiliary symbol by changing the refractive index of light is arranged.
It is characterized by the following.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design by making it difficult for the mounting auxiliary symbol to be visually recognized and not allowing the player to visually recognize information that is not related to the game, and the world view of the gaming machine is destroyed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine of Solution 1, the degree of the three-dimensional processing is changed according to the distance to the decorative substrate.
With such a configuration, for example, by increasing the degree of three-dimensional processing as the distance between the decorative substrate and the light-emitting decorative portion is shorter and weakening the degree of three-dimensional processing as the distance is longer, the mounting auxiliary symbol is provided through the light-emitting decorative portion. Can be reliably prevented from being visually recognized.

(Solution 3)
In the gaming machine according to Solution 1 or 2, the first light emitting decoration portion and the second light emitting decoration portion are arranged apart from each other.
With such a configuration, the mounting auxiliary symbol can be prevented from being visually recognized through the light emitting decoration portion, and in addition, a gap is formed between the first light emitting decoration portion and the second light emitting decoration portion, which gives a three-dimensional effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the design and prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

(Solution 4)
In the gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 3, the mounting auxiliary symbol is formed in yellow.
By configuring in this way, on the surface of the decorative substrate on which the white coating film is formed, since the reflectance and brightness are close to those of white, and the mounting auxiliary symbol is formed in yellow with little visual difference (contrast), It is possible to make it difficult to identify the mounting auxiliary symbol as compared with the case where the mounting auxiliary symbol is formed in another color.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention is applicable to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine, and furthermore, a plurality of drums ( The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a torso or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 311, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge (not shown). With the hinge as a center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, thereby turning the front door (front frame) 6002 into a main body. Portion (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of a front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with a locking unit (not shown) to form a main body (box) 6004. This is used for opening and closing the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal cylindrical cylinder main body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on a front end surface of the cylinder main body, and a rear side of the cylinder main body. A metal rotation transmitting member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from behind, and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is positioned from the rear end toward the front at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmitting member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. The rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated by inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other in the state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004, The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and the main body part (not shown) through a door frame metal ground wire. The box 6004 is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. The ground board (not shown) can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and ground it to the island equipment of the game hall (earth). It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An open switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. I have. This opening switch detects opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electric signal by the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. However, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The release switch is not located near the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is provided on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative portions are not plated with decoration at all, and some are decorated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electroconductivity, so that electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative portions, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive members are directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. And some are electrically connected). Thereby, by transmitting the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is possible to prevent various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. Also, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into the decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. Through the main body (box) 6004 to the ground substrate provided inside, and from the ground substrate through the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  Note that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static elimination pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 is used to decorate the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. There are also decorative plating on the entire surface. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). And the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. It is not electrically connected to the ground substrate, but is electrically connected to a terminal of a power supply board (not shown) of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 to connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board. It may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with AC 24 V from the island facility in the game hall. The AC 24 V has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly allows a current to flow, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and the current flows. , Which have the performance of returning to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thus, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply substrate to the ground terminal (ground) from the N terminal of the power supply substrate by a surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006. The medal slot 6008, the bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this protrusion. Further, in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged, and below the decorative board 6024, a tray 6026 is provided. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and storage adjustment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 accommodates, together with the main control board 1310, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, the setting key switch Reference numeral 1311a is arranged inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, or may be fixed to the main body. The power supply unit may be fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. And a setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided through the display window. You can see through. The three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a light-transmissive pattern band, in which a plurality of types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as pattern information, is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. Is visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310, as a game medium, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the variable display of the symbol information is started. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls into the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The variable display of the symbol information is started based on this, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-providing state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back production unit 3110 Back movable decoration 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c First LED accommodation section 3113d Second LED accommodation section 3113e Reflecting section 3114 Decorative substrate (decorative substrate) behind back
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Cover plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A light emitting unit capable of emitting light in association with a game effect executed as the game progresses,
A decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on the front mounting surface;
A light-emitting decorative portion having a light-transmitting property and covering the front side of the decorative substrate,
A white coating film is formed on the front mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and a mounting auxiliary symbol is formed on the white coating film with a yellow paint so as to identify the light emitting means.
Inside the light-emitting decoration portion, an obscuration member that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting auxiliary symbol by changing the refractive index of light is arranged.
A gaming machine characterized by that .